DEFINITY® Enterprise Communication Server Release 8.
Copyright 2000, Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A. Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change. Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party, for example, persons other than your company’s employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s behalf.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document Overview xv About this document Overview This document describes the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server (ECS) Release 8 administration, and includes all incremental releases up to and including Release 8.2. You may also want to see the DEFINITY ECS Change Description to see what is new as of R8.2.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document Purpose xvi Purpose This document provides an overall reference for planning, operating, and administering your DEFINITY ECS. The book is divided into three volumes that present information on how to perform administrative tasks, how to complete administrative screens, and more detailed information on individual features.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document Organization xvii The following list describes the sections in this book. ‘‘System basics’’ tells you how to log in and log off, set permissions for others who use the administration terminal, set daylight savings rules, set the system date and time, post messages, and back up the information you administer. ‘‘Introduction to the DEFINITY system’’ provides information on system-wide functions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document Task-related information xviii ‘‘Managing announcements’’ tells you how to record, save, copy, restore and delete announcements. ‘‘Managing group communication’’ shows you how to administer your system so users can page other users or use their phones as intercoms. You can also give specific users permission to monitor other users’ calls or to interrupt active calls with important messages.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document Feature-related information ■ xix Fixing problems This section is not included in all task sections. It provides a brief coverage of possible problems, possible causes, and suggested solutions. ■ More information Presents additional technical information that pertains directly to the completion of the current task.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document Conventions used in this document ■ Commands are printed in bold face as follows: command. ■ Keys and buttons are printed as follows: KEY. ■ xx Screen displays are printed in constant width as follows: screen display. ■ Variables are printed in italics as follows: variable. ■ We show complete commands in this book, but you can always use an abbreviated version of the command.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document Trademarks and service marks ! SECURITY ALERT: Indicates when system administration may leave your system open to toll fraud.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 About this document How to get help xxiii How to get help If you need additional help, the following services are available. You may need to purchase an extended service agreement to use some of these services. See your Lucent Technologies representative for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Logging into the system System basics 1 1 This section provides the basic step-by-step procedures you need to manage your DEFINITY ECS. It explains how to log in and log off, set permissions for others who use the administration terminal, set daylight savings rules, set date and time, post messages, and back up the information you administer.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Logging into the system 2 Instructions Logging into the system This procedure provides instructions for logging in from the system terminal not a remote terminal. To log into the system: 1. Enter your login name and press RETURN. 2. Enter your password and press RETURN. For security, your password does not display as you type it. 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Logging in with Access Security Gateway 3 If an LDN was dialed, the attendant will answer. a. Ask to be transferred to the UCD group extension number. You receive data tone or visually receive answer confirmation. b. Transfer the voice call to your data terminal. The Login prompt appears. 2. Complete the steps for ‘‘Logging into the system’’ on page 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Logging off the system 4 Instructions To log into the system with ASG: 1. Enter your login ID and press RETURN. The system displays the challenge number (for example, 555-1234) and system Product ID number (for example, 1000000000). The Product ID provides Lucent Services with the specific DEFINITY ECS system identifier. 2. Press ON to turn on your Access Security Gateway Key. 3. Type your PIN and press ON.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Setting command permissions 5 Instructions To log off: 1. Type logoff and press RETURN. If the Facility Test Calls or Remote Access features are administered, Alarm origination is disabled, or if you have busied out resources or active minor or major alarms, a security screen appears. You may want to take appropriate action (for example, disable these features or address any alarms) before you log off.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 System basics Setting command permissions 6 Instructions In our example, we set the permissions necessary to allow the user to administer daylight savings time rules. To change command permissions: 1. Type change permissions sup3ru and press RETURN. The Command Permission Categories screen appears. COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name: sup3ru COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin. and Maint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Establishing daylight savings rules 7 1 Establishing daylight savings rules DEFINITY ECS allows you to set the daylight savings time rules so features, such as time-of-day routing and call detail recording (CDR), adjust automatically to daylight savings time. The correct date and time assure that CDR records are correct.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Establishing daylight savings rules 8 1 2. Complete the Start fields for rule 1. a. Type Sunday in the Change Day field. b. Type April in the Month field. c. Type 1 in the Date field. d. Type 3:00 in the Time field. e. Type 1:00 in the Increment field. This information specifies the day, month, date, and time and increment at which you want the system clock to transition to daylight saving time.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Setting the system date and time 9 Displaying daylight savings time rules To display daylight savings time rules: 1. Type display daylight-savings-rules and press RETURN. The Daylight Savings Rule screen appears. Verify the information you entered is correct.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 System basics Setting the system date and time 10 DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week: Tuesday Day of the Month: 3 Month: November Year: 1998 TIME Hour: 20 Minute: 30 Second: XX Daylight Savings Rule: 1 Type: standard 2. Complete the Date fields. a. Type Monday in the Day of the Week field. b. Type November in the Month field. c. Type 3 in the Day of the Month field. d. Type 1998 in the Year field. 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Using the bulletin board 11 Related topics Refer to ‘‘Establishing daylight savings rules’’ for more information about setting system time. Using the bulletin board DEFINITY ECS allows you to post information to the bulletin board. You can also display and print messages from other switch administrators and Lucent Technologies personnel, using the bulletin board.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Using the bulletin board Message (* indicates high-priority) *Lucent is in the process of *investigating your trunk lockup problem. *The Bulletin Board will be updated as *we find information. * * * * * * We recently added a new trunk group (14) and have had many of the members getting locked up.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 Issue 1 April 2000 System basics Saving translations 13 2. Enter a space as the first character on each line of the message you want to delete and press RETURN. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. Saving translations DEFINITY ECS retains all translation data in memory while the system is operating. If the switch goes down, you lose all translation data. You must save in-memory translation data to the memory card (flash ROM), disk, or tape.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 System basics Saving translations 14 end of the specified grace period, otherwise you cannot access system management commands (such as: add, change, remove, and duplicate) that modify translation data. Lucent specifies the grace period during a system installation or following an upgrade.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 1 System basics Saving translations 15 Fixing problems NOTE: You cannot see whether the translation ID on the flash card corresponds to the number on the Processor circuit packs. However, if the numbers do not match, the system issues an error message when you attempt a save translation operation. When failures occur, the system responds with the following error codes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Understanding your configuration Introduction to the DEFINITY system 17 2 This section provides you with general information about the DEFINITY ECS and some of the system-wide functions. It explains how to understand your configuration, read and use your dial plan, and shows you how to make simple changes such as adding extension ranges.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Understanding the dial plan 19 Understanding the dial plan Your dial plan tells your system how to interpret dialed digits. For example, if you dial 9 on your system to access an outside line, it is actually the dial plan that tells the system to find an external trunk when a dialed string begins with a 9. The dial plan also tells the system how many digits to expect for certain calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Understanding the dial plan 20 ■ Dial access codes (dac) — Allows you to use trunk access codes (TAC) and feature access codes (FAC) in the same range. For example, you could define the group 600–699 for DAC, which would allow both FAC and TAC in that range. Dial access codes can start with any number from 1 to 9 and contain up to 4 digits, * and #.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Adding feature access codes Issue 1 April 2000 21 Adding extension ranges You may find that as your needs grow you want a new set of extensions. Before you can assign a station to an extension, the extension must belong to a range that is defined in the dial plan. Let’s add a new set of extensions that start with 3 and are 4 digits long (3000–3999). To add this set of extensions to the dial plan: 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Controlling the calls your users can make and receive 22 Changing feature access codes Feature access codes (FAC) allow users to activate and deactivate features from their phones. A user who knows the FAC for a feature does not need a programmed button to use the feature.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Controlling the calls your users can make and receive 23 Strategies for assigning CORs The best strategy is to make it as simple as possible for you and your staff to know which COR to assign when administering your system.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Controlling the features your users can access 24 Now we have to define the password. 5. Type change system-parameters features and press ENTER. The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system System-wide settings 25 System-wide settings There are some settings that you enable or disable for the entire system, and these settings effect every user. You may want to look over the various System Parameters screens and decide which settings best meet the needs of your users.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Setting up Music-on-Hold 27 2. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN. The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears. 3. In the Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept Treatment field, type announcement. Another blank field appears. 4. In this blank field, type 2020. This is the extension of the Intercept Denied Calls announcement you recorded earlier. 5.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Providing service for multiple tenants 29 Providing service for multiple tenants If you manage the switching system for an entire office building, you may need to provide individualized phone service for each of the firms who are tenants.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Providing service for multiple tenants 30 2. For Source 1, enter music for the Type, 01A1001 for the Port, and Country for the Description. 3. Move to Source 3, and enter music for the Type, 01A1003 for the Port, and Classical for the Description. 4. Press ENTER to save your changes. 5. Type change tenant 1 and press RETURN. The Tenant screen appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Receiving notification in an emergency Issue 1 April 2000 31 Receiving notification in an emergency If one of your users calls an emergency service such as the police or ambulance, someone, perhaps the receptionist, security or the front desk, needs to know who made the call. Thus, when the emergency personnel arrive, they can be directed to the right place.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Receiving notification in an emergency 33 Finally, we make sure that all security personnel and the attendant will have to acknowledge the alert. 11. Type change system-parameters crisis-alert and press RETURN. The ‘‘Crisis Alert System Parameters’’ screen appears. 12. Go to the Every User Responds field and type y. 13. Press ENTER to save your changes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Notifying a digital pager of an emergency 34 Notifying a digital pager of an emergency You also have the option of having your emergency calls go to a digital pager. When someone dials an emergency number (for example, 911), the system sends the extension and location (that originated the emergency call) to the administered pager.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Other useful settings 35 6. In the Retry Interval (sec) field, type 30. This is length of time between retries. 7. In the Main Number field, type the number that is to be displayed at the end of the pager message. We’ll type 303-555-0800. 8. In the Pager Number field, type the number for the pager. We’ll type 303-555-9001. 9. In the Pin Number field, type pp77614567890.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 2 Issue 1 April 2000 Introduction to the DEFINITY system Other useful settings 36 Automatic hold You can set a system-wide parameter that allows your users to initiate a call on a second line without putting the first call on Hold. This is called Automatic Hold, and you enable it on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. If you do not turn this on, the active call drops when a the user presses the second line button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Adding new phones Managing phones 37 3 This section explains how to add, swap, upgrade, and remove the phones on your system. This section also gives you tips for customizing your own phone (for system administration) so it has the feature buttons you need for many administration and troubleshooting tasks. Note that this section does not tell you how to administer an attendant console.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Managing phones Adding new phones 38 Gathering necessary information 1. Determine whether the phone is an analog, digital, ISDN, or hybrid set. You need this information to determine the type of port you need, because the port type and phone type must match. If you do not know what type of phone you have, refer to the Type field under ‘‘Station’’ on page 882 for a list of phones by model number. 2.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Adding new phones 39 Tip: If you add several phones at one time, you may want to print a paper copy of the System Configuration screen. To print the screen to a printer attached to the system terminal, type list configuration station print and press RETURN. To print to the system printer that you use for scheduled reports, type list configuration station schedule immediate and press RETURN. 5.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Managing phones Adding new phones 40 When the Station screen appears, you see the extension number and some default field values. For example, the following screen is for a new phone at extension 2345.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Using templates to add phones 41 To assign feature buttons: 1. Type change station nnnn and press ENTER, where nnnn is the extension for the phone you want to modify. The Station screen appears. 2. Press NEXT PAGE until you locate the Feature Button Assignment fields. Some phones have several feature button groups. Make sure that you are changing the correct button.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Managing phones Using an alias Ext.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Customizing your phone 43 3. Enter 6220 in the Alias Set Type field. This is the name or model of the unsupported phone. 4. Enter 2500 in the Supported Set Type field. Enter the supported model in this field. 5. Enter modem in the second Alias Set Type field. You can call the alias set anything you like. Once you define the alias, you can use the alias set in the Type field on the Station form. 6.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Swapping phones 45 2. Overwrite 7410+ with 8411D in the Type field. Now you can access the functions and feature buttons that correspond to an 8411D phone. Swapping phones You will often find that you need to move or swap phones. For example, employees moving from one office to another may want to bring their phones. In this case, you can use X ports to easily swap the phones.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Using TTI to move phones 46 Using TTI to move phones Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) allows you to merge an x-ported station to a valid port by dialing a TTI merge code, a system-wide security code, and the x-port extension from a telephone connected to that port. TTI also allows you to separate an extension from its port by dialing a similar separate digit sequence.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Using TTI to move phones 47 Instructions TTI merge from a voice TTI port ! CAUTION: You can destroy your hardware if you attempt to connect an analog telephone to a digital port. To merge an extension to a telephone with TTI, complete the following steps from the telephone you want to merge: 1. Dial the TTI merge FAC. — If the code is correct, you receive dial tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Using TTI to move phones 48 TTI separation from a telephone To complete a TTI separation, complete the following steps from the telephone that needs to be separated: 1. Dial the TTI separate FAC. 2. Dial the TTI security code. — If the code is correct, you receive dial tone. — If the code is not correct, you receive intercept tone. 3. Dial the extension of the telephone to be separated.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Removing phones 49 translation. This can happen when the number of telephones allowed by the system is twice the number of data terminals. For example, if the system limit for telephones is 15,000 and 7,500 for data, then when TTI was turned on for data first, only the first 7,500 unadministered ports would get TTI port translations.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Removing phones 50 3. Type list groups-of-extension 1234 and press RETURN. The Extension Group Membership screen shows whether the extension is a member of any groups on the system. 4. Press CANCEL. 5. If the extension belongs to a group, access the group screen and delete the extension from that group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 3 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Adding a fax or modem 51 Now you can unplug the set from the jack and store it for future use. You do not need to disconnect the wiring at the cross-connect field. The extension and port address remain available for assignment at a later date. Once you successfully remove a set, that set is permanently erased from system memory.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Adding a DEFINITY IP Softphone 52 3 Adding a DEFINITY IP Softphone DEFINITY IP Softphones enable the end user to control telephone calls directly from a personal computer (PC). An end user can log into your company’s DEFINITY server remotely and make and receive telephone calls from the telephone extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Adding a DEFINITY IP Softphone 53 3 Instructions for adding a road-warrior application You can use the road-warrior application when you have only a single telephone line available to access the DEFINITY system over the IP network. Let’s add a road-warrior application at extension 3001. You have to actually administer two extensions for each road-warrior application, so we will first add an H.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phones Adding a DEFINITY IP Softphone 55 3 NOTE: Use the add station command if this is a new DCP extension. Use the change station command for an existing DCP extension and ignore steps 2 and 3.) 2. In the Port field, type x for virtual phone or enter the port number if there is hardware. 3. In the Security Code field, enter the password for this remote user, such as 1234321.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Adding feature buttons Managing phone features Issue 1 April 2000 57 4 This section provides generic instructions for adding any feature button. Because you may need more information to decide which feature buttons you want to assign to a user or group of users, we included the Telephone feature buttons table in this section. This table lists all of the feature buttons that are available on the DEFINITY ECS.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 58 2. Press NEXT PAGE until you locate the Feature Button Assignment fields. Some phones have several feature button groups. Make sure that you are changing the correct button. If you do not know which button on the phone maps to which button-assignment field, refer to your phone’s manual, or refer to ‘‘Phone reference’’ on page 1065. 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 59 equipped with alphanumeric displays. Note that some buttons may require 1-lamp or 2-lamp buttons. Some buttons are not allowed on some systems and on some phones. Table 1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 60 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name aca-halt Button label Auto-Ckt Assure Description Maximum Automatic Circuit Assurance (display button): allows users of display telephones to identify trunk malfunctions. The system automatically initiates a referral call to the telephone when a possible failure occurs.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 61 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label Description Maximum ani-requst ANI Request Automatic Number Identification Request: allows the user to display the calling party’s number from incoming trunks during the voice state of call. The trunk must support this functionality.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 62 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label auto-icom (Group: __) Description Maximum Auto (name or ext #) Automatic Intercom: places a call to the station associated with the button. The called user receives a unique alerting signal, and a status lamp associated with a Intercom button flashes. Grp: Intercom — Auto-Icom group number.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 63 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name brdg-appr (Btn: __ Ext: ___) Button label (extension) Description Maximum Bridged Call Appearance: provides an appearance of another user’s extension on this telephone. For example, an assistant might have a bridged appearance of their supervisor’s extension.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 64 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name busy-ind (TAC/Ext: __) Button label Busy Description Maximum Busy Indication: indicates the busy or idle status of an extension, trunk group, terminating extension group (TEG), hunt group, or loudspeaker paging zone. Users can press the busy-ind button to dial the specified extension.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 65 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label Description Maximum cas-backup CAS Backup Centralized Attendant Service Backup: used to redirect all CAS calls to a backup extension in the local branch if all RLTs are out-of-service or maintenance busy. The associated status lamp indicates if CAS is in the backup mode.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 66 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label consult Consult Description Maximum The Consult button allows a covering user, after answering a coverage call, to call the principal (called party) for private consultation.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 67 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label crss-alert Crisis Description Maximum Crisis Alert (display button): provide this button to the telephones or consoles that you want to notify when any user makes an emergency call. (You define which calls are emergency calls on the AAR/ARS Analysis screen by setting the Call Type to alrt.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 68 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label directory Directory Description Maximum Directory (display button): allows users with display telephones to access the system directory, use the touch-tone buttons to key in a name, and retrieve an extension from the directory.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 69 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label exclusion Exclusion Description Maximum Exclusion: allows multiappearance telephone users to keep other users with appearances of the same extension from bridging onto an existing call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 70 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name goto-cover Button label Go To Cover Description Maximum Go To Coverage: sends a call directly to coverage instead of waiting for the called inside-user to answer. Go to Cover forces intercom and priority calls to follow a coverage path.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 71 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label Description Maximum inspect Inspect Mode Inspect (display button): allows users on an active call to display the identification of an incoming call. Inspect also allows users to determine the identification of calls they placed on Hold.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 72 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name man-msg-wt (Ext: ___) Button label Msg Wait (name or ext #) Description Maximum Manual Message Waiting: allows a multiappearance telephone user to press a button on their telephone in order to light the Manual Message Waiting button at another telephone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 73 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name mct-contr Button label MCT Control Description Maximum Malicious Call Trace Control: allows the user to take control of a malicious call trace request. Once the user becomes the MCT controller, the system stops notifying other MCT control extensions of the MCT request.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 74 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label mm-call Description Maximum MM Call Multimedia Call: used to indicate a call is to be a multimedia call. 1 per station mm-cfwd MM CallFwd Multimedia Call Forward: used to activate forwarding of multimedia calls as multimedia calls, not as voice calls.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 75 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label noans-alrt Description Maximum RONA Redirection on No Answer Alert: indicates a Redirection on No Answer timeout has occurred for the split. 1 per split normal Normal Mode Normal (display button): places the station’s display into normal call identification mode.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 76 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label priority Description Maximum Priority Call Priority Calling: allows a user to place priority calls or change an existing call to a priority call. 1 per station q-calls (Grp: ___) NQC Queue Calls: associated status lamp flashes if a call warning threshold has been reached.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 77 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label Description Maximum serv-obsrv Service Observing Service Observing: activates Service Observing. Used to toggle between a listen-only and a listen-talk mode.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Telephone feature buttons 78 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name Button label verify vip-retry Description Maximum Verify Busy Verification: allows users to make test calls and verify a station or a trunk. 1 per station VIP Retry VIP Retry: starts to flash when the user places a VIP wakeup call and continues to flash until the call is answered.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Adding abbreviated dialing lists 79 Table 1. Telephone feature buttons — Continued Button name whisp-act Button label Whisper Page Activation Description Maximum Whisper Page Activation: allows a user to make and receive whisper pages.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Adding abbreviated dialing lists 80 restriction level (FRL) checking. This allows access to selected numbers that some phone users might otherwise be restricted from manually dialing. For example, a user may be restricted from making long-distance calls. However, you can program the number of a branch office that is long distance into an AD list as privileged.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Adding abbreviated dialing lists 81 You can display your new abbreviated-dialing list to verify that the information is correct or print a copy of the list for your paper records. Once you define a group list, you need to define which stations can use the list. For example, let’s set up station 4567 so it has access to the new group list. To give station 4567 access to the group list: 1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Adding abbreviated dialing lists 82 Fixing problems Problem A user cannot access a dial list. Possible causes ■ The specific list may not be assigned to the user’s phone. Solutions 1. Type display station nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the user’s extension. 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Adding abbreviated dialing lists Problem Possible causes A user complains that using an abbreviated dial list dials the wrong number. ■ The user could be using the wrong dial code. ■ The dial code could be defined incorrectly. 83 Solutions 1. Ask the user what number they dialed or button they pressed to determine which list and dial code they attempted to call. 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Setting up bridged call appearances 84 Setting up bridged call appearances Think of a bridged call appearance as a phone (the primary set) with an extension (the bridged-to appearance). Both phones can be used to call in and out and both show when a line is in use. A call to the primary phone is bridged to a specific appearance, or button, on the secondary phone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Setting up bridged call appearances 85 4. Press NEXT PAGE until Per Button Ring Control appears (digital sets only). ■ If you want to assign ringing separately to each bridged appearance, type y. ■ If you want all bridged appearances to either ring or not ring, leave the default n. 5. Move to Bridge Call Alerting.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Managing phone features Setting up bridged call appearances 86 STATION SITE DATA Room: _______ Jack: _____ Cable: _____ Floor: _______ Building: _______ ABBREVIATED DIALING List1: ________ BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: brdg-appr Btn: 1: brdg-appr Btn: Headset? n Speaker? n Mounting: d Cord Length: 0 Set Color: ______ List2: ________ Ext: Ext: List3: ________ Ring: Ring: Station screen (digital set) 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phone features Setting up Terminal Self Administration ■ 87 Visitor telephones An executive may have another telephone in their office that is to be used by visitors. It may be desirable that the visitor be able to bridge onto a call that is active on the executive’s primary extension number. A bridged call appearance makes this possible.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phone features Setting up Terminal Self Administration 88 For example, to assign a security code of 12345678 to extension 4234, complete the following steps: 1. Type change station 4234 and press RETURN. The Station screen for extension 4234 appears. 2. In the Security Code field, type 12345678. You should assign unique security codes for each user.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 4 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing phone features Setting up Terminal Self Administration 89 Fixing problems ■ When a telephone is in the Admin mode, the telephone cannot accept any calls — the telephone is treated as if it were busy. Also, a user cannot make calls while in the Admin mode. ■ Any button state a telephone is in when the telephone enters the Admin mode stays active while the telephone is in the Admin mode.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing your attendant consoles Overview Managing your attendant consoles 91 5 This section provides an overview to the DEFINITY attendant consoles. It also explains how to add new consoles, remove consoles, and how to set your system-wide console parameters. Overview The attendant console is the main answering position for your organization.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Overview 92 302bphn1 KLC 051496 Figure Notes 1. Call processing area 8. Volume control buttons 2. Handset 9. Select buttons 3. Handset cradle 10. Console display panel 4. Warning lamps and call waiting lamps 11. Display buttons 5. Call appearance buttons 12. Trunk group select buttons 6. Feature area 13. Lamp Test Switch 7. Trunk group select buttons Figure 1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Overview 94 Figure 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing your attendant consoles Adding an attendant console 95 DEFINITY PC consoles The DEFINITY PC Console is a Microsoft Windows-based call handling application for DEFINITY system attendants. It provides an ideal way to increase your productivity and to better serve your customers.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons 97 8. If you are using the Enhanced Selector console, assign the Hundreds Select Buttons that you want this console to have. If you want this console to be able to access extensions in the range 3500 to 3999, you need to assign them 5 Hundreds Select Buttons: 35 for extensions 3500 to 3599, 36, 37, 38, and 39. 9.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons 98 Table 2. Attendant console feature buttons Feature or Function Recommended Button Label Name Entered on Station form Maximum Allowed Notes Auto In auto-in (Grp. No.__) 1 per split group 2 Auxiliary Work aux-work (Grp. No.__) 1 per split group 2 Manual-In manual-in (Grp. No.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons 99 Table 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons 100 Table 2. Attendant console feature buttons Feature or Function Recommended Button Label Name Entered on Station form Maximum Allowed Do Not Disturb (Hospitality) [display buttons] Do Not Disturb Ext ext-dn-dst 1 Do Not Disturb Grp grp-dn-dst 1 Don’t Split Don’t Split dont-split 1 Emergency Access To the Attendant Emerg.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons 101 Table 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons 102 Table 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Managing your attendant consoles Attendant console feature buttons 5 103 Table 2.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing your attendant consoles Removing an attendant console 104 Removing an attendant console Before you physically remove an attendant from your system, check the attendant’s status, remove it from any group or usage lists, and then delete it from the system’s memory. For example, to remove attendant 3, which also is assigned extension 4345: 1. Type status attendant 3 and press RETURN.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Setting console parameters 105 Setting console parameters You can define system-wide console settings on the Console Parameters screen. For example, if you want to warn your attendants when there are more than 3 calls in queue or if a call waits for more than 20 seconds, complete the following steps: 1. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN. The Console Parameters screen appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing your attendant consoles Providing backup for an attendant 106 Providing backup for an attendant DEFINITY ECS allows you to configure your system so that you have backup positions for your attendant. Attendant Backup Alerting notifies backup telephones that the attendant need assistance in handling calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 5 Managing your attendant consoles Providing backup for an attendant Issue 1 April 2000 107 The Station screen appears. 5. In one of the Button Assignment fields, enter atd-qcalls. The atd-qcalls button provides the visual alerting for this telephone. When this button is dark (idle state), there are no calls in the attendant queue. When the button shows a steady light (busy state), there are calls in the attendant queue.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 6 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing displays Displaying caller information Managing displays 109 6 Displaying caller information This chapter provides information on the messages that appear on the read-out screen on display phones. Your system uses automatic incoming call display to provide information about incoming calls to a display phone that is in use, or active on a call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 6 Managing displays Displaying ICLID Information 110 Instructions Let’s set up tie trunk group 10 to receive calling party information and display the calling party number on the phone of the person called. NOTE: These instructions are for collecting ANI in the U.S. Refer to ‘‘Automatic Number Identification’’ on page 1165 for information on ANI administration outside the U.S. 1. Type change trunk group 10.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 6 Managing displays Displaying ICLID Information 111 Before you start Be sure Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID field is set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description for information on the required circuit pack.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 6 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing displays Changing the display language 112 Changing the display language This section explains how to change the display language. Before you start ■ Make sure the 64/84xx Display Character Set field on the System Parameters Country-Options screen is set to the character type you want to display. This field is set by Lucent.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 6 Managing displays Changing the display language 114 Related topics Refer to ‘‘Telephone Displays’’ on page 1499 more information about choosing the language for messages on your display phones and for mapping US English to Cyrillic (for Russian), Katakana (for Japanese) European, or Ukrainian characters.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 6 Managing displays Setting up directory buttons 115 Setting up directory buttons Your switch directory contains the names and extensions that are assigned on each station screen. Display-phone users can use a phone button to access the directory, use the touch-tone buttons to key in a name, and retrieve an extension from the directory. Instructions Let’s assign directory phone buttons for extension 2000.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up basic call coverage Handling incoming calls 117 7 Setting up basic call coverage This chapter shows you how to set up call coverage for incoming calls to be sure that incoming calls are answered when the called party is not available.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up basic call coverage Issue 1 April 2000 118 Administering system-wide call coverage characteristics This section shows you how to set up system-wide call coverage characteristics that govern how coverage is handled. Instructions The System-Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding screen sets up the global parameters which direct the switch on how to act in certain situations. 1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up basic call coverage 119 Instructions To create a coverage path: 1. Type add coverage path next and press RETURN. The Coverage Path screen appears. The system displays the next undefined coverage path in the sequence of coverage paths. Our example shows coverage path number 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up basic call coverage 120 5. Press ENTER to save your changes. Tip: If you want to see which extensions or groups use a specific coverage path, type display coverage sender group n, where n is the coverage path number. For example, you should determine which extensions use a coverage path before you make any changes to it.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Setting up advanced call coverage 121 Setting up advanced call coverage Advanced incoming call coverage: ■ redirects calls based on time-of-day ■ allows coverage of calls that are redirected to sites not on the local switch ■ allows users to change back and forth between two coverage choices (either specific lead coverage paths or time-of-day tables).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Setting up advanced call coverage 122 SYSTEM PARAMETERS -- CALL COVERAGE / CALL FORWARDING COVERAGE OF CALLS REDIRECTED OFF-NET (CCRON) Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled? Activate Answer Detection (Preserves SBA) On Final CCRON Cvg Point? Ignore Network Answer Supervision? Immediate Redirection On Receipt Of PROGRESS Inband Information? y y n n 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up advanced call coverage 123 To use a remote phone number as a coverage point, you need to define the number in the Remote Call Coverage Table and then use the remote code in the coverage path. Instructions For example, to add an external number (303-538-1000) to coverage path 2: 1. Type change coverage remote and press RETURN. The Remote Call Coverage Table appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up advanced call coverage 124 COVERAGE PATH Coverage Path Number: _ Next Path Number: ___ COVERAGE CRITERIA Station/Group Status Active? Busy? Don’t Answer? All? DND/SAC/Goto Cover? Inside Call n y y n y Hunt After Coverage: y Linkage: ___ ___ Outside Call n y y Number of Rings: 2 n y COVERAGE POINTS Terminate to Coverage Pts.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up advanced call coverage 125 Instructions To set up a time-of-day coverage plan that redirects calls for our example above: 1. Type add coverage time-of-day next and press RETURN. The Time of Day Coverage Table screen appears and the selects the next undefined table number in the sequence of time-of-day table numbers.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up advanced call coverage 126 STATION Extension: Type: Port: Name: 2054 7406D _____ __________________________ STATION OPTIONS Data Module? n Display Module? n Lock Messages? Security Code: Coverage Path 1: Coverage Path 2: Hunt-to-Station: n 4196__ t1_ ___ ____ BCC: TN: COR: COS: 0 1 1 1 Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1 Message Lamp Ext: MM Complex Data Ext: ____ 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Setting up call forwarding 128 As the administrator, you can administer system-wide call-forwarding parameters to control when calls are forwarded. Use the System Parameters Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen to set the number of times an extension rings before the system redirects the call because the user did not answer (CFWD No Answer Interval).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Setting up call forwarding 131 2. They dial their “forwarding-to” off-site or on-site number. In this example, enter 2081. This is a local number; for offsite forwarding, include the AAR/ARS feature access code. 3. When they hear the 3-beep confirmation tone, they hang up.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 132 Instructions To change call coverage from off-site: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears. 2. In the Change Coverage Access Code field, type *85. Use the *85 feature access code to change a coverage path from a phone or remote station. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. 4. Type change cor and press RETURN.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 135 Page 1 of 2 LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS Ext 1: 51001 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Name Attendant TN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Night Destination: 51002 5. In the Night Destination field, add the night destination on the listed directory phone. In our example, type 51002. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. 7. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 136 10. From a phone with console permissions, dial the call forwarding feature access code, then the hunt group’s extension, followed by the main number of AUDIX. In our example, dial 51002. NOTE: You should receive the confirmation tone (3 beeps). This step is very important as calls to the LDN night service extension do not follow coverage. 11.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 138 Tip: All trunk groups that are routed through the attendant direct to this night service destination provided they already do not have a night service destination and, on the Console Parameters screen, the DID-LDN Only to DID-LDN Night Ext field is n. Refer to ‘‘Setting up trunk answer from any station’’ on page 139. Instructions To set up night station service: 1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service Attendant Group Name: COS: Calls in Queue Warning: Ext Alert Port (TAAS): CAS: SAC Notification? IAS (Branch)? IAS Att. Access Code: Backup Alerting? 139 CONSOLE PARAMETERS 27 character name 1 5 none n n n OPERATOR COR: 1 Attendant Lockout? y Night Service Act. Ext.: 1234 IAS Tie Trunk Group No.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 140 Before you start You need a ringing device and 1 port on an analog line circuit pack. Refer to DEFINITY ECS System Description for more information on the circuit pack. Instructions To set the feature access code for TAAS: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service Attendant Group Name: COS: Calls in Queue Warning: Ext Alert Port (TAAS): CAS: SAC Notification? IAS (Branch)? IAS Att. Access Code: Backup Alerting? 141 CONSOLE PARAMETERS Operator 0 COR: 0 5 Attendant Lockout? y 01A0702 none n Night Service Act. Ext.: n IAS Tie Trunk Group No.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 142 Instructions To send LDN calls to the attendant during the day and to a guard’s desk at night: 1. Type change listed-directory-numbers and press RETURN. The Listed Directory Numbers screen appears. Page 1 of 2 LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS Ext 1: 2000 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Name Attendant TN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Night Destination: 3000 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 143 5. In the EXT Alert Port (TAAS) field, type 01A0702. This is the port address assigned to the external alerting device. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. The system is in Night Service. Any calls to extension 2000 now go to extension 3000 (the guard’s desk). Any “0” seeking calls go to extension 3000 (the guard’s desk).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 144 Setting up trunk group night service You can use trunk group night service if you want to direct individual trunk groups to night service. The system redirects calls from the trunk group to the group’s night service destination. Trunk group night service overrides night station service.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Setting up night service 145 Setting up night service for hunt groups You can administer hunt group night service if you want to direct hunt group calls to a night service destination. Let’s say your helpline on hunt group 3 does not answer calls after 6:00 p.m. When customers call after hours, you would like them to hear an announcement that asks them to try their call again in the morning.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Adding call pickup 146 Related topics ‘‘Managing hunt groups’’ on page 152. How do night service types interact? Let’s look at an example of how several types of night service might be used in one company.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Adding call pickup 147 Creating pickup groups A pickup group is a list of phones where each member of the group can answer another member’s calls. For example, if you want everyone in the payroll department to be able to answer calls to any payroll extension (in case someone is away from their desk), create a pickup group that contains all of the payroll extensions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Adding call pickup 148 Setting up directed call pickup To set up a phone so that the user can pick up calls with Directed Call Pickup, you need to determine if directed call pickup is enabled on your system and make sure that the user’s phone has a COR that allows directed call pickup. To determine if Directed Call Pickup is enabled on your system: 1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Adding call pickup 149 7. Type add pickup-group next and press RETURN. The Pickup Group screen appears. change pickup-group 1 Page 1 of 2 PICKUP GROUP Group Number: 1 Extended Group Number: ____ GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext 1: 51001 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: Name station Ext Name 14: 51002 station 51001 51002 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Adding call pickup 151 5. In the Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code field, type the desired FAC. Refer to the dial plan to enter the correct sequence and number of digits. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. 7. Type add pickup-group next and press RETURN. The Pickup Group screen appears. 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing hunt groups Issue 1 April 2000 152 Pickup Numbers. A unique “Extended Pickup Group number can be assigned to each pickup group on this screen. The entries in the Extended Group are the groups that can have calls picked up by the group with the matching Extended Group number in the Pick Group screen. Thus, a particular group’s calls may be picked up by members of many extended pickup groups.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing hunt groups 153 We will assign 3 people (agents) and their extensions to our helpline. We want calls to go to the first available person. Instructions To set up our helpline hunt group: 1. Type add hunt-group next and press RETURN. The Hunt Group screen appears. The Group Number field is automatically filled in with the next hunt group number.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing hunt groups Group Number: 5 Member Range Allowed: 1 154 HUNT GROUP Group Extension: 1200 Group Type: ucd-loa Administered Members (min/max): 1 /9 Total Administered Members: 3 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext Name 1: 1011 2: 1012 3: 1013 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: Ext Name 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: At End of Member List 6.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing hunt groups 155 Setting up a queue You can tell your switch how to handle a hunt-group call when it cannot be answered right away. The call waits in a “queue.” Let’s tell the switch that up to 10 calls can wait in the queue, but that you want to be notified if a call waits for more than 30 seconds. You also want the switch to send a warning when 5 or more calls are waiting in the queue.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Managing hunt groups 156 4. In the Calls Waiting Threshold field, type the maximum number of calls that can be in the queue before the system flashes the queue status buttons. In our example, type 5. 5. In the Time Warning Threshold field, type the maximum number of seconds you want a call to wait in the queue before the system flashes the queue status buttons. In our example, type 30. 6.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs 158 What are vectors? A vector is a series of commands that you design to tell the system how to handle incoming calls. A vector can contain up to 32 steps and allows customized and personalized call routing and treatment.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs 159 Instructions To write a vector: 1. Type change vector 1 and press RETURN. The Call Vector screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs 160 Putting a call in a queue Write a vector so that calls that come into the main business number redirect to a queue. We’ll use a vector-controlled hunt group for the main number queue. This hunt group was set up as main split 47. When calls first arrive, all calls to our main number should be queued as “pri 1” for low priority.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs 161 Tip: Rather than loop your vectors directly back to the announcement step, go to the previous queue-to step. This way, if for some reason the call does not queue the first time, the switch can attempt to queue the call again. If the call successfully queued the first time though, it merely skips the queue-to step and plays the announcement.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs 166 Deleting a step To delete vector step 5 from vector 20: 1. Type change vector 20 and press RETURN. The Call Vector screen appears. 2. Press EDIT. 3. Type d followed by a space and the number of the step you want to delete. In our example, type d 5. Tip: You can delete a range of vector steps. For example, to delete steps 2 through 5, type d 2-5 and press ENTER. 4.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs 167 EVENT REPORT The following option control which events will be displayed: EVENT CATEGORY Category: Vector REPORT PERIOD Interval: _a_ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ SEARCH OPTIONS Vector Number: __ Event Type: ___ 2. To see all current vector events, press RETURN. OR Indicate the events that you want to see by completing the Report Period and Search Option fields.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Managing vectors and VDNs 168 ! SECURITY ALERT: Vector fraud is one of the most common types of toll fraud because vectors route calls based on the class of restriction (COR) assigned to the VDN. Refer to BCS Products Security Handbook for more information. Adding a vector directory number To add a vector directory number: 1. Type add VDN 5011 and press RETURN.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Understanding Automatic Call Distribution 169 4. In the Measured field, indicate how you want to measure calls to his VDN. In our example, type both (for both CMS and BCMS). Tip: BCMS must be enabled to use “both.” Use display system-parameters customer-options to see if BCMS is enabled. 5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Issue 1 April 2000 Handling incoming calls Assigning a terminating extension group 170 Enhancing an ACD system First, all call center management systems (such as Lucent’s Basic Call Management System (BCMS), BCMSVu, and the sophisticated CentreVu Call Management System) require ACD.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Assigning a terminating extension group 171 TERMINATING EXTENSION GROUP Group Number: 1 Group Name: advertising Security Code: Group Extension: Coverage Path: COR: TN: LWC Reception: Messaging Server Name: ISDN Caller Disp: mbr-name AUDIX Name: 6725 5 1 1 none GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext 1: 5101 2: Name 27 character name sta 51001 Ext 3: 4: 5102 Name 27 character name sta 51002 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 7 Handling incoming calls Assigning a terminating extension group 172 Page 2 of X STATION FEATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception? LWC Activation? CDR Privacy? Redirect Notification? Per Button Ring Control? PCOL/TEG Call Alerting? Active Station Ringing: msa-spe y n y n n single H.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Issue 1 April 2000 Routing outgoing calls World class routing Routing outgoing calls 173 8 World class routing Your system uses Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection (ARS) to direct outgoing calls. ■ AAR routes calls within your company over your own private network. ■ ARS routes calls that go outside your company over public networks.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Issue 1 April 2000 Routing outgoing calls Managing calling privileges 174 Managing calling privileges Each time you set up a phone, you use the station screen to assign a COR. You can create different CORs for different groups of users. For example, you may want executives in your company to have different calling privileges than receptionists.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Issue 1 April 2000 Routing outgoing calls Displaying ARS analysis information 175 Instructions To assign the ARS FAC: 1. Type change dialplan and press ENTER. The Dial Plan Record screen appears. 2. Move to the 9 row and type fac in the first column. Press ENTER to save your changes. 3. Type change features and press ENTER. The Feature Access Code screen appears. 4. Type 9 in the ARS - access code field and press ENTER to save your changes.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Understanding ARS analysis 177 The table below reflects these values: ■ ARS feature access code = 9 AAR feature access code = 8 Private Network Office Code (also known as Home RNX) = 222 Prefix 1 is required on all long-distance DDD calls Dashes (-) are for readability only The switch maps the dialed digits to the matching pattern that most closely matches the dialed number.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Understanding ARS analysis 178 Defining operator assisted calls Let’s look at how the switch routes an ARS call that begins with 0 and requires operator assistance. Remember, the user dials 9 to access ARS, then a 0, then the rest of the number. To see how your switch handles a call to an operator: 1. Type display ars analysis 0 and press ENTER.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Understanding ARS analysis 179 IXC numbers begin with 1010, followed by three digits, plus the number as it is normally dialed including 0, 00, or 1+ 10 digits. These numbers are set up on your default translations. Remember, the user dials 9 to access ARS, then the rest of the number. Instructions To see how your switch handles a call to an IXC: 1. Type display ars analysis 1 and press ENTER.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Understanding ARS analysis 180 You can also deny access to the 976 prefix, which is set aside in each area code for pay-per call services, if you do not want to incur charges. You can block 976 or any other prefix in all NPAs with a single entry in the digit analysis table. See ‘‘Using wild cards’’ on page 181 for more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Understanding ARS analysis 181 Using wild cards You can use wild cards to help separate out calls to certain numbers. Remember, when you use the wild card x in the Dialed String field, the switch recognizes x as any digit, 0 - 9. For example, you can restrict users from making calls to a 555 information operator where you might incur charges.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Setting up multiple locations ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Location: all Dialed Total Route Call Node String Min Max Pattern Type Num 411__________________3_ 3 ___ 1 svcl ___ 5____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2 hnpa ___ 6____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2 hnpa ___ 7____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2 hnpa ___ 911__________________3 3 ____ 1 svcl ___ 182 Percent Full: ANI Req n n n n n 6 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Setting up multiple locations 183 the cabinet in New York. We’ll define the numbering plan area (NPA) for the Chicago and New York locations, and set the time zone offset for NY to show the difference in time between Eastern Standard Time and Central Standard Time. Tip: Type list cabinets to see the cabinet form and a list of cabinets and their locations.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Issue 1 April 2000 Routing outgoing calls Routing with multiple locations 184 Tip: Use display daylight-savings-rules to see what rules have been administered on your switch. 6. Type 312 in the Number Plan Area Code field in the Number 1 row. In our example, 312 is the local area code for Chicago, location 1. 7. Type New York in the Name field in the Number 2 row. 8. Type -01:00 in the TimeZone Offset field in the Number 2 row.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Routing with multiple locations 185 AAR or ARS must be administered. ■ For AAR, verify that either the Private Networking field or the Uniform Dialing Plan field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. ■ For ARS, verify that the ARS field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Each cabinet in a switch must be assigned a location number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Modifying call routing 187 Adding a new area code or prefix A common task for system administrators is to configure their system to recognize new area codes or prefixes. When you want to add a new area code or prefix, you look up the settings for the old area code or prefix and enter the same information for the new one.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Modifying call routing 189 Using ARS to restrict outgoing calls ARS allows you to block outgoing calls to specific dialed strings. For example, you can restrict users from making international calls to countries where you do not do business, or in the U.S. you can restrict access to 900 and 976 pay-per-call numbers.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Overriding call restrictions 190 Overriding call restrictions You can use authorization codes to enable callers to override a station’s calling privileges. For example, you can give a supervisor an authorization code so they can make calls from a phone that is usually restricted for these calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Issue 1 April 2000 Routing outgoing calls Defining ARS Partitions 191 Defining ARS Partitions Most companies want all their users to be able to make the same calls and follow the same route patterns. However, you may find it helpful to provide special calling permissions or restrictions to a group of users or to particular phones. ARS partitioning allows you to provide different call routing for a group of users or for specific phones.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Defining ARS Partitions 192 ARS ROUTE CHOSEN REPORT Location : 1 Dialed String Partitioned Group Number: 1 Total Min Max 1800___________________ 11 11 Route Pattern Call Type p1___ fnpa Node Number _____ Location all 2. Record the route pattern for the selected dialed string. In our example, the route pattern for 1800 is p1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Defining ARS Partitions 193 Assigning a phone to a partition group To assign an extension to a partition group, first assign the partition group to a Class of Restriction (COR), and then assign that COR to the extension. Instructions To assign a Class of Restriction (COR) to partition group 2: 1. Type list cor and press RETURN. The Class of Restriction Information screen appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Setting up time of day routing Issue 1 April 2000 194 Now assign COR 3 to the lobby phone at extension 1234: 1. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN. The Station screen for 1234 appears. 2. In the COR field, enter 3. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. Setting up time of day routing Time of Day Routing lets you redirect calls to coverage paths according to the time of day and day of the week.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Issue 1 April 2000 Routing outgoing calls Setting up shortcut dialing 196 Example For this example, assume the following: ■ Jim is the user at extension 1234. ■ Extension 1234 is assigned a COR of 2. ■ COR 2 is assigned a Time of Day Plan Number of 1. ■ The Time of Day Routing Plan 1 is administered as shown in the example above.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Setting up shortcut dialing 197 Use AAR/ARS shortcut dialing to modify your dial plan and expand the capabilities of automatic routing. For example, with shortcut dialing, users can make AAR and ARS calls without dialing the Feature Access Code (FAC). Also, you can add 6- and 7-digit extensions to a 5-digit dial plan.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Setting up shortcut dialing 198 2. Type ars in First Digit row 9, Length column 3. This allows direct dialing of the emergency number, 911. ARS analysis begins when the number dialed starts with 9 and the switch collects 3 or more digits before an interdigit timeout. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. Add numbers to a DCS network You can use shortcut dialing to add numbers to a DCS network.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 8 Routing outgoing calls Setting up shortcut dialing 199 Instructions To add 7-digit shortcut dialing to a 5-digit uniform dial plan: 1. Type change dial plan and press RETURN. The Dial Plan Record screen appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface Managing multimedia calling Issue 1 April 2000 201 9 Multimedia Applications Server Interface The Multimedia Applications Server Interface (MASI) defines a protocol and a set of operations that are used to extend DEFINITY ECS feature functionality to a Multimedia Communications Exchange (MMCX) system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 202 ■ Call Detail Recording — DEFINITY ECS tracks calls to and from MASI terminals and can produce call records that indicate if a call uses MASI. ■ Call Coverage — DEFINITY ECS tracks MMCX calls that are sent to coverage. A DEFINITY coverage path can contain both MASI terminals and DEFINITY stations.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 203 You need to use both the DEFINITY system administration terminal (SAT) and the MMCX administration terminal to administer MASI. This document describes what you need to do at the DEFINITY SAT. It also occasionally mentions administration that you must do at the MMCX administration terminal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface ■ 204 MMCX interface — PRI interface for connecting an MMCX server to other public, private or WAN switching systems or equipment that is part of the public network. Similar to a DEFINITY trunk group. These may include non-MASI trunks connecting the DEFINITY ECS and the MMCX.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 205 PSTN PSTN 1 Trunk 1 DEFINITY 1 AUDIX WAN Trunk 2 2 MMCX 1 SG1 DEFINITY S1 LAN E1 E2 cydfdda1 LJK 071597 Figure 5. MASI domain of one DEFINITY ECS and one MMCX The parts of this drawing, for MASI, are as follows: ■ Trunk 1 — This is any type of trunk connection to the public network.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 206 E3 E4 LAN PSTN MMCX 2 Trunk 1 Trunk 3 SG2 DEFINITY 1 AUDIX 3 4 PSTN DEFINITY WAN 1 2 Trunk 2 S1 SG1 MMCX 1 LAN E1 E2 cydfdda2 LJK 071597 Figure 6.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface E3 207 E4 LAN DEFINITY 2 AUDIX DEFINITY Trunk 3 MMCX 2 SG2 S2 3 Trunk 4 PSTN PSTN Trunk 1 DEFINITY 1 AUDIX 4 WAN 1 Trunk 2 2 MMCX 1 SG1 DEFINITY S1 LAN E1 Figure 7.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface E3 208 E4 LAN MMCX 2 3 PSTN PSTN Trunk 1 DEFINITY 1 INTUITY 4 WAN 1 Trunk 2 2 MMCX 1 SG1 DEFINITY S1 LAN E1 E2 cydfdda4 LJK 071897 Figure 8. One MASI domain, and one non-MASI MMCX The MASI node must be directly connected to the DEFINITY ECS for MASI features to work.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 209 terminal. This section sometimes refers to the chgmasi command. This is the command you use to administer MASI parameters on the MMCX. For more information about using the chgmasi command, refer to your MMCX Technical Reference.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 210 Step 5 — Administer a signaling group For each MASI node, you need to establish a unique signaling group. Use the command add signaling-group xxx to access the Signaling Group form.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 211 ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Page 2 of 5 Service/Feature: __________ As-needed Inactivity Time-out (min): __ TSC Local Mach. Index Ext. Enabled Established Dest. Digits Appl.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface ■ 212 Appl. — Specifies the application this administered NCA-TSC is going to be used for. Enter masi. ■ Machine ID — Used to indicate the MASI node to which this administered NCA-TSC is connected. This number should be the same as the MASI node number found on other forms.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 213 Step 6 — Administer ISDN-PRI trunk group Use the command add trunk-group xxx to access the Trunk Groups form. For a more detailed description of the ISDN-PRI trunk group, see ‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 738.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 214 Establish a MASI Path with the following attributes: ■ Near-End Path Extension — An unassigned DEFINITY extension. When using the chgmasi command to administer the MMCX, this is the farpath extension. See the MMCX Technical Reference for more information. ■ MASI Node — The node number for the MMCX.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 215 MASI TRUNK GROUP Group Number: 15 Group Name: INCOMING CALL______________ COR: 1_ MASI Node Number: __ TN: 1 CDR Reports? y TAC: 915_ Remote Group Number: _ Screen 5. MASI Trunk Group Form ■ ■ Group Number — This field displays the MASI trunk group number. This is the number assigned when executing the add masi trunk-group command.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface ■ 216 Remote Group Number — This is the number of the remote trunk group. For ISDN-PRI interfaces, valid values are any number 1–8; for LAN or WAN calling interfaces, the value must be 9. The combination of MASI Node Number and Remote Group Number must be unique. Remote group number corresponds to the group number on the MASI node.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 217 MASI TRUNK GROUP STATUS Group Number: xxx MASI Node Number: xx Remote Group Number: xxx Number of Active MMCX Trunk Calls: xxx Screen 7. Status masi trunk-group output Step 9 — Administer MASI terminals Use the add masi terminal xxxxx or next command to administer each MASI terminal as a MASI terminal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface ■ 218 Extension — This field displays the extension that you entered on the command line. ■ BCC — This field displays the bearer capability class of the terminal, and identifies the type of traffic the terminal supports. For MASI, this is always 0, for voice or voice-grade data.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface ■ 219 AUDIX Name — This field only appears on G3r configurations. This field contains the name of the AUDIX adjunct for LWC messages. If LWC reception field is set to audix, this field must contain a name. The name must match a machine name on the Adjunct Names form.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 221 GENERAL STATUS TYPE: MASI Extension: 54001 MASI Node Number: 14 Screen 13. Service State: active Status MASI terminal command To determine which extension you assigned as the MASI Near-End Path Termination extension, use the command list extension-type. This command displays the extension number and type (attendant, masi-terminal, etc.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 222 2. The MMCX dial plan must use the same feature access codes as the DEFINITY ECS. If this is not already the case, modify the MMCX dial plan using the chgdp command. See the MMCX Technical Reference for more information. 3. Include this feature access code in the chgmasi command. CDR 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 223 Call an unattended MASI terminal. Verify that the call goes to AUDX. Retrieve the call from the MASI terminal. Verify that all works as expected. MASI command permissions If you are the super-user for your system, you can restrict other administrative logins from changing MASI administration. To do this, use the change permissions (login-ID) command.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface Issue 1 April 2000 224 The following are the CDR capabilities of MASI. Administration information is under the heading ‘‘How to administer MASI’’ on page 208. ■ Incoming/Outgoing Trunk Call Splitting Call splitting does not produce separate records for MMCX calls that are transferred or conferenced.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface Issue 1 April 2000 225 Transfer MASI terminals cannot transfer calls to DEFINITY stations, and cannot transfer a call to another MASI terminal if the call involves a DEFINITY station. Conferencing Conferences can involve both MASI terminals and DEFINITY stations, and either one may initiate the conference. DEFINITY stations participate in such conferences in voice-only mode.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 226 ! CAUTION: DO NOT ADMINISTER the following features! The following features are not supported for use over the MASI link, and Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for the results if you attempt to administer them. Unsupported Call Center features ■ ASAI — You must not administer a MASI terminal in an ASAI domain.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 227 ■ Pull transfer — MASI terminals cannot perform a pull transfer operation. You must not administer this feature on an ECS where MASI is active. This applies only in Italy. ■ Station Hunting — You must not administer a MASI terminal as part of a station hunting path.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 228 ■ Attendant Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators — You cannot administer Busy/Warning indicators for MASI trunks because they are not standard DEFINITY trunks. However, you can administer these indicators for the trunk group administered for MASI paths.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Applications Server Interface 229 ■ Malicious Call Trace — MASI terminals cannot initiate malicious call trace. ■ Message Retrieval — MMCX users can only retrieve messages through AUDIX. ■ Music on Hold — Music on hold will only be available if a DEFINITY station has placed the call on hold. ■ Override — Executive override does not work towards MASI terminals.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 230 Common error conditions If the cable from the ECS to the MMCX becomes disconnected, you should see alarms raised against ISDN-SGRP and UDS1-BD. In particular, you should observe ISDN-SGRP errors such as 769, 1793, and 257. To resolve, reconnect the cable and follow normal test procedures.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 231 Definitions: MMCH features and components Multimedia call A multimedia call, for MMCH, is one that conforms to the H.320 and T.120 suite of protocol standards. These standards allow video-conferencing packages from different vendors to communicate with one another. The capabilities of the individual multimedia-endpoint package can vary, however. ■ An H.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 232 Enhanced multimedia complex An Enhanced multimedia complex consists of a BRI-connected multimedia-equipped PC and a non-BRI-connected multifunction telephone administered in Enhanced mode. The Enhanced multimedia complex acts as though the PC were directly connected to the multifunction telephone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling Issue 1 April 2000 233 service link only applies to an Enhanced multimedia complex, never to a Basic multimedia complex. The service link is administered on the station form and can be either “permanent” or “as-needed.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 234 Enhanced Mode Operation The Enhanced multimedia complex provides a much more tightly coupled integration of the complex voice station and H.320 DVC system. In Enhanced Mode: ■ Both multimedia and voice calls must originate at the telephone set. ■ Voice and multimedia calls can be controlled at the telephone set.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 235 The following endpoint-software packages have been tested: ■ PictureTel PCS 50 & PCS 100, Release 1.6T ■ Proshare 2.0a, 2.1 ■ Zydacron Z250 Ver. 2.02, Z350 Ver. 1.2 (With Netmeeting 2.0) MMI & VC hardware The MMCH feature requires the use of two additional circuit packs: ■ Multi Media Interface (MMI) TN787J. ■ Voice Conditioner (VC) TN788B.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 236 ESM Installation 6 2 1 3 5 7 4 cydf012 RPY 100697 Figure Notes 1. Port B Y-cable connector to a TN787 5. D8W cord connected to 356A multimedia interface (MMI) circuit pack adapter S/B port 8 2. Port A Y-cable connector to a TN2207 PRI circuit pack 6. Expansion service module (ESM) 3. 25-pair Y-cable 7.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 237 Planning for MMCH The following are some of the tasks you perform in planning and administering MMCH. Planning the system This is a list of questions to help you use DEFINITY ECS for multimedia.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 238 6. Administer multimedia complexes: ■ Administer data modules — Data Module screen, or Data Module page of the Station screen. ■ Administer stations as part of a multimedia complex, assign associated data module extension, multimedia mode, service link mode and appropriate multimedia buttons — Station screen. 7. Administer early answer and H.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling ■ 239 Call Vector — Multimedia (optional) ■ Feature Access Codes — Basic Mode Activation (p.5) — Enhanced Mode Activation (p.5) — Multimedia Call Access Code (p.5) — Multimedia Data Conference Activation & Deactivation (p.5) The Multimedia Data Conference Deactivation FAC must be entered after you are active on a multimedia call. To enter the FAC: 1. Select TRANSFER 2.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 240 Administration commands System-Parameters Customer-Options form: To enable the MMCH release 6.3 feature, you must change the System-Parameters Customer-Options form. There are two MMCH related fields on page 2 of this form. ■ The “Multimedia Call Handling (Basic)” field must be set to ‘y’ to allow MMCH Basic mode operation.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling Issue 1 April 2000 242 Station screen After you have administered the BRI data module, use the Station screen to associate it with a voice station to screen a multimedia complex. This is a one-to-one relationship: you can administer only one station and one data endpoint per multimedia complex. Neither the voice station, nor the data endpoint can be a member of another multimedia complex.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 243 resources. When the service link is disconnected it does not tie up any resources. The Service Link Mode can be administered as either ‘as-needed’ or ‘permanent’ as described below: — As-Needed - Most non-call center multimedia users will be administered with this service link mode.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling ■ 244 Multimedia Early Answer — Valid entries are y and n (default). This field lets you set this phone for early answer of multimedia calls. The system will answer the incoming multimedia call on behalf of the station and proceed to establish the H.320 protocol. After audio path has been established to the caller, the call will then alert at the voice station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling ■ Issue 1 April 2000 245 mm-basic — This button is only allowed on the voice station of a multimedia complex. The mm-basic button toggles a station between Basic and Enhanced modes. This button can NOT be used to change the station’s multimedia mode when the station has an active multimedia call appearance.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 246 services will not be terminated, (only the station that activated the collaboration session can deactivate it). This button only works for stations connected to a DEFINITY ECS equipped with an ESM adjunct.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 247 ESM T.120 Server Administration DS1 form, page 1 change ds1 1c09 Page 1 of 1 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01C09 Bit Rate: 2.048 Name: Line Coding: hdb3 Signaling Mode: isdn-pri Connect: pbx Interface: network Country Protocol: 1 CRC? y Idle Code: 11111111 MMI Cabling Board: 01C10 DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Multimedia Call Handling 248 11. Set the CRC field to y 12. The Idle Code default is 11111111. 13. The DCP/Analog Bearer Capability default is 3.1 kHz. 14. Set the MMI Cabling Board field to xxxxx (where xxxxx is the location of the TN787 MMI circuit pack recorded in step 2). This must be the slot for port B of the Y-cable. 15. The MMI Interface field ESM appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 249 NOTE: When you move ESM circuit packs, you MUST remove the DS1 and signaling group translations. You cannot use the change circuit pack command. When a vector is used to route video (56K/64K) calls to a hunt group comprised of data extensions, the vector must have the multimedia field set to n.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex Issue 1 April 2000 250 The voice station of a Basic multimedia complex may also use the “mm-call” button or FAC, and the “mm-multinbr” button or FAC to originate multimedia calls. When these methods are used, a multimedia call is originated from the voice station. In order for the Basic multimedia complex to receive video, the user must make a call from the H.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex Issue 1 April 2000 251 NOTE: The mm-call feature button is generally used by stations that are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station to originate a multimedia call. 3. Multimedia Call feature Access Code. For stations that do not have an administered mm-call button, the Multimedia call feature access code may be used instead.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex Issue 1 April 2000 252 provide dialtone after the first address has been completed. The user now dials the second destination address digits. The destination address may be provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc. After the 2nd address has been collected the mm-multinbr status lamp will go off.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 253 6. Multimedia parameter selection feature access code. This FAC is used to originate a multimedia call that wishes to use a different bearer and bandwidth than the system default.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex ■ 254 Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 2nd dest. digits 5. Single address with AAR/ARS and authorization code ■ Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial destination digits, Hear stutter dialtone ■ Dial authorization code 6.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 255 Hourglass Tone. When a voice station answers a converted multimedia call, the answering party may hear different things depending on the nature of the originator. If the origination is directly from an H.320 DVC system or if the originator is an Enhanced mode complex on a remote switch, an immediate audio path will not exist between the two parties.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 256 An on-premises user might be able to use Remote Access and enter the entire digit string at once before launching the call, but it would be better to eliminate the need for such codes for multimedia users who need to call off premises. Bridged Appearances.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 257 mm-multinbr button or FAC. After the new party begins alerting, the controller may hit CONFERENCE to add the party to the existing conference on hold. Coverage.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex Issue 1 April 2000 258 Adding data sharing to a video conference 1. Set up a multimedia conference. 2. Once a multimedia call is active, any voice station in the conference, can initiate data collaboration by pressing the mm-datacnf button. Or, to use the feature access code to initiate a data conference, press the Transfer button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 259 Joining a multimedia conference after T.120 data sharing has been enabled. If a multimedia conference with T.120 data sharing is already active and it is desired to conference in a new video endpoint, the new video endpoint can be conferenced into the existing call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 260 If a call is forwarded from the telephone, the call converts to voice first. If using the multimedia endpoint to forward, the calls arrive at the forwarded-to extension as a data call. Such calls continue to ring until answered or abandoned, rather than follow a coverage path. Users can forward calls from the multimedia endpoint using the call forward FAC.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex 261 Hunt Groups using Basic Mode complexes. Since Basic mode complexes may receive point to point multimedia calls at the DVC system and voice calls to the station simultaneously, the voice station extension may be placed in any normal voice hunt group or ACD skill and the data extension may be placed in a simple hunt group made up of only data extensions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Understanding the multimedia complex Issue 1 April 2000 262 them as a unit to a single agent. MMCH uses call association to route both calls to the extension that answered the first call, regardless of how the call was routed internally. Two 56K/64K data calls with the same calling party number to the same destination number are considered to be associated.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 263 ISDN Trunk Groups. Lucent Technologies highly recommends that you use ISDN trunks for multimedia calls. ISDN PRI trunks allow complete 1-number access for an Enhanced multimedia complex. ANI provided over PRI trunks allows correct routing of multiple bearer channels to the correct destination device.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 264 voice station to handle voice or multimedia calls in an almost identical manner. Each call appearance on the voice station may represent a voice or multimedia call, allowing multiple voice or multimedia calls to be present simultaneously on the station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 265 Hourglass tone. The originating party may hear different things when the incoming multimedia call is answered depending on the nature of the answering party. If the call is being answered directly by an H.320 DVC system or if the answering party is an Enhanced mode complex on a remote switch, an immediate audio path will not exist between the two parties.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 266 NOTE: The mm-call feature button is generally used by stations that are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station to originate a multimedia call. 2. Multimedia Call feature Access Code. For stations that do not have an administered mm-call button, the Multimedia call feature access code may be used instead.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 267 provide dialtone after the first address has been completed. The user now dials the second destination address digits. The destination address may be provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc. After the 2nd address has been collected the mm-multinbr status lamp will go off.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex 268 5. Multimedia parameter selection feature access code. This FAC is used to originate a multimedia call that wishes to use a different bearer and bandwidth than the system default.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex ■ 269 Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 2nd dest. digits 5. Single address with AAR/ARS and authorization code ■ Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial destination digits, Hear stutter dialtone ■ Dial authorization code 6. Dual address with AAR/ARS and authorization code ■ Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone ■ Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 1st dest.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 270 Answering multimedia calls Incoming multimedia calls will alert at the voice station of the Enhanced multimedia complex in the same manner as voice calls with one addition. If the alerting station has an administered mm-call button and the alerting call appearance is the selected call appearance (i.e.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex 271 - multiple call appearance operation With an Enhanced mode complex all calls to or from the complex are controlled via the voice station. Each voice or multimedia call has its own call appearance which may be selected without regard for the nature of the call using the specific call appearance.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 272 NOTE: If party C is another Enhanced mode complex on the same switch as station A, station A does not need to indicate a multimedia call prior to dialing the new party in step 3. While A consults with C, the call will be audio only. When A completes the conference in step 5, party C’s video will be activated.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 273 4. The user must now use the PC’s GUI to begin application sharing. The method for beginning application sharing or file transfer is different for each H.320 multimedia application. One of the H.320 DVC systems activates data sharing from the H.320 DVC vendor provided GUI. See your H.320 DVC system documentation for details. 5. The same H.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex 274 Single switch data collaboration. When all parties involved in data collaboration conference are located on the same physical DEFINITY ECS, there is no restriction on the type of user. The parties may be any combination of Enhanced multimedia complexes, Basic multimedia complexes or stand-alone H.320 DVC systems. Multi- switch data collaboration.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 275 Switching between Basic and Enhanced modes There may exist occasions when an Enhanced mode complex needs to switch to Basic mode operation temporarily. One example is when a user wishes to make a direct point to point multimedia call originated directly from the H.320 DVC.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 276 If a plain voice station or a Basic mode complex is the covering party, the answering voice station will receive audio only. If all voice stations in the coverage path have the station form Early Answer field set to n and the originator of the multimedia call was not a local Enhanced mode complex, the answering station will hear hourglass tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex Issue 1 April 2000 277 Call association (routing). Typically incoming voice calls consist of 2 B-channel calls to the same address, to provide greater bandwidth and better video resolution. DEFINITY ECS attempts to correctly pair up incoming calls and offer them as a unit to a single agent.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Issue 1 April 2000 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex 278 Interactions Interactions are listed here only if the operation is different from standard. ■ Administered Connections An Enhanced multimedia complex voice station may serve as the origination point or destination of an administered connection.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex ■ Issue 1 April 2000 279 COR/COS The Class of Restriction and Class of Service for a multimedia call originated from an Enhanced multimedia complex are those of the voice station in the complex. ■ Data Call Setup An Enhanced mode multimedia H.320 DVC system may not originate calls from the DVC system. All calls, both voice or video are originated from the voice station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex ■ Issue 1 April 2000 280 Terminating Extension Groups A multimedia call to a TEG may be answered by any member of the TEG. If the member answering the call is an Enhanced mode complex station, a multimedia call will result. ■ Telephone Display Display information for calls to or from an Enhanced multimedia complex contains the display information associated with the voice station.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex 281 Action Objects Qualifier display station data module xxxxx (extension) xxxxx (extension) list mmi status measurements multimedia-interface voice-conditioner esm multimedia endpoints [’print’ or ’schedule’] h.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 9 Managing multimedia calling Enhanced Mode MM complex 283 MULTIMEDIA ENDPOINTS Data Ext MM Complex Voice Ext 100 1321 15683 Screen 20. H.320 Conversion? 87654 y 738 n List Multimedia Endpoints Form MULTIMEDIA H.320-STATIONS Screen 21. Station Ext MM Data Ext 100 1321 15683 87654 738 List Multimedia H.320-Stations Form Considerations Each channel of a 2-channel BRI call takes one port on an MMI circuit pack.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Configuring DEFINITY ECS for telecommuting Setting up telecommuting 285 10 Configuring DEFINITY ECS for telecommuting Telecommuting emphasizes the ability to perform telephony activities while remote from the DEFINITY ECS. It is a combination of four features which permit you to remotely perform changes to your station’s Coverage and Call Forwarding.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Configuring DEFINITY ECS for telecommuting 286 ■ The Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls feature allows you to change the direction of calls to your station. This activates the capability to have 2 coverage path options.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up Personal Station Access 287 Configure terminal translation initialization (TTI) for personal station access (PSA). For information about configuring TTI, refer to ‘‘Setting up Personal Station Access’’ on page 287. Configure Security Violation Notification for Station Security Codes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up Personal Station Access 288 Preferences and permissions include the definition of terminal buttons, abbreviated dial lists, and class of service (COS) and class of restriction (COR) permissions assigned to your station. Extensions without a COS, such as Expert Agent Selection (EAS) agents or hunt groups, cannot use PSA.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up Personal Station Access 289 b. (Optional) Type y on the Record PSA/TTI Transactions in History Log field. These fields display only when the Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) Enabled field on this screen is set to y. 3. Type change cos and press RETURN. The Class of Service screen appears. 4. Type y in the Personal Station Access (PSA) 1 field and press ENTER. 5.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Creating a station security code 290 Creating a station security code Station Security Codes (SSC) provide security to station users by preventing other users from accessing functions associated with the user’s station. Each station user can change their own SSC if they know the station’s current settings.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 10 Setting up telecommuting Assigning coverage options 291 Page 1 of X STATION Extension: Type: Port: Name: 1234 Lock Messages? n 406D _____ __________________________ STATION OPTIONS Data Module? n Display Module? n BCC: 0 Security Code: Coverage Path 1: Coverage Path 2: Hunt-to-Station: 4321__ ___ ___ ____ TN: 1 COR: 1 COS: 1 Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1 Message Lamp Ext: 1014 MM Complex Data Ext: ____ 6.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up call forwarding 292 Instructions In our example, we assign two coverage options so a user can choose from either option to control how their calls are handled. To assign 2 coverage options: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears. 2. Type #9 in the Change Coverage Access Code field and press ENTER. 3. Type change cor 1 and press RETURN.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up call forwarding 293 Instructions In our example, we assign the feature access codes and class of service to set up call forwarding. This allows your users to forward their calls to another extension. To set up call forwarding: 1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN. The Feature Access Code screen appears. 2. Set a 2-digit access code for the following fields and press ENTER.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Assigning an extender password ■ 294 Distributed Communications System Assign a different telecommuting access extension for each switch. You can use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from any of the DCS nodes, but you must dial the extension of the node on which your station is defined before dialing the FAC.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Installing home equipment 295 3. Select Enable Password to enable the password. 4. Click random. This means that the password is a system generated random number. The system displays a 10-digit number in the Password field. Take note of this number, your user will need it to access the switch from home. 5. Type Doe, John and click OK. This is the last name and first name of the user.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Installing home equipment 296 Before you start You need the following equipment: ■ DEFINITY extender remote module ■ DCP sets (office and home must match) Configure a feature access code for associating your home number to your office number. For information about configuring an associate feature access code, refer to ‘‘Setting up Personal Station Access’’ on page 287.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up remote access 297 Associating your office phone number to the home station To associate your phone number: 1. On your home station, type #4. This is the associate feature access code. 2. Type 4321 and press #. This is your extension number. 3. Type 1996 and press #. This is your password. Disassociating your home station To disassociate your home station: 1. Press HOLD four times.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up remote access 298 individuals who have been advised of the sensitive nature of the access information. Each authorized user should be instructed concerning the proper use and handling of access codes. In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through use of remote access features.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up remote access 299 REMOTE ACCESS Remote Access Extension 1234___ Barrier Code Length 7__ Authorization Code Required? y Remote Access Dial Tone: y Barrier Code COR TN COS Expiration Date No.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Setting up remote access 300 10. Type 01/01/99 in the Expiration Date field. This is the date the barrier code expires. A warning message is displayed on the system copyright screen seven days before the expiration date. The system administrator can modify the expiration date to extend the time interval, if necessary. 11. Type y in the Disable Following A Security Violation field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Training users 301 Barrier codes provide your system security and define calling privileges through the administered COR. You can administer up to 10 barrier codes, each with a different COR and COS. Barrier codes can be from 4 to 7 digits, but all codes must be the same length. You can also require that users enter an authorization code to use this feature.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Training users 302 Instructions Associating PSA In this example, we associate PSA (preferences and permissions) assigned to your station with another compatible terminal. To associate PSA: 1. Dial #4. This is the associate PSA feature access code. You hear dial tone. 2. Type 1234 and press #. This is your extension. 3. Type 4321 and press #. This is your Station Security Code.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Training users 303 4. Dial 87654321 and press #. This is the extension security code. 5. Dial 2. This is the new coverage path. You hear confirmation tone. Changing call forwarding In this example, we change call forwarding to extension 1235. To change call forwarding: 1. Dial 1234. This is the extension you configured for telecommuting. 2. Dial #8 and press #.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 10 Setting up telecommuting Training users 304 4. Dial 12345678 and press #. This is the new security code. Security codes can be 4- to 8-digits long. 5. Dial 12345678 and press #. This is to confirm your new security code. You hear the confirmation tone. NOTE: If you cannot change your security code, Manager 1 can clear the problem using the Clear Audit Summary command.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security 305 Enhancing system security 11 Toll fraud is the theft of long distance service and can come from both internal and external sources. When toll fraud occurs, your company is responsible for usage charges. In addition, unauthorized use may tie up your system, preventing your customers from reaching you and your employees from doing business.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Basic security 306 Basic security Keeping your system secure The following is a partial list you can use to help secure your system. It is not intended as a comprehensive security checklist. Refer to the BCS Products Security Handbook for more information about these and other security-related features.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Preventing toll fraud 307 Set logoff notification and forced password aging when administering logins. You must assign passwords for these logins at setup time. Establish well-controlled procedures for resetting passwords. 2. Prevent voice mail system transfer to dial tone Activate “secure transfer” features in voice mail systems. Place appropriate restrictions on voice mail access/egress ports.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Preventing toll fraud 308 9. Monitor traffic and system activity for abnormal patterns Activate features that “turn off” access in response to unauthorized access attempts. Use Traffic and Call Detail reports to monitor call activity levels. 10.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Physical security 309 conducted at public payphones located in subways, shopping malls, or airport locations. Refer to ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 857 to prevent this happening to your company. Physical security Physical security is your responsibility. Implement the following safeguards as an added layer of security: 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security System security checklist 310 To disable Remote Access, on the Remote Access screen, Permanently Disable field, type y. Refer to ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 857 for more information on remote access. NOTE: Lucent recommends that you permanently disable Remote Access using the change remote-access command. If you do permanently disable Remote Access, the code is removed from the software.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security System security checklist 311 5. If you use vectors: a. Assign all Vector Directory Numbers (VDN) a unique COR. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Guide to ACD Call Centers for more information. NOTE: The COR associated with the VDN dictates the calling privileges of the VDN/vector. High susceptibility to toll fraud exists on vectors that have “collect digits” steps.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security System security checklist 312 6. On the Feature Access Code screen, Facility Test Calls Access Code, the Data Origination Access Code, and the Data Privacy Access Code fields, change from the default or remove them. NOTE: These codes, when dialed, return system dial tone or direct access to outgoing trunking facilities.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security System security checklist 313 Tip: You can use the list route-pattern print command to print a copy of your facility restriction levels (FRL) and check their status. 11. On all trunk group screens, set the Dial Access field to n. If set to y, it allows users to dial Trunk Access Codes, thus bypassing all the ARS call screening functions. Refer to ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 967 for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Adding logins and passwords 314 16. Lucent recommends you administer the following on all voice mail ports: ■ Assign all voice mail ports a unique Class of Restriction. Refer to ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 520 for more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Adding logins and passwords 315 Instructions We will add the login angi3 with the password b3stm0m. We also will require the user to change their password every 30 days. To add new logins and passwords: 1. Type add login angi3 and press RETURN. The Login Administration screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Adding logins and passwords 316 8. Type change permissions angi3 and press RETURN. The Command Permission Categories screen appears. COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name: angi3 COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin. and Maint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Changing a login 317 More information When you add a login, the Security Measurement reports do not update until the next hour. Password aging is an option you can start while administering logins. The password for each login can be aged starting with the date the password was created or changed and continuing for a specified number of days (1 to 99).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Removing a login 319 The Login Administration appears and displays all information about the requested login except the password. Removing a login This section shows you how to remove a user’s login. To remove a login, you must be a superuser. Instructions To remove a login such as angi3: 1. Type remove login angi3 and press RETURN.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Using access security gateway 320 Instructions To set up access security gateway: 1. Type change login xxxx and press RETURN, where xxxx is the alphanumeric login ID. The Login Administration screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Using access security gateway 323 Loss of an ASG key If a user loses their Access Security Gateway Key: 1. Modify any logins associated with the lost Access Security Gateway Key. Refer to the Access Security Gateway Key User’s Guide to change your PIN. 2.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Changing login permissions 324 ■ Port — Contains the port mnemonic associated with the port on which the session was established or rejected. The port mnemonics for G3r systems are SYSAM-LCL, SYSAM-RMT, MAINT, and SYS-PORT. For G3si systems, they are MRG1, INADS, NET, and EPN.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Changing login permissions 325 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name: angi3 COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin. and Maint.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Changing passwords 326 Changing passwords This section shows you how to change a user’s password. Instructions We will change the password for login angi3 to g3or5e. To change passwords: 1. Type change password angi3 and press RETURN. The Password Administration screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Using busy verify 327 Using busy verify This section shows you how to use Busy Verify (also known as Busy Verification) to help find fraud problems. When you suspect toll fraud, you can interrupt the call on a specified trunk group or extension number and monitor the call in progress. Callers will hear a long tone to indicate the call is being monitored.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Setting up security violations notification 328 2. In the Feature Button Assignments area, type verify. 3. Press ENTER to save your changes. 4. To activate the feature, press the VERIFY button on the phone and then enter the Trunk Access Code and member number to be monitored.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Setting up security violations notification 330 REMOTE ACCESS Remote Access Extension________ Barrier Code Length____ Authorization Code Required? y Remote Access Dial Tone: n Barrier Code COR TN COS Expiration Date No.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Setting up authorization codes 331 12. In the Feature Button Assignments section, type one of the following: ■ asvn-halt — The Authorization Code Security Violation Notification call is activated when an authorization code security violation is detected. This applies only if you are using authorization codes.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Setting up authorization codes 332 Instructions 1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN. The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 11 Enhancing system security Setting up authorization codes 333 8. Type change authorization-code nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the authorization code. The Authorization Code — COR Mapping screen appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Dealing with security violations 334 Refer to ‘‘Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks’’ on page 1338 and ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 865 for more information on assigning Facility Restriction Levels. Refer to ‘‘Call Detail Recording’’ on page 1221 and ‘‘Station’’ on page 882 for more information on using Call Detail Recording on station phones.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 11 Enhancing system security Dealing with security violations 335 Disabling remote access There may be occasions when you have to disable remote access for one of your users because of a security violation. 1. Log in to the switch using a login ID with the correct permissions. 2. Type disable remote-access and press RETURN.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Tips for working with trunk groups Managing trunks 337 12 This chapter contains basic procedures for working with analog and digital trunks. Specialized trunks such as Internet Protocol (IP) Solution, APLT, tandem, release-link, and DMI-BOS trunks are not covered in this manual. For more information, refer to DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Tips for working with trunk groups 338 5. For outgoing or 2-way trunks, administer Automatic Route Selection so DEFINITY ECS knows which outgoing calls to route over this trunk group. 6. Test your new trunk group. Using the trunk access code, place a variety of calls. This chapter provides instructions for steps 3 and 4 in this process.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk group 340 ■ Outgoing Display — Typing y in this field allows display phones to show the name and group number of the trunk group used for an outgoing call. This information may be useful to you when you’re trying to diagnose trunking problems.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk group 341 Before you start Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk group 342 4. Type 85 in the COR field. This field controls which users can make and receive calls over this trunk group. Assign a class of restriction that’s appropriate for the COR calling permissions administered on your system. 5. In the TAC field, type 105. This field defines a unique code that you or your users can dial to access this trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Adding a DID trunk group 343 Adding a DID trunk group In most cases, Lucent recommends leaving the default settings in fields that aren’t specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Lucent representative or network service provider can give you more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Adding a DIOD trunk group 345 9. Press ENTER to save your changes. Now you’re ready to add trunks to this trunk group. Refer to ‘‘Adding trunks to a trunk group’’ on page 355. Related topics Refer to ‘‘Inserting and absorbing digits’’ on page 359 for instructions on matching modifying incoming digit strings to match your dial plan.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Adding a PCOL trunk group 346 Before you start Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Adding a PCOL trunk group 347 4. In the TAC field, type 111. This field defines a unique code that you or your users can dial to access this trunk group. The code also identifies this trunk group in call detail reports. 5. In the Trunk Type field, type ground start. This field tells the system what kind of signaling to use on this trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Adding a Tie or Access trunk group 348 More information Call Detail Recording Call Detail Recording can be activated for calls on a personal CO line, but the CDR record does not specifically identify the call as PCOL. Calls over personal CO lines can, however, be identified by the trunk access code used on the call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Adding a Tie or Access trunk group 349 Before you start Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Adding a Tie or Access trunk group 350 3. In the Group Name field, type Outside calls. This name will be displayed, along with the group number, for outgoing calls if you set the Outgoing Display? field to y. You can type any name up to 27 characters long in this field. 4. Type 85 in the COR field. This field controls which users can make or receive calls over this trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Setting up digital trunks 351 Setting up digital trunks Any of the common trunks, except for PCOL trunks, can be analog or digital. (PCOL trunks can only be analog.) Administering a digital trunk group is very similar to administering its analog counterpart, but digital trunks must connect to a DS1 circuit pack and this circuit pack must be administered separately.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Setting up digital trunks 352 Instructions The following example shows a DS1 circuit pack configured for T1 service. The circuit pack is supporting a two-way CO trunk group that carries only voice and voice-grade data. To configure a new DS1 circuit pack: 1. Type add ds1 07A19 and press ENTER. The DS1 Circuit Pack screen appears. You must enter a specific port address for the circuit pack.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Setting up digital trunks 353 More information T1 recommended settings The table below shows recommended settings for standard T1 connections to your local exchange carrier. Field Value Notes Line Coding b8zs Use ami-zcs if b8zs is not available. Signaling Mode robbed-bit Robbed-bit signaling gives you 56K bandwidth per channel.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Setting up digital trunks 354 The following enhanced DS1 administration login permissions must be assigned on the Command Permission Categories screen: ■ The Maintain Enhanced DS1 field must be y. ■ The Maintain Trunks field must be y. ■ The Maintain Switch Circuit Packs field must be y.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Adding trunks to a trunk group 355 ITC, Bit Rate, and Line Coding. The ITC (Information Transfer Capability) field appears on the Route Pattern screen, Trunk Group screen, and Access Endpoint screen. The Line Coding and the Bit Rate fields appear on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen. The settings for these fields on all the screens must be coordinated as shown in the following tables.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Adding trunks to a trunk group 356 Instructions As an example, let’s assign 5 trunks to a new tie trunk group, trunk group 5. We’ll use ports on several circuit packs for members of this group. To assign trunks to trunk group 5: 1. Type change trunk-group 5 and press RETURN. The Trunk Group screen appears. 2. Move to the Group Member Assignments page.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Removing trunks from a trunk group 357 5. In the Mode field, type e&m. ! CAUTION: An entry in this field is only required for some circuit packs. Dip switch settings on the circuit pack control the signalling mode used on the trunk group, so the entry in the Mode field must correspond to the actual setting on the circuit pack. 6. In the Type field, type t1-comp.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Inserting and absorbing digits 359 If you’re replacing trunk group 5 with another trunk group, just type the information for the new trunk group over the old entries. Remember to press ENTER to save your changes. 2. In the Station screen for extension 8410, clear the entry in the Button Assignments field for the Trunk-Group Night Service button. Remember to press ENTER to save your changes. 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Administering answer detection 361 For absorption, this field defines how many digits will be absorbed. The switch will remove the first 2 digits from the digit strings delivered with incoming calls. For example, if the central office delivers the string “556-4444,” DEFINITY ECS will change it to “64444,” an extension that fits your dial plan. 4. In the Expected Digits field, type 7.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 12 Managing trunks Administering trunks for listed directory numbers 362 Instructions As an example, we’ll administer trunk group 5 for both types of answer detection. To administer trunk group 5 for answer supervision from the network: 1. In the Trunk Group screen for group 5, type y in the Receive Answer Supervision field. 2. Press ENTER to save your change. Now let’s administer answer supervision by timeout.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 12 Managing trunks Administering trunks for listed directory numbers 363 Let’s take the 3 businesses listed above as an example. Let’s assume your switch receives 4 digits from the central office on a DID trunk group and that you’re not using Tenant Partitioning. To make these calls to different listed directory numbers terminate to your attendant group: 1. Type change listed-directory-numbers and press ENTER.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Understanding announcements Managing announcements 365 13 Understanding announcements An announcement is the recorded message a caller hears while the call is in a queue. An announcement is often used in conjunction with music.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 13 Managing announcements Adding announcement data modules 366 Instructions To set up the announcement data module, determine the port location of the Announcement circuit pack or the Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack. You can find circuit pack information on the Integrated Announcement Board screen. To set up the data module on the Announcement circuit pack located at 01B18: 1. Type add data-module next and press RETURN.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 13 Managing announcements Adding announcement extensions 367 Adding announcement extensions You need to assign an extension for each announcement that you want to record. After you define an announcement extension, you use it to record and access the announcement. Instructions Let’s use extension 1234 for an announcement about business hours. We’ll use the integrated announcement circuit pack located on 01B18.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Recording announcements 368 8. In the Port field, type 01B18. 9. Press ENTER to save your work. Recording announcements You can record an announcement for callers to hear when they dial a specific extension. You can use the same steps to change an existing announcement.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Saving announcements 369 To listen to the announcement you just recorded: 1. Dial the extension from any phone or console. In our example, dial 1234. NOTE: You have to wait 15 seconds after you record the announcement before you can dial the extension to hear your announcement. Saving announcements You can save and back-up announcements from an announcement circuit pack to system memory.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Copying announcements 370 For example to save the announcements from the circuit pack at 01B18: 1. Type save announcements from 01B18 and press RETURN. NOTE: If you have announcement circuit packs with and without built-in memory, save the circuit pack without built-in memory.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Restoring announcements 371 Restoring announcements You can restore announcements from system memory to an announcement circuit pack. Your system memory is a tape, disk, or memory card, depending on your system. If you have a duplicated system, you system always restores the announcements located on the active processor.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Deleting and erasing announcements 372 More information When someone powers up the system or inserts or resets an announcement circuit pack, the system checks the circuit pack for announcements.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Setting up continuous-play announcements 373 You may also want to remove the announcement extension from the system. To remove the extension, use your system administration terminal to complete the following steps: 1. Type change announcements and press RETURN. The Announcements/Audio Sources screen appears. 2. Delete the information in the Ext and Type fields. 3. Press ENTER to save your work.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 13 Managing announcements Setting up continuous-play announcements 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6 Ext. 1234_ _____ _____ _____ _____ 374 ANNOUNCEMENTS/AUDIO SOURCES Type COR TN Name Q QLen Pro Rate Port integ-rep 1_ 1_ business hours b N/A n 32 01B18 _________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n _________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n _________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n _________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n 2. Type b in the Q field on the same line as extension 1234.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 14 Managing group communication Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers Managing group communication 375 14 Group communication features allow coworkers to communicate with each other more efficiently. This chapter shows you how to administer your system so users can place a variety of pages from their phones or use their phones as intercoms.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers 376 Instructions As an example, let’s set up voice paging for an office with 5 zones. We’ll allow users to page all 5 zones at once, and we’ll assign a class of restriction of 1 to all zones. 1. Type change paging loudspeaker and press RETURN. The Loudspeaker Paging screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers 377 7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for zones 2 to 5. 8. In the ALL row, type 310 in the Voice Paging — TAC field and 1 in the Voice Paging — COR field. By completing this row, you allow users to page all zones at once. You do not have to assign a port to this row. 9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 14 Managing group communication Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers 378 With an appropriate class of restriction, remote callers can also make loudspeaker pages. When deluxe paging is enabled, if a user with an active call dials the trunk access code for a paging zone the active call is automatically parked. ■ Users dial the trunk access code + “#” to page and park an active call on their own extensions.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers 379 Instructions To set up chime paging, you fill out the necessary fields on the Loudspeaker Paging screen and then assign chime codes to individual extensions on the Code Calling IDs screen. As an example, let’s set up chime paging for a clothing store with 3 zones.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers 380 6. On the Zone 1 row, type Men’s Department in the Location field. Give each zone a descriptive name so you can easily remember the corresponding physical location. 7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for zones 2 and 3. 8. In the ALL row, type 89 in the Code Calling — TAC field and 1 in the Code Calling — COR field.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Paging over speakerphones 381 Fixing problems Problem Possible causes Solutions Users report that they can’t page. The attendant has taken control of the trunk group. Deactivate attendant control. More information Users page by dialing the trunk access code assigned to a zone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 14 Managing group communication Paging over speakerphones 382 Before you start You must have 6400-, 7400-, or 8400-series speakerphones to use speakerphone paging. Instructions To set up speakerphone paging, you create a paging group and assign phones to it. In the following example, we’ll create paging group 1 and add 4 members. 1. Type add group-page 1 and press RETURN. The Group Paging Using Speakerphone screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Paging users who are on active calls 383 6. Enter the remaining extensions that are members of this group. The switch fills in the Name fields with the names from the Station screen when you save your changes. 7. Press ENTER to save your changes. Fixing problems Problem Possible causes Solutions Users get a busy signal when they try to page. All phones in the group are busy or off-hook.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 14 Managing group communication Paging users who are on active calls 384 Before you start Before you administer whisper paging: ■ Your switch must have a circuit pack that supports whisper paging. Refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description for information on specific models. ■ Users must have 6400-, 7400-, 8400-, or 9400-series DCP (digital) phones.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Using phones as intercoms 385 Using phones as intercoms Use this procedure to make communications quicker and easier for users who frequently call each other. With the intercom feature, you can allow one user to call another user in a predefined group just by pressing a couple of buttons. You can even administer a button that always calls a predefined extension when pressed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 14 Managing group communication Using phones as intercoms 386 4. On row 1, type 1 in the DC field. This is the code a user will dial to make an intercom call to extension 2010. The length of this code must exactly match the entry in the Length of Dial Code field. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining extensions. Dial codes don’t have to be in any order.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 14 Managing group communication Observing calls 387 4. In the Grp field, type 1. This is the number of the intercom group. Since an extension can belong to more than one intercom group, you must assign a group number to intercom buttons. 5. In the DC field, type 2. This is the dial code for extension 2011, the destination extension. 6. Press ENTER to save your changes. 7. Repeat steps 1–6 for extension 2011.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 14 Managing group communication Observing calls 388 This section describes service observing in environments without Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or call vectoring. To use service observing in those environments, refer to DEFINITY ECS Guide to ACD Call Centers. Before you start On the System Parameter Customer-Options screen, verify the: ■ Service Observing (Basic) field is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 14 Managing group communication Observing calls 389 3. In the Station screen, assign a Service Observing button to the observer’s phone. A service observing button permits users to switch between listen-only and listen-and-talk modes simply by pressing the button. 4. To activate the warning tone, type y in the Service Observing — Warning Tone field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Call Setup 392 Once you have connected these data devices to the switch, you can use networking and routing capabilities to allow them to communicate with other devices over your private network or the public network. This section describes the system features available to enable data communications.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Data Call Setup 393 3. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer the Circuit Pack Assignments field. Refer to ‘‘Modem Pool Group’’ on page 817 for more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Data Call Setup 394 ■ DIAL: 8, 555-2368 ■ DIAL: 9+555-2368+%9999+123 (remote access) The following call-progress messages and their meanings are provided for DCP and ISDN-BRI modules. Table 5. Call-progress messages Message Application Meaning DIAL: DCP Equivalent to dial tone. Enter the desired number or FAC followed by Enter. CMD BRI Equivalent to dial tone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Data Call Setup 395 Table 5. Call-progress messages — Continued Message Application Meaning FORWARDED DCP, BRI Equivalent to redirection-notification signal. Called terminal activates Call Forwarding and receives a call, and call is forwarded. INCOMING CALL DCP, BRI Equivalent to ringing. INVALID ADDRESS DCP Entered name is not in alphanumeric-dialing table.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Call Setup 396 3. To originate and disconnect a call, the user presses BREAK. If the terminal does not generate a 2-second continuous break signal, the user can press originate/disconnect on the data module. 4. The user can enter digits at the DIAL: prompt. Telephone dialing DCP telephone dialing allows telephone users to originate and control data calls from a telephone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Call Setup 397 ISDN-BRI data modules Data-terminal dialing A user can set up and disconnect data calls directly from a data terminal without using a telephone as follows: 1. The user presses ENTER a few times. If the CMD: prompt does not appear, the user presses BREAK A + T at the same time, and then presses ENTER. 2. At the CMD: prompt, the user types and presses ENTER. 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Default Dialing 398 Considerations ■ A BRI phone cannot call a data terminal, and a data terminal cannot call a BRI phone. ■ Abbreviated Dialing Interactions Only 22 of the 24 (maximum) digits in an abbreviated-dialing number are available for keyboard dialing. The remaining two digits must contain the wait indicator for tone detection.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Alphanumeric Dialing 399 Default Dialing enhances data terminal (keyboard) dialing by allowing a data-terminal user to place a data call to a preadministered destination by either pressing a Return at the DIAL: prompt (for data terminals using DCP data modules) or typing d and pressing RETURN at the CMD: prompt (for data terminals using ISDN-BRI data modules).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Hotline 400 When a user enters an alphanumeric name, the system converts the name to a sequence of digits according to an alphanumeric-dialing table. If the entered name is not found in the table, the system denies the call attempt and the user receives either an Invalid Address message (DCP) or a Wrong Address message (ISDN-BRI).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Privacy 401 3. On the Data Module screen, administer the Abbreviated Dialing List1 field. The system automatically places Data Hotline calls to preassigned extensions or off-premises numbers. Calling terminals are connected to the system by a data module. Users should store the destination number in the abbreviated dialing list for future reference.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Restriction 402 Interactions ■ Attendant Call Waiting and Call Waiting Termination If Data Privacy is active, Call Waiting is denied.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Restriction 403 Administering Data Restriction 1. On the Station screen, set the Data Restriction field to y. Refer to ‘‘Station’’ on page 882 for more information. 2. Choose one of the following trunk groups and set the Data Restriction field to y. Refer to ‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 738 and ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 967 for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions ■ 404 Priority Calls Priority Calls are allowed if the analog station is idle. Call Waiting (including Priority Call Waiting) is denied if the station is busy. However, Priority Calls appear on the next available line appearance on multiappearance telephones. ■ Service Observing A data-restricted call cannot be service observed.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Modules — general 405 — 1-Button Transfer to Data The telephone user can transfer a call to the Data-Only Off-Premises Extension. The Data Extension button lamp on the telephone lights and the Call in Progress lamp on the data module lights during a data call. — Data Call Preindication The multiappearance telephone user presses the idle associated Data Extension button to reserve a data module.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Modules — general 406 ■ Ethernet data module. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information. ■ Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) data module. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information. NOTE: The 51X series Business Communications Terminals (BCTs) are not administered on the Data Module screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Data Modules — general 407 CALLMASTER phones that have a connection to a data terminal or personal computer. The data modules integrate data and voice into the DCP protocol required to interface with the switch via a port on a digital-line circuit pack. Use the 7400B+ or 8400B+ instead of an MPDM when you need asynchronous operation at speeds up to 19.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Administered Connection 408 Asynchronous Data Module NOTE: The alias station command cannot be used to alias data modules. Use the Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) with asynchronous DTEs as a data stand for the 7500 and 8500 Series of ISDN-BRI phones, thus providing connection to the ISDN network.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Administered Connection 409 through tie trunks (ISDN, DS1, or analog tie trunks) and intermediate switches. If required, route the connection via Automatic Route Selection (ARS) and Generalized Route Selection (GRS) through the public network. The call routes over associated ISDN trunks.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Administered Connection ■ 410 A local data endpoint connecting to a local or remote data endpoint such as a connection between two 3270 data modules. NOTE: The following guidelines do not include AAR and ARS, or GRS administration information for routing AC calls over trunk groups. Refer to the respective feature elsewhere in this book for that information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Administered Connection 411 As long as an AC is due to be active, the originating switch continues to establish an AC unless the attempt fails because of an administrative error (for example, a wrong number) or service-blocking condition (for example, outgoing calls barred).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Administered Connection 412 Administered Connections failure: Auto Restoration and Fast Retry When an active AC drops prematurely, you must invoke either auto restoration or fast retry to determine whether auto restoration is attempted for an active AC. If you option AC for auto restoration and the connection was routed over SDDN trunks, auto restoration is attempted.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Administered Connection 413 2. On the DS1 Circuit Pack screen, administer all fields. Refer to ‘‘DS1 Circuit Pack’’ on page 599 for more information. (Use with switch node carriers.) 3. On the Access Endpoint screen, administer all fields. Refer to ‘‘Access Endpoint’’ on page 467 for more information. 4. Choose one of the following trunk groups and administer all fields.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Administered Connection ■ 414 Class of Restriction Reserve a COR for AC endpoints and SDDN trunks. This restricts endpoints that are not involved in AC from connecting to SDDN trunks or endpoints involved in AC. ■ Class of Service/Call Forwarding Assign to an AC endpoint a COS that blocks Call Forwarding activation at the endpoint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Modem Pooling 415 Modem Pooling Modem Pooling allows switched connections between digital-data endpoints (data modules) and analog-data endpoints via pods of acoustic-coupled modems. The analog-data endpoint is either a trunk or a line circuit.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Modem Pooling 416 For Combined modem poolings: 1. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer all fields. Refer to ‘‘Modem Pool Group’’ on page 817 for more information. 2. On the Feature Access Code screen, administer the Data Origination Access Code field. Refer to ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 619 for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls PC Interface ■ 417 DMI Trunks If you place a data call from a local analog-data endpoint to a DMI trunk, you must dial the data-origination access code to obtain a modem. Data calls on DMI trunks to local analog-data endpoints automatically obtain modems.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls PC Interface 418 Figure Notes 1. IBM-compatible PC with DCP Interface card 2. IBM-compatible PC with DCP Interface card 3. DCP 4. DCP telephone 5. DEFINITY ECS (Digital Line, Digital Line (16-DCP-2-Wire), or Digital Line (24-DCP-2-wire) circuit pack) 6. Host Figure 12.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls PC Interface 419 Figure Notes Figure 13. 1. ISDN telephone 7. DEFINITY ECS 2. PC with application 8. PRI trunks 3. Handset or Headset 9. BRI stations 4. BRI Interface card 10. Interworking 5. 2B + D 11. DMI 6. ISDN Line (12-BRI-S-NT) circuit pack) 12.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls PC Interface 420 Security There are two areas where unauthorized use may occur with this feature: unauthorized local use and remote access. ! SECURITY ALERT: Unauthorized local use involves unauthorized users who attempt to make calls from a PC. The PC software has a security setting so users can place the PC in Security Mode when it is unattended.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 421 ■ Do not use telephones with data modules with the PC Interface. (You can still use 3270 Data Modules if you also use 3270 emulation). If you attach a DCP data module or ISDN data module to a telephone that is connected to a PC Interface card, the data module is bypassed (not used). All the interface functions are performed by the interface card even if a data module is present.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 422 The following table provides information on Wideband Switching channel types.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 423 Typical uses A typical video application uses an ISDN-PRI interface to DS0 1 through 6 of the line-side facility. Refer to Figure 14. wdbndex CJL 061996 Figure Notes 1. Video application 8. Network 2. Port 1 9. DS0 24 D-channel 3. Port 2 10. DS0 23 unused 4. ISDN terminal adaptor 11. DS0 1–6 wideband 5. Line-side ISDN-PRI 12. DS0 24 D-channel 6. DEFINITY ECS 13.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 424 Endpoint applications An endpoint application is the origination or destination of a wideband call. Endpoint application can be any number of data applications based on the customer’s particular needs. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters For wideband switching with non-ISDN-PRI equipment, you can use an ISDN-PRI terminal adapter.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 425 Non-signaling configuration Wideband also can support configurations using non-signaling (non-ISDN-PRI) line-side T1 or E1 connections. The endpoints are the same as those defined for configurations with signaling. Data service unit/channel service unit This unit simply passes the call to the endpoint application.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 427 Networking All of the wideband networking is over ISDN-PRI facilities (and the emulation of them by ATM-CES) but may connect to a variety of networks, other domestic interexchange carriers’ services, private line, RBOC services, and services in other countries.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 428 Given this facility list concept, the algorithms have the ability to search for trunks, by facility, in an attempt to satisfy the bandwidth requirements of a given wideband call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 429 Note that on a T1 facility, a D-channel is not considered a busy trunk and results in a facility with a D-channel always being partially contaminated. On an E1 facility, however, a D-channel is not considered a busy trunk because H11 and H12 calls may still be placed on that facility; an E1 facility with a D-channel and idle B-channels is considered an idle facility.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 430 N x DS0 For the N x DS0 multi-rate service, a trunk group parameter determines whether a floating or a flexible trunk allocation scheme is to be used. The algorithm to satisfy an N x DS0 call is either floating or flexible.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 431 Glare and blocking Glare prevention Glare occurs when both sides of an ISDN interface select the same B-channel for call initiation. For example, a user side of an interface selects the B-channel for an outgoing call and, before the switch receives and processes the SETUP message, the switch selects the same B-channel for call origination.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching 432 Administering Wideband Switching Before you start You need a DS1 Converter circuit pack. Refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description for more information on the circuit pack. Instructions To administer wideband switching: 1. On the Access Endpoint screen, administer all fields. Refer to ‘‘Access Endpoint’’ on page 467 for more information. 2.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Wideband Switching ■ 433 Automatic Circuit Assurance Treats wideband calls as logical single-trunk calls so that a single ACA-referral call is made if an ACA-referral call is required. The call is referred to the lowest B-channel associated with the wideband call. ■ Call Coverage A wideband endpoint extension cannot be administered as a coverage point in a call-coverage path.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface ■ 434 Generalized Route Selection GRS supports wideband BCC to identify wideband calls. GRS searches a route pattern for a preference that has wideband BCC. Route preferences that support wideband BCC also can support other BCCs to allow different call types to share the same trunk group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface 435 Figure Notes 1. ASAI adjunct 5. ISDN-BRI 2. ISDN Line circuit pack 6. Packet bus 3. Packet Controller circuit pack 7. Memory bus 4. Switch processing element (SPE) Figure 15.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 15 Managing data calls Setting up CallVisor ASAI 436 Setting up CallVisor ASAI CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Applications Interface (ASAI) can be used in the telemarketing and help-desk environments. It is used to allow adjunct applications to monitor and control resources in the DEFINITY ECS. Before you start ■ On the System Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify the: — ASAI Interface field is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 15 Managing data calls Setting up CallVisor ASAI 437 3. In the Port field, type 01A0702. Use the port address assigned to the LAN Gateway Interface circuit pack. 4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 16 Collecting billing information Collecting information about calls Collecting billing information 439 16 Collecting information about calls Call Detail Recording (CDR) collects detailed information about all incoming and outgoing calls on specified trunk groups. If you use intraswitch CDR, you can also collect information about calls between designated extensions on the switch.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 16 Collecting billing information Collecting information about calls 440 Instructions In this example, we are going to establish call detail recording for all calls that come in on trunk group 1 (our CO trunk). We are going to set up CDR so that any call that is handled by an attendant produces a separate record for the attendant part of the call. 1. Type change trunk-group 1 and press RETURN. The Trunk Group screen appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 16 Collecting billing information Recording calls between users on the same switch 442 More information You can also administer the switch to produce separate records for calls that are conferenced or transferred. This is called Call Splitting. There are many other variations that you can administer for CDR, and these are described in the screens section of this book.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 16 Collecting billing information Forcing users to enter account codes 445 Instructions In this example, we administer the system to force users in our North American office to enter an account code before making international calls. 1. Type change system-parameters cdr and press RETURN. The CDR System Parameters screen appears. 2. In the Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form field, type y. 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 16 Collecting billing information Receiving call-charge information 446 More information You can also establish a class of restriction with Forced Entry of Account Codes set to y, and assign this COR to trunks or other facilities that you want to restrict. With this method, all users with this COR must enter account codes before making any outgoing trunk calls. See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 520 for more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 16 Collecting billing information Viewing call charge information 449 Viewing call charge information DEFINITY ECS provides two ways for you to view call-charge information: on a telephone display or as part of the Call Detail Recording (CDR) report. From a display, users can see the cost of an outgoing call, both while the call is in progress and at the end of the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 16 Collecting billing information Viewing call charge information 450 8. Press ENTER to save your changes. 9. Now assign extension 5040 a disp-chrg button to give this user the ability to control the charge display. See ‘‘Adding feature buttons’’ on page 57 for more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table 451 Screen reference 17 AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table Your switch compares dialed numbers with the dialed strings on this table and determines the route pattern for the number.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table 452 change ars analysis Page 1 of X ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Location: ___ Dialed String _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ _________________ Screen 23.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table 453 An exact match is made on a user-dialed number and dialed string entries with wildcard characters and an equal number of digits. For example, if a user dials 424, and there is a 424 entry and an X24 entry, the match is on the 424 entry. Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter up to 18 digits that the switch analyzes.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table 454 Call Type (for AAR only) Enter the call type associated with each dialed string. Call types indicate numbering requirements on different trunk networks. ISDN Protocols are listed in the table below. Valid entries Usage aar Regular AAR calls intl The Route Index contains public network ISDN trunks that require international type of number encodings.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table 455 Valid entries Usage China # 1 Call Type lpvt local private normal natl non-NANP normal npvt national private normal nsvc national service normal op operator attendant pubu public-network number (E.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table 456 change aar conversion Page 1 of 2 AAR DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE Percent Full: ___ Matching Pattern __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ Screen 24.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table 457 Location (for ARS only) This is a display-only field. Values other than “all” appear only if the Multiple Locations field on the System Parameters Customer Options is y. Valid display Usage 1 to 44 Defines the switch location for this ARS Digit Conversion Table.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table 458 Replacement String Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the digits that replace the deleted portion of the dialed number. Leave this field blank to simply delete the digits. (1 to 18 digits) * # Use # to indicate end-of-dialing. It must be at the end of the digit-string. Net Enter the switch network used to analyze the converted number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 459 Abbreviated Dialing List You use the Abbreviated Dialing List screens to establish system-wide or personal lists for speed dialing. Enhanced List The Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing List can be accessed by users to place local, long-distance, and international calls; to activate/deactivate features; or to access remote computer equipment.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 460 Size (multiple of 5) The number of dial code list entries you want in this list. Valid entries Usage 5 to 100, in multiples of 5 Up to 100 entries per screen Privileged Indicates whether users of this list can dial any number in the list, regardless of the COR of the station from which they dial.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 461 Field descriptions for page 1 display abbreviated-dialing group ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST Group List: ____ Size (multiple of 5): 5 Program Ext: _____ DIAL CODE 01: ________________ 02: ________________ 03: ________________ 04: ________________ 05: ________________ Screen 27.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 462 Only DIAL CODEs 1 through 5 are displayed initially. If you enter a number greater than 5 in the Size field, the system increases the number of dial codes to the number you specified. Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned. Valid entries Usage Digits 0 to 9 Up to 24 characters * (star) Part of FAC # (pound) Part of FAC ~p Pause 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 463 Personal List Enter the extension of the phone that will use this list. List Number Valid entries Usage 1 to 3 Identify which of the three personal lists you want to define for the phone. Size (multiple of 5) Enter the number of abbreviated dialing numbers you want to assign in multiples of 5, up to 100.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 464 System List This screen implements a system abbreviated dialing list. Only one system list can be assigned and is administered by the System Administrator. The list can be accessed by users to place local, long-distance, and international calls; to activate/deactivate features; or to access remote computer equipment.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 465 DIAL CODE Enter the number you want the system to dial when users enter this dial code. While the system is waiting, a call progress tone receiver is tied up, and, since there are a limited number of receivers in the system, outgoing calling capability may be impaired. Only DIAL CODEs 1 through 5 are displayed initially.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Abbreviated Dialing List 466 Pages 1 through 4 of the screen display abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST 7103A Button List Page 1 of 1 DIAL CODE (FOR THE 7103A STATION BUTTONS) 1: ________________________ 5. ________________________ 2: ________________________ 6. ________________________ 3: ________________________ 7. ________________________ 4: ________________________ 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Access Endpoint 467 Access Endpoint This screen administers Access Endpoints and Wideband Access endpoints. NOTE: You can administer Wideband Access Endpoints only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Wideband Switching field is y. An Access Endpoint is a nonsignaling trunk that neither responds to signaling nor generates signaling.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Access Endpoint 468 Extension A display-only field showing the extension number as specified in the command line, or shows the next available extension number if next was entered on the command line. This is the extension number assigned to the nonsignaling trunk and used to access the trunk endpoint. (Starting) Port Enter seven characters.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Access Endpoint 469 Communication Type Valid entries Usage voice-grade-data For an analog tie trunk access endpoint. 56k-data 64k-data For a DS1 access endpoint enter as appropriate (64k-data is not allowed for robbed-bit trunks). wideband For a Wideband access endpoint Name Enter an name for the endpoint. Width Only appears if the Communication Type field is wideband. This field cannot be blank.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Access Endpoint 470 TN Valid entries Usage 1 through 20 Enter the Tenant Partition number. ITC (Information Transfer Capability) This field is used to determine the type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originating from this endpoint. Displays when the Communication Type field is 56k-data, 64k-data, or Wideband.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Administered Connection 471 Without this end validation, a user could administer an access endpoint as unrestricted when in fact it is restricted, that is its associated port is a member of a DS1 circuit pack that uses ZCS data transmission. Valid entries Usage unrestricted When unrestricted, only unrestricted transmission facilities (b8zs) will be used to complete the call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Administered Connection 474 Name Valid entries Usage Up to 27 alphanumeric characters. Enter a short identification of the AC. Authorized Time of Day Continuous The connection will be up all the time or re-established if the connection goes down. Valid entries Usage y Indicates that the AC is continuous (that is, not scheduled to be active at a certain time).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Administered Connection 475 Duration Enter the period of time that the scheduled AC should remain active. This period is specified in two fields separated by a colon. The maximum duration is 167 hours and 59 minutes (that is, 1 minute less than 1 week). Only appears if the Continuous field is n. Valid entries Usage 000 through 167 For the hour field. 00 through 59 For the minute field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Alias Station 476 Alarm Threshold Only appears if an entry in the Alarm Type field is other than none. Enter the number of times an attempt to establish or reestablish an AC must fail consecutively before an AC alarm generates.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Alias Station 477 Some administrators also use this screen to “name” non-telephone device. For example, you know that you can add a modem to your system by simply administering the extension as the standard analog type 2500.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Alphanumeric Dialing Table 478 Supported Set Type Enter a supported phone type that you want to map (or alias) to the alias set type. Valid supported phone types are listed in Table 12 on page 908. NOTE: Data Communication Protocol (DCP) telephone types must be aliased to DCP telephone types, hybrid types to hybrid types, and analog to analog types.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Alphanumeric Dialing Table 479 Alpha-name All alpha-names in the table must be unique and cannot be referenced in their own "Mapped String". The alpha-names can be used in any other "Mapped String" and multiple times in a "Mapped String". Valid entries Usage From 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters. The entry must start with an alphabetic character and may not have blank spaces between characters.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Announcements/Audio Sources 480 Valid entries Usage ~w Suspend digit outpulsing until a dial tone is detected. ~p Pause 1.5 seconds. (Used only for outgoing trunk calls. If used internally, the 1.5 second pause is ignored.) ~m Digits following this character are for end-to-end signaling. Following digits to be outpulsed as tones regardless of type of trunk signaling, pulse, or tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Announcements/Audio Sources 481 Type Enter the type of announcement you want to assign to this extension number. If you enter integrated or integ-rep, complete the Protect, Rate, and Port fields. If you enter analog, ds1-fd, ds1-sa, ds1-ops, or aux-trunk, complete QLen (if Q is y) and Port.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Announcements/Audio Sources 482 TN Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 Enter the Tenant Partition number, if any. Name Valid entries Usage up to 27 alphanumeric characters Describe the announcement message Q (Queue) Valid entries Usage y Enter y to queue calls for the announcement if the announcement type is either integ-rep or aux-trunk. Enter y for ACD and vectoring delay announcements.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ARS Toll Table 483 Rate Enter the recording speed (in 1000 bits/second) for integrated announcements. A different recording speed may be used for each integrated announcement. When the type is analog, ds1, or aux-trunk, N/A appears in this field. Valid entries Usage 16 16 kbps (8 minutes and 32 seconds of announcement time per circuit pack or 1 hour and 24 minutes for 10 circuit packs).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 484 ARS TOLL TABLE Valid entries Usage 2 through 9 Identify the number of the ARS Toll Table OFFICE CODES Valid entries Usage 200–299 through 900–999 Identify the block of numbers on this screen. 00: through 99: These fields represent the last 2 digits of the codes within the 100-block of numbers. Designate each as a number toll or non-toll call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 485 Attendant Console x This is a display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration command such as add or change. Valid entries Usage Display-only field Enter the console number when completing a paper screen. Type Valid entries Usage console Indicates the type of attendant console being administered.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 486 Port Enter seven characters. Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 First and second characters are the cabinet number. 01 through 03 01 A through E Third character is the carrier. 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 487 TN Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 Enter the Tenant Partition number. Valid entries Usage 0 through 15 Enter the class of service (COS) for this attendant console. Valid entries Usage 0 through 95 Enter the class of restriction that reflects the desired restriction.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 488 Disp Client Redir This field is administrable only if the Hospitality feature has been enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. This field affects the station’s display on calls originated from a station with Client Room Class of Service.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 489 DIRECT TRUNK GROUP SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS (Trunk Access Codes) Enter the trunk access codes (TACs) for local and remote switches. (There are fields for one local TAC and one remote TAC per button labeled Local and Remote.) The local TAC (1 to 4 digits) refers to a trunk group or Loudspeaker Paging zone on this switch.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 491 Name Enter the name of the user associated with the data module. The name is optional, it can be left blank. COR Enter the desired class of restriction (COR) number. Valid entries Usage 0–95 COS Enter the desired (COS) number to designate allowed features. See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 532 for additional information on the allowed features.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 492 HOT LINE DESTINATION — Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code Only displays when the Special Dialing Option field is hot-line. The associated AD number is dialed when the user goes off-hook on a Data Hot Line call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 493 Name Contains the name assigned to the above extension number. Valid entries Usage Display-only field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 494 Valid entries Usage alt-frl Alternate FRL. Alternate facility restriction level; allows the attendant to activate or deactivate the AFRL feature. When activated, this allows the originating device (lines or trunks) to use an alternate set of the facility restriction levels to originate a call (1 per console).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 495 Valid entries Usage dont-split Don’t Split. This button allows the attendant to not split away a call when dialing (1 per console). vis Visually Impaired Attendant Service (vis) — This button activates visually impaired service for the attendant.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Attendant Console 496 Valid entries Usage hundrd-sel Hundreds group select; in addition to the fixed HGS buttons on Field descriptions for page 1, a user can administer hundreds group select feature buttons on this page.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Authorization Code — COR Mapping 497 change attendant Page Y of X ATTENDANT CONSOLE DISPLAY MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: normal____ 2: inspect___ 3: cov-msg-rt 4: next______ Screen 40. 5: 6: 7: 8: delete-msg call-disp_ date-time_ timer_____ Attendant Console ■ DISPLAY MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS — Display-type buttons obtain display functions on the associated alphanumeric display.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Authorization Code — COR Mapping 498 Field descriptions for page 1 change authorization-code Page 1 of 1 Authorization Code - COR Mapping Note: XX codes administered. Use “list” to display all codes.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Bulletin Board 499 COR Valid entries Usage 0–95 When a user dials the associated authorization code, this is the COR that the telephone or other facility will assume for that call. Bulletin Board Use the bulletin board to post and receive information. There are three pages of message space within the bulletin board. The first page has 19 lines, but you can only enter text on lines 11-19.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Bulletin Board 500 Lines 1 through 10 These lines are reserved for high priority messages and are noted with an asterisk (*) in the first column on the left. If you have an init or inads login you can enter high-priority information to trigger the high-priority message at login time. Valid entries Usage A through Z Enter any information. a through z Blank 0 through 9 !@#$%^&*()_+-=[]{}|\’˜;:’,”<.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Call Vector 501 Field descriptions for pages 2 and 3 Lines 1 through 20 These lines can be used by anyone with access. Valid entries Usage A through Z Enter any information. a through z Blank 0 through 9 !@#$%^&*()_+-=[]{}|\’˜;:’,”<.>/? Date This display only field contains the date the information was entered or last changed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Call Vector 503 Field descriptions for page 3 Page 3 of 3 CALL VECTOR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Screen 45. Call Vector Number A display-only field when the screen is accessed using a change or display administration command. Name Represents the vector name.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Call Vector 504 Valid entries Usage y You do not want this vector to be accessible to these client programs. Locked vectors can only appear and be administered through the SAT or a terminal emulator. n Gives CentreVu® CMS and CentreVu® Control Center users the ability to administer this vector from these client programs.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Call Vector 505 Prompting A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Vectoring (Prompting) field is y. LAI A display-only field indicating whether Look-Ahead Interflow is enabled. G3V4 Adv Route A display-only field indicating whether you can use the G3V4 Advanced Vector Routing commands.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CAMA Numbering Format 506 Valid entries Usage consider Defines the resource (split, skill, or location) that is checked as part of a Best Service Routing (BSR) consider series and obtains the data BSR uses to compare resources. converse-on Delivers a call to a converse split (skill) and activates a voice response script that is housed within a Voice Response Unit (VRU).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference CAMA Numbering Format 507 This screen provides the CESID format by extension number or number blocks. This allows for multiple CESID formats to be sent over multiple CAMA trunk groups allowing for mixed station numbering plans and some limited conversion from non-DID to DID numbers typically required by the Private Switch/Automatic Location Interface (PS/ALI) database.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 508 Ext Code Valid entries Usage Up to 5 digits Enter the leading digits or all of the digits in the extension for the specified CESID. If the extension length is greater than the number of digits in the extension code, the extension code will be interpreted as a block of digits.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 510 Primary Output Format Controls the format of the call records sent to the primary output device. Valid entries Usage customized Use this option if you have special call accounting needs that standard record formats do not accommodate. If you use a customized record format, you need to have call accounting software that is also customized to receive these records.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 511 Secondary Output Format Controls the format of the call records sent to the secondary output device. ! CAUTION: Only qualified (Lucent Technologies) service personnel should administer a secondary output device. This option may cause loss of data when the buffer contains large amounts of data.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 512 EIA Device Bit Rate Applies to G3si only. Displays if either Primary or Secondary Output Format is eia. Valid entries 300 1200 Enter the baud rate of the CDR device connected to the EIA port. 2400 9600 Use Enhanced Formats Enhanced formats provide additional information about time in queue and ISDN call charges, where available.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 513 Record Outgoing Calls Only Valid entries Usage y Enter y to record only outgoing calls. This can save space if you are only concerned with charges for outbound calls. n Enter n to record both outgoing and incoming calls. Intra-Switch CDR Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to record calls within the switch.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 514 Disconnect Information in Place of FRL See ‘‘Call detail record field descriptions’’ on page 1254 for more information. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to replace the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) field with information about why a call disconnects. You can use this information to isolate problems between the G3r and the telephone network. n Enter n to record the call’s FRL.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 515 Calls to Hunt Group — Record Valid entries Usage member-ext Enter member-ext to record the extension of the phone or data terminal where the call terminated. group-ext Enter group-ext to record the extension that was dialed.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 516 Inc Attd Call Record Only appears if Inc Trk Call Splitting is y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable separate recording of attendant portions of outgoing calls that are transferred or conferenced. Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC A temporary signaling channel (TSC) is a virtual connection established within an ISDN D-channel.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 517 Record Call-Assoc TSC Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to create records for call-associated temporary signaling connections. If you have a lot of data connections this could increase the number of records. You may want to consider the capacity of your call collection device.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference CDR System Parameters 519 Table 6.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 520 Class of Restriction Use this screen to establish classes of restriction (COR). Classes of restriction control call origination and termination. Your system may use only one COR or as many as necessary to control calling privileges. You can assign up to 96 different CORs (0 – 95). Consider the following to enhance your system security: 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 521 COR Description Valid entries Usage Up to 35 characters Enter a description of the COR that indicates how you use it. If you make this as clear as possible (for example, Customer Service, Legal Department), it will be easier to remember which COR to assign when you add users. Valid entries Usage 0 to 7 Enter an originating FRL number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 522 Calling Party Restriction This field determines the level of calling restriction associated with this COR. NOTE: To enhance system security, limit calling permissions as much as possible. Valid entries Usage Origination Blocks the calling party from originating a call from the facility at any time. The party can only receive calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 523 NOTE: You cannot enter y in the previous two fields unless Service Observing (Basic) is enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if users with this COR can service observe other users.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 524 Forced Entry of Account Codes FEAC must be enabled on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen and on the CDR System Parameters screen. Refer to ‘‘Forced Entry of Account Codes’’ on page 1222 and ‘‘Forcing users to enter account codes’’ on page 444 for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 525 Restriction Override Allows the specified users to bypass restriction on conference, transfer or call forwarding operations. Valid entries Usage attendant A telephone with a COR that is inward restricted cannot receive public network, attendant-originated, or attendant-extended calls. Enter attendant to give your attendants the ability to override this restriction.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 526 Can Change Coverage Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow station users with this COR to select one of two previously administered coverage paths or to activate, change, or deactivate call forward all calls or call forward busy/don’t answer from any on-site or off-site location.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 527 Fully Restricted Service NOTE: If this field is enabled, the APLT field must be n. Valid entries Usage y/n When y entered for a given COR, stations assigned that COR will not have access to the public network for either incoming or outgoing calls. Category For MFC ANI The Category for MFC ANI field always controls categories for Russian signaling trunks.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 528 Add/Remove Agent Skills Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow users with this COR to add and remove skills. MF ANI Prefix Defines the prefix to apply to an extension number when ANI is sent to the CO. This overrides any ANI prefix administered on the Multifrequency Signaling screen. This does not apply when ANI is tandemed through the switch on tandem calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 529 Automatic Charge Display Shows the cost of an active outgoing call using Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) or ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) on Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) or Lucent BRI stations. Valid entries Usage y Displays call charges during and at the end of the call. n Call charges can be seen if users press the DISP-CHRG button before the call drops.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Class of Restriction 530 Field descriptions for page 2 change cor 10 Page 2 of 4 CLASS OF RESTRICTION MF Incoming Call Trace? n Block Transfer Display? n Screen 50. Brazil Collect Call Blocking? n Class of Restriction screen MF Incoming Call Trace Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow assignment of a Call Trace COR to a station.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Class of Service 532 SERVICE OBSERVING PERMISSION Valid entries Usage y/n A y grants permission to observe specific CORs. Enter n for each COR number (0 through 95) that cannot be observed by the COR being implemented. Class of Service This screen administers access permissions for call processing features that require dial code or feature button access.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Service 533 The screen lists the default values for each COS/feature combination. For a particular combination, y allows access to the feature and n denies access. Assign entries on the screen for each COS to be implemented. Default values are shown on the screen. ! CAUTION: Because many hunt groups are set up with COS 1, be careful when you assign restrictions to COS 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Class of Service ■ Add and remove agent skills ■ Record integrated announcements 534 Off-Hook Alert See ‘‘Emergency Access to the Attendant’’ on page 1323 for more information. To enable this option, either the Hospitality (Basic) or Emergency Access to Attendant field must be enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Code Calling IDs 535 Extended Forwarding B/DA Allows this user to administer call forwarding (when the dialed extension is busy or does not answer) from a remote location. You cannot change this COS to y if Extended Cvg/Fwd Admin on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen is n. See ‘‘Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls’’ on page 1213 for more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Command Permission Categories 536 change paging code-calling-ids Page 1 of 2 CODE CALLING IDs ID ASSIGNMENTS Id Ext 111: ____ 112: ____ 113: ____ 114: ____ 115: ____ 121: ____ 122: ____ 123: ____ 124: ____ 125: ____ 131: ____ 132: ____ 133: ____ 134: ____ 135: ____ Screen 54.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Command Permission Categories 537 Field descriptions for page 1 change permissions angi3 Page 1 of 3 COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES Login Name: angi3 COMMON COMMANDS Display Admin. and Maint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Command Permission Categories 538 Administer Features Use caution when assigning this permission to a user. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow a user to administer feature-related parameters, such as coverage paths, class of service, class of restriction, system parameters, authorization codes, and security.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Command Permission Categories 539 Maintain Switch Circuit Packs You can only enter a value in this field if the Station and Trunk MSP field is set to y on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow a user to perform circuit pack maintenance.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 541 Field descriptions for page 1 change console-parameters Page CONSOLE PARAMETERS Attendant Group Name: OPERATOR COS: 0 COR: Calls in Queue Warning: 5 Attendant Lockout? Ext Alert Port (TAAS): CAS: none Night Service Act. Ext.: IAS (Branch)? n IAS Tie Trunk Group No.: IAS Att. Access Code: Alternate FRL Station: Backup Alerting? n DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext? Screen 57.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 542 Attendant Lockout provides privacy for parties on a multiple-party call held on the console. The held parties can hold a private conversation without interruption by the attendant. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to activate Privacy — Attendant Lockout.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 543 RLT Trunk Group No. Appears only when branch is entered in the CAS field. Enter the trunk group number corresponding to the Release Link Trunk (RLT) trunk group to the main location when supporting CAS Branch service. CAS Back-Up Ext. This field handles attendant-seeking calls if the RLT trunk group to the CAS Main switch is out of service or if CAS Back-Up is activated.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 544 QSIG CAS Number Appears if the CAS field is QSIG-branch. Contains the complete number of the attendant group at the main switch, or a vector directory number (VDN) local to the branch switch. This field cannot be left blank. Valid entries Usage 0-9 Enter up to 20 digits. IAS Tie Trunk Group No. Enter the number of the tie trunk group to the main for the IAS (Branch).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 546 Alerting (sec) Enter the number of seconds after which a held or unanswered call is disconnected from an attendant loop and routed to another attendant or night service Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? Valid entries Usage y Enter y to begin attendant alerting for Held Reminder Calls with secondary alerting.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 547 The extensions should be assigned to the optional Attendant Selector Console in the 00 through 09 block (bottom row) in any hundreds group for easy identification by the attendant. The lamp associated with the number will identify "call parked" or "no call parked", instead of busy or idle status.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 548 ■ DID to Attendant — An incoming DID trunk call to an attendant group. This does not include trunk calls that return to the attendant group after a timeout or deferred attendant recall. ■ Tie Call — An incoming TIE trunk call (dial-repeating or direct types) to an attendant group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Console Parameters 549 The call types, in descending order of priority, are: ■ Type 1 call: outgoing public-network calls receive answer supervision when the Answer Supervision Timer of the trunk group expires, even if the trunk is actually still ringing. Also, incoming calls when answered by the attendant.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Coverage Answer Group 550 Coverage Answer Group This screen establishes Call Coverage Answer Groups. An answer group contains up to eight members who act as a coverage point for another user. For example, if several secretaries are responsible for answering a department’s redirected calls, all the secretaries could be assigned to an answer group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Coverage Path 551 Group Name Enter the group name you want to use to identify this group. Tip: Enter the extension numbers that are group members. This allows a list coverage answer group command to be used to list the phones that will be alerted.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Coverage Path 552 Field descriptions for page 1 change coverage path 2 Page 1 of 1 COVERAGE PATH Coverage Path Number: 2 Next Path Number: ___ Hunt After Coverage: n Linkage: ___ ___ COVERAGE CRITERIA Station/Group Status Active? Busy? Don’t Answer? All? DND/SAC/Goto Cover? Inside Call n y y n y Outside Call n y y Number of Rings:2 n y COVERAGE POINTS Terminate to Coverage Pts.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Coverage Path 553 coverage path with redirection criteria that matches the call status. If the chain is exhausted before the system finds a match, the call does not redirect to coverage. No path number here indicates that this path is the only path for the principal. Valid entries Usage 1 to 999 Linkage Display-only fields that show the (up to) two additional coverage paths in the coverage path chain.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Coverage Path 554 COVERAGE POINTS Terminate to Coverage Pts. with Bridged Appearances Valid entries Usage y Allows a call to alert as both a bridged call and a redirected call. n The call skips the coverage point if it has already alerted as a bridged call. Point1, Point2, Point3, Point4, Point5, Point6 The alternate destinations that comprise a coverage path.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Crisis Alert System Parameters 555 If calls redirect to an AUDIX in a DCS network, administer a unique Hunt Group screen. Assign the AUDIX extension in the Group Extension field. If the AUDIX is connected to the local node, set the Message Center field to audix; if the AUDIX is connected to another node, set the Message Center field to rem-audix.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Crisis Alert System Parameters 556 Field description Every User Responds Controls who needs to respond to a crisis alert. Valid entries Usage y If set to y, all users who have a crisis alert button are notified and must clear the alert for every emergency alert. Assign crisis alert buttons only to attendant consoles and stations that must be notified of an emergency call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Crisis Alert System Parameters 557 Retries Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. Valid entries Usage 0 - 10 The number of times the system tries to send out the alert message in case of an unsuccessful attempt. This increases the chances that the pager receives a crisis alert message. Retry Interval (sec) Displays when the Alert Pager field is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 558 Pin Number This field can be used for any combination of the pager pin number and pauses or left blank. Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. Valid entries Usage digits 0-9 Enter a number up to 15 digits. A pause (about 2 seconds) is for timing of the message.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 559 Field descriptions for page 1 change data-module 30 Page 1 of 2 DATA MODULE Data Extension: Type: Port: ITC: 30 data-line___ _______ restricted__ Name: COS: COR: TN: 27 1 1 1 BCC: Connected to: dte ABBREVIATED DIALING List1: SPECIAL DIALING OPTION: ASSIGNED MEMBER (Station with a data extension button for this data module) Ext 1: 1002 Screen 64.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 560 Refer to ‘‘Generalized route selection’’ on page 1340 for a detailed description of Bearer Capability Classes (BCC) and their ability to provide specialized routing for various types of voice and data calls. The BCC value is used to determine compatibility when non-ISDN-PRI facilities are connected to ISDN facilities (ISDN-PRI Interworking).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 561 Valid entries Usage data-line Assigns a Data Line Data Module. The Data Line Data Module (DLDM) screen assigns ports on the Data Line circuit pack (DLC) that allows EIA 232C devices to connect to the system. The DLC, with a companion Asynchronous Data Unit (ADU), provides a less expensive data interface to the system than other asynchronous DCP data modules.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 562 Valid entries Usage netcon Assigns a Netcon Data Module. Netcon data modules are the Processor Data Modules (PDMs) that are integrated into the system’s network control ports that provide asynchronous circuit switched interfaces to the maintenance and administration terminals, Hospitality journal printers, and CDR digital output.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 563 Valid entries Usage ppp Assigns a Point-to-Point Protocol data module. The PPP Data Module screen assigns a synchronous TCP/IP port on the C-Lan. These ports are tailored to provide TCP/IP connections for use over telephone lines. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information on Point-to-Point data modules.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 564 Valid entries Usage x.25 Assigns an X.25 Data Module in G3r configurations for communications to Adjuncts and other nodes in a DCS network. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information on X.25 data modules. COS Enter the desired class of service. Valid entries Usage 0 - 15 Select the allowed features.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 565 Physical Channel Used with Netcon and Processor Interface Data Modules. The Physical Channel number is referred to on associated system forms as the Interface Link number. Valid entries Usage 01 - 08 For Processor Interface Data Modules, enter the 2-digit circuit number of the Processor Interface port.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 566 Port Used with 7500, Data Line, Ethernet, Processor/Trunk, PPP, System Port, X.25, and World Class BRI Data Modules. Specifies a port location to which the data module is connected.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 567 MM Complex Voice Ext Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. This field contains the number of the associated phone in the multimedia complex. This field appears only after you set the Multimedia field to y. This field is left blank until you enter the data module extension in MM Complex Data Ext on the Station screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 568 ITC (Information Transfer Capability) Used with 7500, Announcement, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, and Processor Interface Data Modules. Appears only when the Comm Type field is 56k-data or 64k-data. Indicates type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originated from this endpoint. Does not display for voice-only or BRI stations.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 569 Enable Link Used with X.25, Ethernet, Point-to-Point, and Processor Interface data modules. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information. This field is in different locations on the screen for different data module types. Node Name Used with Ethernet and Point-to-Point data modules.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 570 Endpoint Type Used with X.25 Data Modules. An endpoint type is a type of packet switched data endpoint that uses X.25 call control procedures. The X.25 Endpoint connects to external ports on the PGATE board and to the TDM bus via a DS1 trunk. Ports connected to the adjunct endpoint can be either DTEs or DCEs. The type of endpoint (DTE or DCE) is administrable on the “data-mod” screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 571 Highest PVC Logical Channel Used with X.25 Data Modules. Specifies how the above endpoint type acts. Valid entries Usage 1 - 64 Indicates that 1 to 64 Logical Channels are allowed on this port. Cannot be changed. Switched Virtual Circuit Used with X.25 Data Modules. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that the Switched Virtual Circuit is not allowed for this port.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 572 ABBREVIATED DIALING List1 Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and World Class BRI Data Modules. Supports Data Hot Line. This field can be left blank. Valid entries Usage e Enhanced g Group. You also must enter a group list number. p Personal. You also must enter a personal list number. s System.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 573 Hot Line Destination — Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only when the Special Dialing Option field is hot-line. Entry in this field supports Data Hot Line. Valid entries Usage 0-999 This number is associated with the AD List.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 574 Default Mode Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify the data mode. Valid entries Usage sync Synchronous async Asynchronous Default Speed Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify the data rate. Valid entries Usage 1200 2400 4800 19200 56000 64000 Can be entered when the Default Mode field is sync.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 575 Default Data Applications Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify mode to be Used with originating data calls when the mode is not specified with the calling parameters. This mode is also used for terminating trunk calls that do not have bearer capability specified or administered connections.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 576 change data-module 30 CAPABILITIES DATA MODULE Page 2 of 2 KYBD Dialing? n Busy Out? n SPEEDS Low? y 300? y OPTIONS 1200? y 2400? y 4800? y 9600? y 19200? y Permit Mismatch? n Screen 66. Data Line Data Module — if KYBD Dialing is n Refer to ‘‘DLC Option Settings’’ on page 580 for additional information when assigning entries for the remaining fields on the screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 577 Busy Out This option should be enabled for DTEs that are members of a hunt group and to allow “busy out” when DTE turns power off so that calls do not terminate on that DTE. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to place the DLC port in a busied-out state once the DTE control lead to the DLC is dropped.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 578 When this option is enabled, the DLC reports the highest optioned speed and all the lower speeds (or the previously selected autoadjust speed) during the handshake process. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to instruct the DLC to operate at the highest selected speed, which is a higher rate than the far-end data module.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 579 Answer Text Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option enables text feedback that is normally delivered to the DTE when a call is answered or disconnected. The Answer Text option applies to DLC-generated text as well as text received from the system. If this option is disabled, the system still generates the text, but the DLC prevents it from being sent to the device.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 580 DLC Option Settings The following provides additional information on the option settings for DLCs when used with the following types of devices: ■ Printers ■ Non-intelligent terminals ■ Data terminals and personal computers ■ Host computers ■ Information Systems Network (ISN) Printers A DLC port with a companion ADU, when attached to a printer, usually terminates a data call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 581 Table 7.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 582 Table 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 583 Table 9.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 584 Table 10.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 585 Number of Outstanding Frames (w) Specifies layer 2 window size. Valid entries Usage 1-7 If you enter 2, up to 2 frames can be sent without confirmation. Retry Attempt Counter (N2) Specifies the number of times to send one frame when this frame is not confirmed for a period of time. Valid entries Usage 0-7 Frame Size (N1) Specifies the number of bytes in a frame.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 586 Restart (T20) Timer (seconds) The T20 timer is a DTE time-limit started when DTE issues a restart indication and terminated when the restart request is received or confirmed. Valid entries Usage 0 - 500 Reset (T22) Timer (seconds) The T22 timer is a DTE time-limit started when DTE issues a reset indication and terminated when the reset request is received or confirmed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Data modules 587 TEI Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only if the Fixed TEI field is y. Valid entries Usage 0 - 63 Enter a 1- to 2-digit number. MIM Support Used with 7500 Data Modules. Management Information Message Support. Used to support two types of capabilities: MIM endpoint initialization capability (SPID support), and other Maintenance/Management capability.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Data modules 588 SPID programmed into the ISDN-BRI terminal must be the same. This means that the SPID of the new or re-used terminals must be programmed to match the administered SPID value. Valid entries Usage y/n Indicates the terminal’s endpoint initialization capability. SPID Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only if the Endpt Init field is y.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Date and Time 589 Date and Time Use this screen to set the system date and time, to select the daylight savings plan number, if any, and to show whether the current time is standard time or daylight savings. Settings on this screen affect your switch’s internal clock and timestamp. You should update the date and time for a leap year or a system restart after a power failure.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Date and Time 590 Year Valid entries Usage 1990 to 2099 Enter the current year. The system clock uses this as the current year. Hour The system uses a 24-hour clock. For example, 14:00 is the same as 2:00 p.m. Valid entries Usage 0 to 23 Enter the current hour to be used by the system clock. Valid entries Usage 0 to 59 Enter the current minute. The system clock uses this as the current minute.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Daylight Savings Rules 591 Related topics To update the date and time for the change to or from daylight savings time, use the Daylight Saving Rule screen. Refer to ‘‘Establishing daylight savings rules’’ on page 7 for instructions on how to set up daylight savings rules. Daylight Savings Rules Use this screen to enter up to 15 customized daylight savings rules.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Daylight Savings Rules 592 Change day (Start) Valid entries Usage Sunday through Enter the day of the week you want the clock to move ahead to Saturday begin daylight savings. If you leave this field blank, the clock will change on the exact date entered in the next two fields.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Dial Plan Record 593 Month (Stop) Valid entries Usage January through Enter the month you want the clock to move back to return to December standard time. Date (Stop) Valid entries Usage 0 to 31 Enter the date you want the clock to move back to return to standard time. Time (Stop) The system uses a 24-hour clock. For example, 14:00 is the same as 2:00 p.m.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Dial Plan Record 594 Local Node Number Enter a number to identify a specific node in a switch network. This entry must match the DCS switch node number and the CDR node number if they are specified. Valid entries Usage 1–63 Enter the number of a specific node in a network. blank The field may be left blank if automatic restoration, DCS, and CDR are not used.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Dial Plan Record 595 See DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information on Uniform Dial Plans. ETA Routing Pattern Enter the number of the routing pattern to reach the destination switch. Valid entries Usage 1 – 254 Enter the number of the ETA routing pattern UDP Extension Search Order Appears only when Uniform Dialing Plan is 4-digit or 5-digit.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Dial Plan Record ■ 596 ars (Automatic Route Selection shortcut dialing)— can be entered only if the ARS field and the AAR/ARS Shortcut Dialing field on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen are both y. When an ars entry is used to route a call, the caller has access to all ARS features. Enter ars in any column but only for first digits 0 through 9 and *.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Dial Plan Record 597 NOTE: It is recommended that you do not administer extensions that begin with 0 if the Uniform Dialing Plan is enabled. In the United States of America, 0 is usually the attendant. ■ fac (feature access code) only — a FAC can be any number from 1 to 9 and contain up to 4 digits. You can use * or #, but only as a first digit.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Digit Absorption 598 Digit Absorption This screen implements up to 5 digit absorption lists. The screen may be required for each CO and FX trunk group connected to a step-by-step CO. Each outgoing digit string from the switch to the step-by-step CO is treated according to entries in the “Absorption Treatment Assignment” section of the screen.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 599 Absorption Treatment Assignment Enter a desired treatment letter. All choices for the digits 0 through 9 must be taken from the same group (Group I or Group II). Valid entries Usage A through F DS1 Circuit Pack Use this screen to administer all DS1 circuit packs.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 601 add ds1 xxxxxx Page 1 of 2 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01A13 Bit Rate: 2.048 Name: _______________ Line Coding: cmi Signaling Mode: CAS Interconnect: pbx Country Protocol: 3 Interface Companding: mulaw Idle Code: 11111111 MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS Slip Detection? n Screen 75.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 602 TN464C (and later release) circuit packs have an option switch that must be set to match the entry in the Bit Rate field. Valid entries Usage 1.544 Use for T-1 service. 2.048 Use for E-1 service. Line Coding This field selects the type of line coding used on this facility.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 603 Valid entries Usage ami-basic (alternate Enter ami-basic for unrestricted E-1 facilities. mark inversion-basic) hdb3 (high density bipolar 3) Enter hdb3 for restricted E-1 facilities. cmi (coded mark inversion) Used in Japan, cmi is the only type of line coding you can use with the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 604 This field only appears if the Bit Rate field is 1.544 (that is, if you’re using T-1 service). If you’re using E-1 service, DEFINITY ECS automatically selects CEPT1 framing. Tip: Lucent recommends using ESF when your service provider supports it, especially if you may someday upgrade the facility to ISDN.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 605 D-Channel The Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, when administered to support ISDN-PRI signaling, allows you to assign the D-channel to any channel from 1 to 31 in an E-1 facility. You cannot submit the screen if this field is blank. Using the change ds1 command, you can change this field if the D-channel is not used in a signaling group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 606 either end of the DS1 link must have complementary settings in this field: if not, the D-channel won’t even come up. For example, if the switch at one end of the link is administered as network, the other must be administered as user. Valid entries Usage Use the following 2 values for private network applications in the U.S.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 607 This field appears if the Signaling Mode field is CAS or isdn-pri. For the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, this is a display-only field if the Signaling Mode field is CAS. Valid entries Usage 1 to 25 Enter the country protocol used by the central office at which this link terminates.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 608 The default value of the field changes depending upon which value the Interface field contains. ! CAUTION: It is critical that administration on this switch correctly pairs with the administration of the far-end switch. If the far-end is administered as the b side, this field should be set to a regardless of whether the layer 2 designation is peer-master or peer-slave, and vice versa.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 609 Interface Companding The entry in this field must match the companding method used by the far-end switch. This field does not appear for all DS1 circuit packs. Valid entries Usage alaw Enter alaw for E-1 service. mulaw Enter mulaw for T-1 service. CRC This field indicates whether a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) will be performed on transmissions that the DS1 circuit pack receives.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 610 This field appears when the Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri, the Bit Rate field is 2.048, the Connect field is pbx, and the Interface field is peer-master or peer-slave. Valid entries Usage timeslot sequential If the DEFINITY ECS is connected via QSIG trunks to a switch supporting the ETSI QSIG or ISO QSIG specifications, this field must be sequential.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 611 MMI Interface This display-only field appears if the MMCH field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen and there is a value in the MMI Cabling Board field.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack Table 11. 612 Incoming Digital PPM Signaling Default (per Country Protocol code) Code Country PPM Min (ms) PPM Max (ms) PPM Value 0 null NA NA NA 1 U.S.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 613 Slip Detection Slips — synchronization errors — slow digital transmissions and can result in data loss. The switch maintains a slip-count record for each DS1 interface to detect errors and evaluate their severity (the type of alarm).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 614 Alarm When PRI Endpoint Detached Use this field for DS1 circuit packs connected to Roll-About Video equipment. This field appears only when the Connect field is line-side. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if you want the switch to generate an alarm when the DS1 board detects a loss of signal (for example, if the video equipment is disconnected).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 615 Network Management Protocol This field appears only if the Framing Mode field is esf. Valid entries Usage tabs The entry in this field, used only with circuit packs that have an integrated channel service unit (CSU), allows the data link to be remotely monitored. Send ANSI-T1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference DS1 Circuit Pack 616 Receive ALBO (Receive Automatic Line Build-Out) This field increases the strength of incoming signals by a fixed amount to compensate for line losses. Valid entries Usage 26db To set this field correctly, you should measure the signal loss on this specific facility. However, you may enter 26db for most applications.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Extended Pickup Group 617 Extended Pickup Group This screen allows grouping of pickup groups into extended pickup groups. This allows users to answer calls outside their immediate group. The maximum number of groups that can be added to an extended pickup group is 25.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Extensions Administered to have an MCT-Control Button 618 Pickup Group Number This field determines which call pickup groups can answer calls in the extended pickup group. Valid entries Usage 1-800 (G3si) 1-5000 (G3r) Enter the pickup group numbers for each of the pickup groups that you want to belong to this extended group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 619 Feature Access Code This screen assigns feature access codes (FACs) that, when dialed, activate or cancel the system features. Each field on this screen has the same valid values, which must conform to feature access codes or dial access codes as defined by your dial plan. Valid entries Usage 1–4 digit number, * and # may be used as first digit.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 620 Abbreviated Dial - Prgm Group List Access Code Used to enter a group list from a telephone. The user’s extension must be entered on the Abbreviated Dial Group List screen in order to program the group list. Announcement Access Code Used to record announcements. Answer Back Access Code Used to retrieve parked calls. Auto Alternate Routing (AAR) Access Code Used to access AAR.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 621 Call Park Access Code Used to park an active call, which can then be retrieved from a different station using the answer back access code. Do not administer to have the same first digit as another feature access code that is longer in length. Call Pickup Access Code Used to answer a call directed to a pickup group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 622 Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A Used to activate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location. Extended Call Fwd Activate All Used to activate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location. Extended Call Fwd Deactivation Used to deactivate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 623 Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code The feature access code (FAC) users enter when a call directed to another pickup group is to be answered. Users must enter a valid “Pickup Number” following the Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code to complete the operation. Facility Test Calls Access Code Used to place activate a facility test call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 624 Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Unlock Used to unlock a telephone’s display module. The lock function is canceled at the telephone by dialing this unlock FAC followed by the SCC. Leave Word Calling Send A Message Used to send a leave word calling message. Leave Word Calling Cancel A Message Used to cancel a leave word calling message.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 625 Program Access Code Used to program abbreviated dial buttons on an individual phone. Refresh Terminal Parameters Access Code Used to update terminal parameters on an individual phone when system settings have changed. Remote Send All Calls Activation/Deactivation Used to activate or deactivate the Send All Calls feature. Requires console permissions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 626 Station Security Code Change Access Code Enter the code the user must dial to change their Station Security Code. The SCC must be administered before the user can change it using this FAC. That is, a user cannot change a blank SCC.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 627 Voice Coverage Message Retrieval Access Code Allows users to retrieve voice messages for another user (for whom they are a coverage point) via a digital display module. Voice Principal Message Retrieval Access Code Allows users to retrieve their own voice messages for another user via a digital display module.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 628 Auto-In Access Code Enter the code the agent must dial to become automatically available to receive another ACD call each time a call is released. Aux Work Access Code Enter the code the agent must dial when the agent will be performing non-ACD activities. Login Access Code Enter the code the agent must dial to gain access to the ACD functions.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 629 Remove Agent Skill Access Code Enter the digits an agent must dial to be able to remove a skill from their current skill set. NOTE: The next field is available only if Vectoring (Basic) and Vectoring (Prompting) have been enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 630 Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code Enter the access code the housekeeper dials from the client’s room to provide room status. These codes are transmitted to the Property Management System (PMS) for processing. You can assign a definition to the six codes on the Hospitality screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature Access Code 631 Basic Mode Activation If you enter this FAC when your system is an Enhanced multimedia complex, it will revert to a Basic multimedia complex. If you enter this FAC when your system is a Basic mode station it will do nothing. Enhanced Mode Activation If you enter this FAC when your system is a Basic multimedia complex, it will become an Enhanced multimedia complex.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 632 Originating a multimedia call with the multimedia multi-address access code will originate a call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the System Parameters Features screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 633 Self Station Display Enabled Use this field to control the use of the INSPECT button for digital display phones. Self Station Display allows a user to display the primary extension associated with a digital display phone. There are two methods: (1) enter a feature access code (FAC), and (2) use the INSPECT button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 634 Call Park Timeout Interval (minutes) Valid entries Usage 1–90. Enter the number of minutes a call remains parked before it cancels. Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval (seconds) Valid entries Usage 5–25 The number of seconds a call progress tone receiver (CPTR) tries to detect dial tone from a trunk during dialing.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 635 Port Indicates the port number that provides Music-on-Hold access. This requires a port on a TN763 Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack or any supported Analog Line circuit pack. Appears when Music/Tone on Hold is music.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 636 DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment Valid entries Usage A recorded announcement extension Toll charges do not apply to DID and private network calls routed to an announcement. attd For system security, Lucent recommends entering attd in this field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 637 Must have an "aca-halt" button administered on the user’s station. If you enable this feature, complete the following ACA-related fields. Valid entries Usage y Enter y if ACA measurements will be taken. n Otherwise, enter n. ACA Referral Calls Indicates where ACA referral calls generate. (Only appears when ACA Enabled is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 638 ACA Short Holding Time Originating Extension and ACA Long Holding Time Originating Extension Valid entries Usage An unassigned extension Do not use the same extension number for both fields. The specified extensions are assigned automatically by the system when the screen is submitted. These fields only display if ACA Referral Calls is local or primary.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 639 Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals Determines the protocol/tones sent to a Caller ID phone. Valid entries Usage Bellcore Enter Bellcore for Bellcore protocol with 212 modem protocol tones. Used in the U.S. and similar countries. V23-Bell Enter V23-Bell for Bellcore protocol with V.23 modem tones. Used in Bahrain and similar countries.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 640 Maximum Number of External Calls Logged Per Station When an external call is not answered, the switch keeps a record of up to 15 calls (provided information on the caller identification is available) and the phone’s message lamp lights. The phone set displays the names and numbers of unsuccessful callers.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 641 ! CAUTION: Changing the TTI Enable field from n to y or from y to n triggers a background maintenance task that either generates (when changed to y) or removes (when changed to n) TTI port translation for unadministered ports in the system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 642 Record PSA/TTI Transactions in History Log Valid entries Usage y/n If y, TTI and PSA transactions record in the history log. You access these transactions via the List History command. COR for PSA Dissociated Sets Valid entries Usage 1-95 Enter the class of restriction to apply to calls made from dissociated telephones.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 643 Default Multimedia Outgoing Trunk Parameter Selection Valid entries Usage 2x56 Sets default parameter for bandwidth and bearer for all video calls.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 644 Time Before Off-Hook Alert Valid entries Usage 1 to 3000 seconds Enter the time in seconds that a telephone with an Off-Hook Alert Class of Service can remain off-hook (after intercept tone has started) before an emergency call is sent to the attendant.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 645 Call Pickup on Intercom Calls Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow a user’s or Agent LoginID’s call, ringing as an intercom call, to be picked up using the Call Pickup or Directed Call Pickup features. This field controls the use of this feature throughout the system. n Enter n to prevent the use of these features to pickup an intercom call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 646 Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept Treatment Enter the type of intercept treatment the caller receives when the call is outward restricted. Valid entries Usage announcement Provides a recorded announcement to calls that cannot be completed as dialed. You select and record the message.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 647 Controlled Station-to-Station Restriction Enter the type of intercept treatment the caller receives when the call is placed to a restricted telephone. Valid entries Usage announcement If announcement is entered, an associated extension number field displays. Enter the extension of the restricted telephone in the field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 648 ! SECURITY ALERT: You enhance your system’s security by using the maximum length for your authorization code. Valid entries Usage 4–13 digits Enter a number that defines the number of digits (length) in the Authorization Code field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 649 Display Authorization Code This field applies only to DCP, not to BRI or hybrid sets. ! SECURITY ALERT: To enhance your system’s security, set Display Authorization Code to n. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow authorization code digits to display on the set during the dialing. n Enter n if these digits should not display.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 651 EIA Device Bit Rate This field is not displayed for G3r. Valid entries Usage 1200 2400 4800 9600 Enter the required printer speed setting. System-Wide Parameters: Switch Name Valid entries Usage Any keyboard character. Enter alpha-numeric characters for identification.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters Auto Hold Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable the Automatic Hold feature on a system-wide basis. Conference Parties without Public Network Trunks Enter a number to specify the maximum number of parties allowed in a conference call involving no public network trunks.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 655 Conference Tone NOTE: Bridging and Conference Tones are not supported by all countries. If these tones are enabled for countries other than Italy, Belgium, United Kingdom, or Australia, the tones will be equivalent to no tone (silence) unless the tone is independently administered or customized on the System-Parameters Country Options screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 656 Special Dial Tone Special dial tone notifies an analog-phone user if certain features are still active when the user goes off-hook. These features include: ■ Call Forwarding ■ Send All Calls ■ Do Not Disturb Refer to the DEFINITY ECS Application Notes for Type Approval for more information. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to use the Special Dial Tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 657 DID Busy Treatment Valid entries Usage attendant Specifies how to handle a direct inward dialing (DID) call to a busy station. tone Allow AAR/ARS Access from DID/DIOD Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow calls for DID and DIOD type trunk groups to complete calls using ARS or AAR.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 658 Abort Conference Upon Hang-Up Allows DCP, hybrid, wireless, or ISDN-BRI phone users to abort the conference operation when they hang up. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to change a call placed on soft-hold in the conference-pending status to hard-held status if the user hangs up.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 659 7405ND Numeric Terminal Display Valid entries Usage y/n If enabled, this allows you to use 7405ND in the Type field of the station screen. This is not an actual phone type, but you can use this to define ports for certain types of Octel Messaging Division voice messaging systems. This numeric display setting sends only numbers, and not names, to the Octel system.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 660 DTMF Tone Feedback Signal to VRU Connection, Disconnection This field appears only if DTMF Feedback Signals for VRU on the Customer-Options System Parameters screen is y. Valid entries Usage 0–9, *, #, ABCD Enter the code to connect or disconnect the VRU. This can be a single digit, or a combination such as *99 to connect, #99 to disconnect.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 661 Display Connected Name/Number for ISDN DCS Calls Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to display the connected name/number (if received) for ISDN DCS calls. Send ISDN Trunk Group Name on Tandem Calls Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to provide consistent display information regardless of trunk type. If set to y, provides only trunk group name.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 662 MWI - Number of Digits Per AUDIX Subscriber Appears only if the Basic Supplementary Services field or the ISDN Feature Plus field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. This field appears an indication of the number of digits per AUDIX subscriber. NOTE: For QSIG-MWI only.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 663 international, and (2) whether the Numbering Plan Identifier (NPI) is Unknown or ISDN/Telephony. This administered prefix is applied to national calls. Prefixing applies to any subsequent display on the same switch when the call is transferred, covered, or forwarded.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 664 Unknown Numbers Considered Internal for AUDIX Appears when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y. This field controls the treatment of an ISDN number whose numbering plan identification is “unknown” in a QSIG centralized AUDIX arrangement.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 665 US NI Calling Name for Outgoing Calls? Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to send a name on outgoing calls over NI PRI trunks. Important: Be sure you have validated that your service provider’s central office is capable of accepting calling name information from DEFINITY in this way.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 666 Pull Transfer Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable the Pull Transfer feature on a system-wide basis.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 667 Misoperation Alerting Misoperation Alerting should not be enabled if Call Prompting is optioned. Valid entries Usage y Enter y for misoperation recall alerting on multi-appearance stations, analog stations, and attendant consoles. n Enter n for standard misoperation handling without recall alerting.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 668 Network Feedback During Tone Detection Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to provide audible feedback to the user while the system attempts to detect dial tone. Hear Zip Tone Following VOA? This tone alerts a telephone user that the announcement has completed and a caller is now connected.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 669 Station Tone Forward Disconnect Tone Forward Disconnect applies to any station other than one administered as a data endpoint, an attendant console, a BRI phone, an auto answer, or as an Outgoing Call Management (OCM) agent.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 670 Date Format on 6400/8400 Terminals The format of the date as displayed on the telephones. Valid entries Usage mm/dd/yy month/day/year dd/mm/yy day/month/year yy/mm/dd year/month/day On-hook Dialing on 6400/8400 Terminals For 6400/8400 telephone users with speakerphones. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y allows users to dial without lifting the handset.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 671 Upper Bound (msec) Specifies the upper bound of the flashhook interval. Specifies the upper bound of the station-to-switch recall signal timing interval in milliseconds. Appears when Flashhook Interval is y.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 672 Enforce PNT-to-PNT Restrictions This field appears only if Italian Protocol Enabled is y. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that restrictions and denial of PNT-to-PNT connections will be enforced when the EDCS message is unavailable. A y in this field means restrictions will be enforced.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 673 Minimum Agent-LoginID Password Length Enter the minimum number of digits that must be administered as an EAS Agent’s LoginID password. Only appears if Expert Agent Selection (EAS) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage 0–9 Entering a 0 or blank indicates no password is required.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 674 is ready. The delay commences when the first group of digits has been outpulsed. Only appears if Vectoring (Basic) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Number of seconds for the delay. Converse Signaling Tone/Pause Only appears if Vectoring (Basic) and DTMF on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen are y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 675 Interflow-qpos EWT Threshold Part of enhanced Look-Ahead Interflow. Any calls predicted to be answered before this threshold will not be interflowed (therefore saving CPU resources).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 677 For information on CentreVu® Advocate, please contact your Lucent Account Executive or see the CentreVu® Advocate User Guide (585-215-855). Valid entries Usage current-waittime Current Wait Time selects the oldest call waiting for any of the agent’s skills. predicted-wait- Predicted Wait Time is a feature of CentreVu® Advocate. time.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 678 Logout Reason Code Type Valid entries Usage none Enter none if you do not want an agent to enter a Reason Code when logging out. requested Enter requested if you want an agent to enter a Reason Code when logging out but do not want to force the agent to do so. To enter requested the Reason Codes and EAS on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen must be y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 679 BCMS/VuStats Measurement Interval You can enter half-hour or hour for polling and reporting measurement data if the BCMS (Basic) and/or the VuStats on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. Valid entries Usage half-hour There are a maximum of 25 time slots available for measurement intervals.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Feature-Related System Parameters 680 Remove Inactive BCMS/VuStats Agents If option yes is used, agents are removed from reports when they have no staff time during the previous 7 days. If option no is used, the agents remain on the report even if they have no staff time for any period of time.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Group Paging Using Speakerphone 681 Automatic Exclusion with Whisper Page Appears when Automatic Exclusion by COS field is y. Valid entries Usage y The whisper page goes through to an excluded call. n The whisper page is denied when a station attempts to whisper page to a station that is on an excluded call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Group Paging Using Speakerphone 682 add group-page next Page 1 of 1 GROUP PAGING USING SPEAKERPHONE Group Number: 1 Group Extension: 3210 Group Name: Sales staff COR: 5 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext Name Ext Name 1: 2009 B. Smith 17: 2: 2010 R. Munoz 18: 3: 2011 Y. Lu 19: 4: 2012 A. Sullivan 20: 5: 21: 6: 22: 7: 23: 8: 24: 9: 25: 10: 26: 11: 27: 12: 28: 13: 29: 14: 30: 15: 31: 16: 32: Screen 95.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 683 COR Valid entries Usage 0 to 95 Enter a class of restriction. In order to page the group, users’ class of restriction must give them calling permission for the group’s class of restriction. Valid entries Usage An extension number Assign a phone to the group by entering its extension number in this field.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 685 Housekeeper Information Configuration This indicates whether housekeeper information is being exchanged between the server and the PMS. Valid entries Usage act-nopms The message is acknowledged (MESSAGE ACK), but no action is taken. act-pms If active (act-pms), the server and PMS exchange and accept housekeeper information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 686 Client Room Coverage Path Configuration This indicates whether the server and the PMS exchange coverage path information for guest stations. Valid entries Usage act-nopms The message is acknowledged (MESSAGE ACK), but no action is taken. act-pms If active (act-pms), the server and PMS exchange and accept coverage path information. This field does not apply to normal mode.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 687 PMS Protocol Mode This indicates the message protocol mode used between the server and PMS. Coordinate this option with your PMS vendor. Valid entries Usage normal transparent ASCII mode The PMS Protocol Mode field must be transparent. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y when the ASCII-only mode is being used for the PMS message set.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hospitality 688 PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests Valid entries Usage 1 to 5 Enter the number of times that the server will allow the PMS to request acknowledgment for a message that it sent. Take Down Link for Lost Messages Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to cause the PMS link to come down if messages are being lost. Monitor your PMS error log if you use n.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 689 Dual Wakeup Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if each extension can request two wakeup calls within one 24-hour time period. Daily Wakeup Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if each extension can request daily wakeup calls. VIP Wakeup Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if each extension can request VIP wakeup calls. VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes This field appears only if VIP Wakeup is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 690 Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report This indicates the time of day that the Wakeup Activity Report will be printed on the Journal/Schedule Printer. This report summarizes the wakeup activity for each extension that had wakeup activity for the past 24 hours. Valid entries Usage hh:mm:am/pm Enter the time where hh=hour, mm=minute, am/pm=A.M. or P.M.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 691 Announcement Type This indicates the type of automatic wakeup announcement the hotel guest will receive. Allowable entries are as follows: Valid entries Usage external Applicable when using an announcement adjunct. If external is used, complete the Auxiliary Board for Announcement field. integrated Applicable when using the TN750B or TN750C announcement circuit pack.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hospitality 692 Auxiliary Board for Announcement This field appears only when the external announcement type is used. This indicates the equipment location of an auxiliary trunk circuit that connects to the external announcement equipment. Enter a 5-character circuit pack number.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hospitality 693 Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement Enter the length of time in seconds that a hotel guest will be connected to an announcement. This applies only after the guest has heard the announcement completely one time, but continues to listen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hospitality 694 Automatic Selection of DID Numbers This field assigns a 2- or 5-digit number to a guest’s phone number that is not associated with the room number. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to use the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for Guest Rooms feature. Number of Digits from PMS This indicates the number of digits being sent from the PMS to the server to identify room numbers.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hospitality 695 Digit to Insert/Delete Enter the leading digit that may be deleted and inserted back as described in the following text. The current PMS message set uses the extension number as the room identifier. In many customer configurations, the leading digit of the extension number is dropped to screen the room number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 696 The definitions for room states (Field descriptions for page 3), are for Attendant Room Status only. If you are not using Attendant Room Status, you do not need to complete these fields. Suite Check-in This field allows attendants to have the system automatically check-in several related extensions with one check-in command.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 698 change hunt-group x Page 1 of X HUNT GROUP Group Number: ___ Group Name: ____________________________ Group Extension: ____ Group Type: TN: COR: Security Code: ____ ISDN Caller Display: ________ Queue Length: ___ Calls Warning Threshold: ___ Time Warning Threshold: ___ Port: x Port: x ACD? n Queue? y Vector? y MM Early Answer? Extension: ____ Extension: ____ Screen 100.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 699 ACD Indicates whether Automatic Call distribution is used. This field cannot be set to y if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ACD field is n. Valid entries Usage y The hunt group will function as an ACD split/skill. AUDIX and MSA hunt groups can function as ACD splits/skills.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 700 Group Type There are six group types: Uniform Call Distribution (ucd-mia and ucd-loa), Direct Department Calling (DDC), and Expert Agent Distribution (ead-mia and ead-loa). Each option uses a different method to select an agent for a call when two or more agents are available.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 701 Coverage Path Enter a coverage path number. This assigns a coverage path for the hunt group. The coverage path is assigned using the Coverage Path screen. Does not appear if the Vector field is y Valid entries Usage 1 to 999 t1 to t999 Time of day table TN Enter the Tenant Partition number.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 702 Security Code Enter a 4-digit security code (password) used for the Demand Print feature. Valid entries Usage 4-digit security code ISDN Caller Disp This field is required if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 703 (Calls Warning) Port Appears if the Queue field is y. Enter the seven-character port number assigned to connect the optional external Auxiliary Queue Call Warning Threshold lamp that will flash when the number of calls in queue has exceeded the queue warning threshold (assigned in Calls Warning Threshold).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 704 Time Warning Threshold Appears if the Queue field is y and when the Calling Warning Port and the Time Warning Port fields are X. Enter the time in seconds that a call can remain in the queue before the System flashes the Queue status lamps (feature buttons assigned members phones) and the Auxiliary Queue Time Warning lamp assigned to this split/skill.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 705 Field description for page 2 Page 2 of the Hunt group screen appears only when the ACD field on page 1 is y. If the ACD field is n, page 3 becomes page 2 and all subsequent page numbers are decreased by one. The Timed ACW Interval field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen, the Timed ACW field on page 3 is y.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 706 change hunt-group x Page 2 of X HUNT GROUP Acceptable Service Level (sec): ___ Skill? AAS? _ Measured: ______ Supervisor Extension: ____ Controlling Adjunct: ____ Redirect on No Answer (rings): ___ Redirect to VDN: _____ Forced Entry of Stroke Counts or Call Work Codes? _ Screen 104.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 707 Acceptable Service Level (sec) Enter the number of seconds within which calls to this hunt group should be answered. This allows BCMS and/or VuStats to report a percentage of calls that were answered within the specified time. This entry is also used by the CentreVu® Advocate Service Objective feature. Valid entries Usage 0 through 9999 seconds AAS Appears when the ACD field is y.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 708 Measured Provides measurement data for the ACD split/skill collected (internal to the switch) for VuStats or BCMS. This measurement data is collected for VuStats and BCMS only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, they are y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 709 Supervisor Extension Valid entries Usage Enter the extension number (cannot be a VDN number) of the ACD split/skill supervisor that agents will reach when using the Assist feature Timed ACW Interval (sec) When a value is entered in this field, an agent in auto-in work mode who receives an ACD call from this hunt group is placed automatically into After Call Work (ACW) when the call drops.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 710 Inflow Threshold Appears only when the Vector field is n and the Queue field is y. Enter the number of seconds that a call can remain in the queue before no more calls will be accepted by the queue. If 0 is entered, a call is redirected to this split/skill only if there is an available agent.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 711 Multiple Call Handling Appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Multiple Call Handling field is y and the ACD field on this screen is y. This field defines whether the hunt group can have multiple call handling capabilities, and if so, what type.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 712 Forced Entry of Stroke Counts or Call Work Codes Appears only when the Controlling Adjunct field is none. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y so either a Stroke Count or Call Work Code must be entered for each call answered by an agent when in the Manual-In mode.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 713 Valid entries Usage qsig-mwi QSIG network allowing AUDIX to be located on another switch fp-mwi Public network allowing AUDIX to be located on another switch; administrable only when the ISDN Feature Plus field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y none Indicates the hunt group does not serve as a message hunt group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 714 Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX Only appears when the Message Center field is audix or rem-audix. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to send the calling party number to INTUITY AUDIX. LWC Reception Defines the destination for Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages left for the hunt group. Valid entries Usage audix If LWC is attempted, the messages are stored in AUDIX.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 715 First Announcement Extension Appears when the Queue field is y. Does not appear if the Vector field is y. Valid entries Usage Enter a recorded announcement extension number. This is the announcement the caller receives after being in the queue for the time interval specified in First Announcement Delay.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 716 Second Announcement Delay (sec) Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n. Enter the time in seconds before the call in the queue receives a second recorded announcement or that the second announcement is repeated.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 717 Message Center Enter the type of messaging adjunct for the hunt group. Only one hunt group in the System can be administered as msa, one as audix, one as qsig-mwi, one as fp-mwi, and one as rem-audix.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 718 Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX Only appears when the Message Center field is audix or rem-audix. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to send the calling party number to INTUITY AUDIX. LWC Reception Defines the destination for Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages left for the hunt group. Valid entries Usage audix If LWC is attempted, the messages are stored in AUDIX.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Hunt Group 719 Group Number This display-only field shows the number of a hunt group. Group Extension This display-only field shows the extension of the hunt group. Group Type This display-only field shows the type of the hunt group. Member Range Allowed The range of allowed members displays on all member pages. These values vary depending on the particular system and/or configuration.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Intercom Group 720 Name This display-only field shows the name assigned to the above extension number when it is administered in the System. Intercom Group This screen assigns extensions to intercom groups.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) Codes 721 Ext This field assigns an extension to the group. Valid entries Usage an extension number Enter a physical extension number. You may not enter a VDN in this field. DC This field assigns a dial code to an extension. The dial code is the code users must dial to make intercom calls to the corresponding extension.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Intra-Switch CDR 723 IXC Prefix Valid entries Usage 1 to 3 digit prefix * 101 For line 1 10 For line 2 IXC Code Format Valid entries Usage 1 to 4 digit code format * x X xxxx For line 1 xxx For line 2 Intra-Switch CDR This screen administers extensions for which Intra-Switch CDR is to be enabled. NOTE: Attendants are not allowed to be optioned for the Intra-Switch CDR feature.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 724 Capacities The Intra-Switch CDR extension capacities vary from switch to switch. See the DEFINITY ECS System Description.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 725 Overview Configuration Manager lets you configure, administer, and troubleshoot DEFINITY ECS service in an easy-to-use tabbed interface featuring standard Windows® property pages. The following table shows Configuration Manager tabs and property pages.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 727 The Telephony property page contains the following parameters: Parameter Description Telephony Board Installed These display-only fields show: Number of Boards: 1 Type of Board: IP Trunk Trunk Control Protocol: IP Trunk - T1 IP Trunk - E1 DSP Resources Installed Ports ■ Number of Boards: Identifies the number of DSP cards installed in the server.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 728 Parameter Description Maximum Digits to Be Collected Allows you to set the maximum number of digits that the IP trunk application will accept from the switch for an outgoing call. If this value is less than the number of digits actually forwarded by the PBX, the calls will not go through.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 729 Parameters Description Time Out Allows you to set the maximum time that can elapse with no stimulus from the network before call will be disconnected with reason of time-out. 1 to 600,000 Allows you to set the maximum time that can elapse after a busy tone is detected before call progress will be stopped.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager Parameter 730 Description ■ DTMF Duration: Sets the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-frequency) duration for communication with an H.323 client. Valid values: 150 to 15000 (milliseconds) ■ DTMF Silence Duration: Sets the silence duration interval between two consecutive DTMF tones for communication with an H.323 client.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 731 The Internet dialog box contains the following parameters: Parameter Lucent Gateway Protocol Description ■ Signaling Port: Displays the initial port number (5000) used for call setup. Display only. ■ Setup Time-out (ms): Allows you to set the number of milliseconds to wait before canceling a call attempt while trying to set up the Internet connection.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager Parameter Routing Info Terminating Dial Plan Routing Info Access Control Add 733 Description ■ Entry Type: Sets whether or not incoming calls are accepted. The default value is Accept. If you set this to Reject, then incoming calls are not accepted. ■ Search Digits: See the Dial/Routing Plan Worksheets.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 734 Parameter Description Remove Allows you to remove the name of an DEFINITY ECS application connected to your network. Allows you to remove originating and terminating dial/routing plan information and access control information. Edit Allows you to edit the names of remote DEFINITY ECS applications.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 735 Parameter Description Error Messages Shows you that the logging of error or warning messages into the Windows NT Event Viewer is on. Display-only. When this option is on, you can use the Windows NT Event Viewer to view the reported errors and warnings. (In this release, the Log Properties option is not available for this log.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager 736 The Quality of Service dialog box contains the following parameters: Parameter Description Line Pool ID Allows you to specify an integer between 1 and 999 that identifies a logical group (pool) of lines. The lines consist of trunk groups that emulate T1 (robbed-bit) or E1 (common-channel) channels.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference IP Trunk Configuration Manager Parameter QoS Parameters 737 Description ■ Sampling Interval (sec): Allows you to specify how often the quality of service to the highlighted line pool’s remote IP address will be checked. Valid values: 1 to 300 (seconds).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 738 Related topics Refer to DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for administration procedures. Refer to ‘‘IP trunk service’’ on page 1383 for detailed information on this feature. ISDN trunk group This screen assigns an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk group that supports the ISDN and Call-by-Call Service Selection service selection features.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 739 ISDN-PRI interfaces are supported by the TN767 circuit pack (for assignment of a T1 signaling link and up to 24 ISDN-PRI trunk group members), or the TN464C or later circuit pack (for assignment of a T1 or E1 signaling link and up to 24 or 31 ISDN-PRI trunk group members, respectively). The TN2464 and TN2207 circuit pack can also be used with ISDN-PRI.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 740 How to administer ISDN trunk groups The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN765 Processor Interface (PI) for R7si and later configurations.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 741 The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN778 Packet Control (PACCON) for an R7si and later configurations.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 742 The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN778 Packet Control (PACCON) for R7r and later configurations.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 743 ■ ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack — This screen is required if using ISDN-BRI trunk interfaces. Assign all fields as required. ■ DS1 Circuit Pack — This screen is required if using ISDN-PRI interfaces. — DS1 (T1) Circuit Pack Assign all fields as required.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 744 ■ Processor Interface Data Module — Use this screen only for a TN765. Assign up to 8 interface links using 8 Processor Interface Data Module screens for multi-carrier cabinet systems, and up to 4 links for single-carrier cabinet systems. One Processor Interface Data Module screen must be completed for each interface link to be assigned.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 745 Design Considerations ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI interfaces cannot be mixed in the same trunk group. Therefore, consider the following: ■ The earliest trunk member (the lowest numbered one) administered is considered correct.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 746 Calling Number – Delete Valid entries Usage 1 to 15 Enter the number of digits, if any, to delete from the calling party number for all incoming calls on this trunk group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 748 Valid entries Usage none Enter none if you do not want the system to collect Advice of Charge information for this trunk group. automatic Enter automatic only if your public network sends Advice of Charge information automatically. end-onrequest Enter end-on-request if DEFINITY ECS must request charge information with each call, and you want to receive only the final call charge.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 749 Digit Handling (in/out) This field defines whether overlap receiving and overlap sending features are enabled. Set the field to overlap when you want overlap receiving or overlap sending. Set to enbloc when you do not want these features enabled. The first field value indicates digit receiving and the second value indicates digit sending.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 750 The following table indicates the expected ISDN-PRI message size from several Lucent Technologies products.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 751 Valid entries Usage access A tie trunk giving access to an Electronic Tandem Network. accunet ACCUNET Switched Digital Service — part of ACI (AT&T Communications ISDN) phase 2. cbc Call-by-Call service — provides different dial plans for different services on an ISDN trunk group. Indicates this trunk group is used by the Call-By-Call Service Selection feature.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 752 Valid entries Usage sdn Software Defined Network (SDN) — an AT&T communications offering that provides a virtual private network using the public switched network. SDN can carry voice and data between customer locations as well as off-net locations. sub-operator Presubscribed Common Carrier Operator — provides access to the presubscribed common carrier operator.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 753 Test Call BCC Indicates the Bearer Capability Code (BCC) used for the ISDN test call. Valid entries Usage 0 Voice 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 Asynchronous 3 Mode 3 Circuit 4 Mode 0 Testcall ITC Controls the encoding of the Information Transfer Capability (ITC) codepoint of the bearer capability IE in the SETUP message when generating an ISDN test call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 754 NOTE: The cyclical option cannot be set if the trunk group using ISDN-PRI interfaces is to be used for Wideband operations (the Wideband Support field set to y). The search can be administered per ISDN-PRI trunk group, but it infers the direction of search within all ISDN-PRI facilities (or portions of those facilities) administered within the trunk group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 756 DCS Signaling Specifies the means used to send the DCS message. This field only appears if the Used for DCS field entry is y and the Service Type field is anything except dmi-mos or sddn. Valid entries are bx.25 for the traditional DCS feature or d-chan for the DCS over ISDN-PRI D-channel feature. DCS over D-channel is not supported on trunk groups containing ISDN-BRI interfaces.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 757 NCA-TSC Trunk Member Identifies the trunk member whose D-channel will be used to route tandem NCA-TSCs or QSIG CISCs. Value range for this field is from 1 to the maximum number of members per trunk group supported on the switch. Numbering Format This field appears if the Send Calling Number field is y or r or the Send Connected Number field is y or r.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 758 Path Replacement Method Appears when either the ISDN-PRI trunk or the ISDN-BRI trunk fields and the Basic Call Setup and Supplementary Services with Rerouting fields are set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen and when the Supplementary Service Protocol is either b or e and the Group Type field is isdn on the ISDN trunk group screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 759 Send Calling Number Specifies whether the calling party’s number is sent on outgoing or tandemed ISDN calls. Valid entries are y, n, or r (restricted). If y is entered, the ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown Format screen is accessed to construct the actual number to be sent, or the ISDN Numbering-Private screen (based on the Numbering Format field) is used.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 760 (for called/busy only) or d for the QSIG Global Networking Supplementary Services Protocol. When the Supplementary Service Protocol field is e (DCS with Rerouting), only values of y and n are permitted. NOTE: If name information is not administered for the calling station or the connected/called/busy station, the system sends the extension number in place of the name.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 761 Switching field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. If set to y, the Wideband Support Options page appears. All trunk members must be from TN464C (or later) circuit packs. NOTE: Wideband trunk calls are treated as a single trunk call when Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) measurements are taken.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 762 Universal Call ID Unique tag to identify each call. Valid entries are 1 to 6 and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded. In-VDN TIme Number of seconds the call has spent in vector processing. Valid entries are 1 to 6 and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded. VDN Name Name of the active VDN (also called LAI DNIS).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 764 Each row in the table consists of seven columns. The first three columns (Service/Feature, Called Len, and Called Number) constitute a key that together select which row or unique treatment should apply for an incoming call on the group. The remaining four columns (Del, Insert, and so on) specify the treatment to be provided for a call that matches the key.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 765 Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table entries with a predefined service/feature always appear before entries with a user-defined service/feature. To control the order in which certain entries appear, you must use user-defined services/features for those entries. For example, you can redefine the predefined mega800 service/feature as an identical user-defined entry with the name m800.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 766 Del Specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the incoming Called Party Number. Calls of a particular type may be administered to be routed to a single destination by deleting all incoming digits and then administering the Insert field with the desired extension. Valid entries are 1 to 21, all, or leave blank.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 768 Max# Chan Indicates the maximum number of members of a ISDN trunk group with a Service Type field of cbc that a particular Service/Feature can use at any given time. This field must be completed if a Service/Feature has been entered in the Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table screen. Valid values are 0 to 99 or blank.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 769 Scheduled Indicates whether or not the allocation plans will be in effect according to the schedule found on this page. If y is entered in this field then there must be at least one entry in the schedule. Act Time Indicates the time the usage allocation plan administered in the next field (Plan #) will become effective. Enter the time in military time.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN trunk group 770 H0 Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 384-kbps of data, which is comprised of six B-channels. When a trunk group is administered to support H0, the trunk/hunt algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 384-kbps of bandwidth uses a fixed allocation scheme.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN Numbering — Private 772 group. If a DS1 circuit pack appears in more than one signaling group, then the Sig Grp field cannot be left blank. One of the signaling group members must be entered. Valid values are 1–0 or 1–166 depending on the amount of system memory. Related topics Refer to ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1394 for detailed information about Integrated Services Digital Network trunks.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN Numbering — Private 773 Network Level Enter the value of the highest regional level employed by the PNP network. Use the following table to find the relationship between the network level and the Numbering Plan Identification/Type of Number (NPI/TON) encoding used in the QSIG PartyNumber or the Calling Number and Connected Number IEs.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN Numbering — Private 774 Level 2 Code Enter the switch’s second level regional code in the network. Administer this field carefully. The system will not check to ensure you have entered a code that supports your entry in the Network Level field. You cannot enter anything in this field unless the Network Level field is set to 2. Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter up to 5 digits.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown 775 ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown This screen supports the ISDN Call Identification Display feature. The feature provides a name/number display for display-equipped stations within an ISDN network. The system uses the caller’s name and number and displays it on the called party’s display.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown 776 Ext Len Specifies the number of digits the extension can have. Valid entries Usage 0 to 5 Corresponds to the extension lengths allowed by the dial plan. Ext Code Allows for groups of extensions to be administered. NOTE: When 0 alone is entered, the Ext Len field must be 1 and the DDD number must be 10-digits.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 777 CPN Prefix Use this field to specify the number that is added to the beginning of the extension to form a Calling or Connected Number. Valid entries Usage 1 to 15 digits Only digits are allowed in the CPN Prefix column. Leading spaces, or spaces in between the digits, are not allowed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 778 change bri-trunk-board Page 1 of 1 ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01A09 Interface Companding: a-law_ T3 Timer Length (sec): 15_ Port 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7. 8: Interface user_______ network____ user_______ peer-slave_ peer-master ___________ ___________ ___________ Side b a Name: ______________ DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 779 T3 Timer Length (sec) Valid entries Usage 1 to 127 Tells the TE side how long to wait, in seconds, for an inactive Layer 1 to become active. Port This is a display-only field. It shows the port number to which parameters administered on the row apply.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 780 TEI Valid entries Usage auto 0 Time Fill The bit pattern sent on the D-channel between valid LAPD packets.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 781 Field descriptions for page 1 change bri-trunk-board Page 1 of 1 ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK Location: 01A09 Interface Companding: a-law_ Port 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 782 Side Valid entries Usage a Determines how glare conditions are handled when Interface field is peer-slave. This field is not administrable when the Interface field is network. b Cntry/Peer Protocol Tells call processing software which ISDN protocol standard is applied.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 783 change bri-trunk-board Page 2 of 2 ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK Port 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 784 NOTE: If the Interface field on page 1 contains a valid value when the screen is submitted, the contents of the fields on page 2 for that port are validated. If the Interface field is blank when the screen is submitted, the fields on this page for that port reset to their default values. Port This is a display-only field.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack 785 SPID A 12-digit field containing the SPID expected by the far end. DEFINITY ECS blocks you from changing this field unless the port is busied out or unadministered. The only protocol supported for SPID initialization is Bellcore (Country Code 1). Trunks will not be put in service if SPID installation is not successful.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 786 Trunk Member Administration Administer BRI trunk members using the following scheme to address the individual B-channels: ■ B-channel 1 uses the port address of the BRI Trunk Port. ■ B-channel 2 uses the port address of B-channel 1 incremented by 16.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 787 NOTE: If "user-defined" is entered for the display language on the station screen or attendant screen, and no messages are defined on these screens, a string of asterisks appears on all display messages. In this section, the field descriptions are listed before the screens English This is a display-only field. It contains the English version of the message on the display.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations change display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 1. English: AUTO WAKEUP - Ext: Translation: ********************: 2. English: WAKEUP ENTRY DENIED Translation: ************************ 3. English: WAKEUP REQUEST CANCELED Translation: **************************************** 4.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 789 change display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 12. English: INTERVAL FULL Translation: ************* 13. English: NO PERMISSION Translation: ************* 14. English: SYSTEM FULL Translation: ************* 15. English: TOO SOON Translation: ************* 16. English: INVALID EXTENSION - TRY AGAIN Translation: **************************************** 17.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 790 change display-messages call identifiers LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Term 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 791 change display-messages call identifiers LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Language Translations change display-messages leave-word-calling LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 1. English: MESSAGES FOR Translation: ************************ 2. English: WHOSE MESSAGES? (DIAL EXTENSION NUMBER) Translation: **************************************** 3. English: END OF MESSAGES (NEXT TO REPEAT) Translation: **************************************** 4.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 793 change display-messages mailcious-call-trace LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 1. English: MALICIOUS CALL TRACE REQUEST Translation: **************************************** 2. English: END OF TRACE INFORMATION Translation: **************************************** 3. English: original call redirected from: Translation: *****************************: 4.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 794 change display-messages miscellaneous features LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 795 change display-messages miscellaneous features Page 3 of 6 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 30. English: You have adjunct messages Translation: **************************************** 31. English: Login Violation Translation: **************************************** 32. English: Barrier Code Violation Translation: **************************************** 33.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Language Translations change display-messages miscellaneous features LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 42. English: Add Skill: Enter number, then # sign Translation: **************************************** 43. English: Remove Skill: Enter number, then # sign Translation: **************************************** 44. English: Enter Skill Level, then # sign Translation: **************************************** 45.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations change display-messages property management LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 1. English: CHECK IN - Ext: Translation: *********************************: 2. English: CHECK IN: ROOM ALREADY OCCUPIED Translation: **************************************** 3. English: CHECK IN COMPLETE Translation: **************************************** 4.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations change display-messages property management LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS 11. English: CHECK OUT COMPLETE: MESSAGE LAMP OFF Translation: **************************************** 12. English: CHECK OUT COMPLETE: MESSAGE LAMP ON Translation: **************************************** 13. English: MESSAGE LAMP ON Translation: **************************************** 14.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Language Translations 799 change display-messages softkey-labels Page 1 of 1 LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS English Translation English Translation English Translation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Listed Directory Numbers 800 change display-messages transfer Page 1 of 1 Language Translations 1. English: Transfer completed. Translation: ******************************** Screen 154. Language Translations — Transfer change display-messages vustats LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS Page 1 of English Translations 1. 2. 3. FORMAT NOT DEFINED DOES NOT ALLOW OR REQUIRE ID 1. 2. 3. ******* ******* ******* 4.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Listed Directory Numbers 801 change listed-directory-number LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS Page 1 of 2 Night Destination: Ext Name TN 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Screen 156. Listed Directory Numbers Night Destination Enter the valid assigned extension number that will receive calls to these numbers when Night Service is active.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Locations 802 Locations Use the Locations screen to provide daylight savings time displays to users, to set the area code for each location, and to administer different location information for multiple switches. You can administer up to 44 location specifications depending on the configuration of your switch if the Multiple Locations field is y on the System Parameters Customer Options screen.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Locations 803 Name Valid entries Usage up to 15 alphanumeric characters Identifies the switch associated with each location number. Timezone Offest Timezone offset is actually 3 fields (+/-, hour, and minute) that specify how much time each location differs from the system time. This field must be completed for each administered location. Use +00:00 for the timezone offset for a single location switch.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Login Administration 804 Number Plan Area Code Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the 3-digit numbering plan area code for each location. Login Administration When your DEFINITY ECS is delivered, one customer super-user login and password combination is already defined. You must administer additional logins and passwords, if needed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Login Administration 805 Password of Login Making Change You can make changes to any login with permissions less than your own. You must enter your password to save any changes you make to this screen. Valid entries Usage User password Enter your password. Login’s Name This display-only field shows the login name specified with the add command.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Login Administration 806 Access to INADS Port This field only appears when the Customer Access to INADS Port field is set to y on the Maintenance-Related System-Parameters screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow a user to access the remote administration port. Login’s Password Passwords must be 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1 alphabetic and 1 numeric character.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Login Administration 807 Facility Test Call Notification — Acknowledgment Required Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to require the user to acknowledge they want to logoff while Facility Test Notification is still administered. Remote Access Notification For security, this field should be set to y for all logins.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Login Administration 809 Valid entries Usage 20-digit octal string using 0-7 as possible digits Enter the 20-digit octal value used by both the lock and the key to verify user authenticity. The last digit must be 0 and the second to last digit must be either 0, 2, 4, or 6. Expiration Date Expiration of the login ID occurs at 23:59:59 of the entered date.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Loudspeaker Paging 810 Restrict From Time and Restrict to Time These two fields are separated by colons, for example, hh:mm where hh = hour and mm = minute. Periods that span an interval that crosses a day boundary are specified by setting the Restrict From Time field greater than the Restrict To Time field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Loudspeaker Paging 811 CDR This field determines whether CDR data is collected for the paging ports. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if you want the switch to collect CDR data on the paging ports. Voice Paging Timeout (sec) This field limits the duration of voice pages. When this interval ends, calls are disconnected.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Loudspeaker Paging 812 Voice Paging — TAC This field assigns a Trunk Access Code (TAC) to a paging zone. Users dial this code to make a page to a specific zone. One TAC must be assigned to each zone you want to use. Two zones cannot have the same TAC. If you enter a TAC in the ALL field, users may activate speakers in all the zones by dialing that code.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Mode Code Related System Parameters 813 Code Calling — COR This field assigns a Class of Restriction to a paging zone. Valid entries Usage 0 through 95. You can assign different classes of restriction to different zones. blank Leave this field blank for unused paging zones.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Mode Code Related System Parameters 815 External Coverage This value defines a mode code that the switch sends when an external caller tries to reach a user at another extension and the call goes to the user’s voice mail coverage.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Mode Code Related System Parameters 816 OFF Valid entries Usage Between 75 and 200 Define in milliseconds the pause between mode code in multiples of 25 digits as they are sent to the VMS. This field cannot be blank.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Modem Pool Group 817 Modem Pool Group There are two types of conversion resources for Modem Pooling. The first type, an integrated conversion resource, is a circuit pack that emulates a Trunk Data Module connected to a 212A-type modem. Two conversion resources are on each circuit pack. The second type, a combined conversion resource, is a separate Trunk Data Module and modem administered as a unit.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Modem Pool Group 819 Modem Name Indicates the name of the modem pool. This field appears only when the Group Type field is combined. Valid entries Usage 1- to 6-alphanumeric character string Hold Time (min) Enter the maximum number of minutes that a conversion resource in the group may be held while a call waits in a queue or reserved after Data Call Preindication.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Modem Pool Group 820 CF-CB Common This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that the CF and CB leads on the conversion resource are logically connected. Direction Enter the direction of the call for which modem pool will operate. This field appears only when the Group Type field is combined.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Modem Pool Group 821 Speed Enter the communication speed in bits per second of the conversion resources in the group. Enter one to three speeds separated by slashes (for example, 300/1200/2400) to indicate a maximum of three running speeds. Valid entries Usage LOW 0 to 300 blind sampled 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Duplex Indicates the duplex mode of the conversion resources in the group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Modem Pool Group 822 Circuit Pack Location Enter the port associated with the conversion resource on the integrated modem pool circuit pack.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 823 Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters This screen sets the system parameters associated with multifrequency signaling. Screen 164 on page 823 appears when Incoming Call Type is group-ii-mfc and Outgoing Call Type is none. Screen 165 on page 831 appears when both Incoming Call Type and Outgoing Call Type are group-ii-mfc.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 824 Incoming Call Type This field defines the signal type that a CO uses to place an incoming call to the PBX. Valid entries Usage group-ii-mfc If the value of this field is group-ii-mfc, the second page of the screen will display entries for all group-I, group-II, group-A, and group-B signal types with a set of default values (see page 2 of screen).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 825 ANI for PBX This field appears only when Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc or mfe. Valid entries Usage 2 to 15 Enter the PBX identification number that is sent to the CO when ANI is requested (by the CO) on a particular call but is not available, such as on tandem tie trunk calls. blank Use for tandeming.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 826 Test Call Extension Valid entries Usage An unassigned extension Specifies the destination of a call between the CO and the PBX that tests R2-MFC signaling. 1 A test call extension is the destination.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 827 Outgoing Forward Signal Present Timer (sec) This field appears only when the value of Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc. Valid entries Usage 1 to 255 Enter the maximum number of seconds to elapse between signals on a call. This timer runs when MFC tones are being sent or received on an outgoing call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 828 Private Group II Permissions and Public Interworking Valid entries Usage y/n If y, DEFINITY ECS: — Sends the category for MFC ANI for the COR of the originating party for non-private-MFC-trunk to MFC-private-trunk calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 829 Forward Cycle Timer (sec) This field appears only if Incoming Call Type is mfe and Outgoing Call Type is mfe or none. Valid entries Usage 1 to 255 Enter the number of seconds to wait to receive the check frequency after sending an MFE signal. The switch drops the call if the time runs out before it receives check frequency.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 830 Note: For India, the ANI can be requested without the call category information. Valid entries Usage user-type The type of phone making the call determines the type of group II signal that the PBX sends (normal = ordinary phone set, attendant = attendant console, data-call = data modules and similar data endpoints).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 832 Number of Incoming ANI Digits Valid entries Usage 0 to 15 Enter the number of ANI digits for incoming MFC calls. Number of Outgoing ANI Digits This field applies to Russian shuttle trunks, and MFC and MFE trunks. Valid entries Usage 0 to 15 Enter the number of ANI digits for outgoing MFC calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 833 Address Digits Include End-of-Digits Signal Indicates that an outgoing forward Group I end-of-digit signal is always sent after completion of address digits upon request from the Central Office for outgoing calls.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 834 ANI Not Available You must enter a value if the ANI for PBX field is blank Valid entries Usage 1 to 15 Enter the number of the incoming and outgoing ANI-Not-Available signals. Your switch outpulses the End-of-Dial backward signal when the ANI-Not-Available forward signal is received on incoming calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 835 Tones from CO on Incoming Forward Calls — Group I Message codes 11 to 15 display. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits of the destination telephone number.) Assign a meaning to each code. Refer to ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 839 for signal type.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 836 Tones from CO on Incoming Forward Calls — Group I Message codes 11 to 15 display. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits of the destination telephone number.) Assign a meaning to each code. Valid entries Usage Refer to ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 839 for signal type.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters Valid entries Usage attendant Refer to ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 839 for signal type. 838 data-call toll-auto normal Tones from CO on Outgoing Backward Calls — Group A Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 839 Tones from CO on Outgoing Backward Calls — Group B Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code. Refer to ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 839 for signal type.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 840 end-of-dial This signal is used when open numbering is used on DID calls. The CO sends this signal to indicate the end-of-dial digits and the switch responds with a request for a group II signal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 841 busy-rt-attd If the switch receives this signal on DID calls, the call terminates at an attendant if the called extension is busy or at the called extension if it is not busy. This signal is used on DID calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 842 toll-operator This signal, used in China, is treated as a normal subscriber signal. See the normal definition. Group A signals Group A signals are backward signals generated by the destination switch. send-ani The CO sends this signal to request calling-party category and sends additional signals to request ANI digits.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 843 last-2-digits The switch sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last 3 digits can be resent. This signal is used on DOD calls. last-3-digits The switch sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last 4 digits can be resent. This signal is used on DOD calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters 844 free This signal indicates that the called party is idle. On DID calls, the signal is sent to the CO to indicate that the called party is idle and the call is terminated successfully. If the switch receives this signal on DOD calls, it connects the trunk to the calling party.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Music Sources 845 Music Sources This screen defines music sources for Tenant Partitions. Each music source defined on the screen can be used by one or more Tenant Partitions. However, a partition may have only one music source.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Packet Gateway Board 846 Type If you entered a value in Music/Tone on Hold on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, that value will appear in this field. Valid entries Usage music Enter the type of treatment to be provided by the music source. tone Only one music source may use this value. none Port Enter the auxiliary trunk or analog port address of the music source.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Packet Gateway Board 847 NOTE: The PGATE screen is used with G3r configurations. Field descriptions for page 1 change pgate xxxxx PACKET GATEWAY BOARD Page 1 of 1 Board Location: _____ Name: _______________ Application: X.25 External cable type: rs232 Port configuration: 1) rs232 2)rs232 3)rs232 4)rs232 Screen 169. Packet Gateway Board Board Location Enter the slot location of the PGATE circuit pack.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Partition Route Table 848 Partition Route Table Use this table to identify routing for partition groups associated with an ARS analysis entry.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Personal CO Line Group 850 Digital Loss Group This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to this trunk group if the call is carried over a digital signaling port in the trunk group. Valid entries Usage 1 to 17 Shows the values from the loss plan and tone plan.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Personal CO Line Group 851 Field descriptions for page 2 add personal-CO-line Page 1 of x PERSONAL CO LINE GROUP ASSIGNED MEMBERS (Stations with a button for this PCOL Group) Ext Name 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Ext Name 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Screen 172. Personal CO Line Group Ext This display-only field shows the extension of phones that have a CO Line button.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Pickup Group 852 Pickup Group This screen implements call pickup groups with up to 50 extensions per group. A pickup group is a group of users authorized to answer calls to a phone extension within that group of users. A phone extension number can only belong to one pickup group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference PRI Endpoint 853 Extended Group Number This field appears only when the Group Call Pickup field is set to flexible on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. The extended group is a collection of pickup groups that can answer calls from other pickup groups in the same extended group. Valid entries Usage 1-100 (G3si and G3csi) Enter the extended group number or blank.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference PRI Endpoint 854 add pri-endpoint next Page 1 of 1 PRI ENDPOINT Extension: Name: (Starting) Port: Originating Auto Restoration? COR: TN: Maintenance Tests? 300 27 character PRI Endpoint 1 Width: 1 n Signaling Group: 1 COS: 1 1 Simultaneous Calls? n y WIDEBAND SUPPORT OPTIONS H0? H11? H12? NXDS0? n n n y Contiguous? n Screen 174.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference PRI Endpoint 855 Valid entries Usage A through E Third character is the carrier 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number 01 through 31 (DS1 Interface Sixth and seventh characters are the circuit ports) number Width Enter the number of adjacent DS0 ports beginning with the specified Starting Port, that make up the PRI Endpoint.This field cannot be blank.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference PRI Endpoint 856 TN Valid entries Usage 1–20 Enter the Tenant Partition number. Simultaneous Calls Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to specify that multiple simultaneous calls can be placed to/from the PRI Endpoint. Maintenance Tests Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to run hourly maintenance tests on this PRI Endpoint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Remote Access 857 H12 Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 1920 Kbps data, which includes 30 B-channels. When a PE is administered to support H12, the hunt algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 1920 Kbps of bandwidth uses a fixed allocation scheme. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to specify the NXDS0 multi-rate service.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Remote Access 858 ! SECURITY ALERT: Lucent Technologies designed the Remote Access feature incorporated in this product that, when properly administered by the customer, enables the customer to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Remote Access 859 ! CAUTION: Your attempt to disable the Remote Access feature will be lost if the switch is rebooted without saving translations. Therefore, execute a “save translation” command after permanently disabling the Remote Access feature.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Remote Access 860 status remote-access REMOTE ACCESS STATUS Remote Access Status: enabled Date/Time Modified: 01/30/95 17:00 Barrier Code 1:2374745 2:3374837 3:3285038 4:5738557 5:7764884 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Date Modified 01/30/95 01/30/95 01/30/95 01/30/95 01/30/95 / / / / / / / / / / Expiration Date 03/31/95 / / 01/31/96 07/31/95 05/20/95 / / / / / / / / / / No.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Remote Access 861 Authorization Code Required When you use an authorization code in conjunction with a barrier codes it increases the security of the Remote Access feature. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to require an authorization code be dialed by Remote Access users to access the system’s Remote Access facilities. Remote Access Dial Tone Set this field to n for maximum security.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Remote Access 862 TN Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 (G3si) Enter the appropriate Tenant Partition number. 1 to 100 (G3r) COS Assign the most restrictive class of service (COS), that provides only the level of service required to provide the maximum security. Valid entries Usage 0 to 15 Enter the COS number, associated with the barrier code, that defines access permissions for Call Processing features.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Remote Call Coverage Table 863 Permanently Disable Reactivation of remote access to the interface requires Lucent Services intervention. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to permanently block remote access to the administration interface.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 865 RHNPA TABLE Valid entries Usage 1 to 32 Enter the table number. You can use up to 8 screens for each table, one screen for each 100 numbers. CODE Enter the desired 100-block, for example 000 through 099 or 900 through 999. A separate screen is required for each 100-block. Pattern Choices Valid entries Usage Enter the route pattern number you want associated with each code.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 866 change route-pattern 1 Page 1 of X Pattern Number: 1_ 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Grp. No. ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ FRL NPA Pfx Hop Mrk Lmt _ ___ _ __ _ ___ _ __ _ ___ _ __ _ ___ _ __ _ ___ _ __ _ ___ _ __ Toll No.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 867 NPA This entry is not required for AAR. Valid entries Usage 3-digit number Enter the 3-digit Numbering Plan Area (NPA) (or area code) for the terminating endpoint of the trunk group. Call your local telephone company to verify this number if you need help.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 868 Valid entries Usage 3 ■ Send a 1 on all long-distance calls and keep or insert the NPA (area code) so that all long distance calls are 10-digit calls. The NPA is inserted when a user dials a Prefix digit 1 plus 7-digits. Prefix Mark 3 refers to a Toll Table to define long distance codes. 4 ■ Always suppress a user-dialed Prefix digit 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 869 No. Del. Digits Use this field to modify the dialed number so an AAR or ARS call routes over different trunk groups that terminate in switches with different dial plans Valid entries Usage 0 to 28 Enter the total number of digits you want the system to delete before it sends the number out on the trunk.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 870 IXC Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) identifies the carrier, such as AT&T, used for calls that route via an IXC, and for Call Detail Recording (CDR). This field appears when the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Valid entries Usage Valid carrier code Identifies the carrier for IXC calls user For presubscribed carrier.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 871 TSC Set TSC to y for feature transparency on DCS+ calls and to use QSIG Call Completion. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow Call-Associated TSCs, and to allow incoming Non-Call-Associated TSC requests to be tandemed out for each preference. CA-TSC Request Use CA-TSC on ISDN B-channel connections. Valid entries Usage as-needed The CA-TSC is set up only when needed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 872 BCIE (Bearer Capability Information Element) Use BCIE to determine how to create the ITC codepoint in the setup message. This field applies to ISDN trunks and appears if ITC is both. Valid entries Usage ept (endpoint) unr (unrestricted) Service/Feature Enter up to 15 characters to identify the Service/Feature carried by the information element (IE) in a call in this route pattern.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Route Pattern 873 subaddress information element (IE). At the receiving end, the call terminates to the user indicated by the subaddress number instead of the attendant. Administrable when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen, the ISDN Feature Plus field is y. Valid entries Usage 1-5 Enter the number of dialed digits to send in the calling party subaddress IE.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Second Digit Table 874 LAR Enter the routing-preference for Look Ahead Routing. Valid entries Usage next Go to the next routing preference and attempt the call again. rehu Rehunt within the current routing-preference for another trunk to attempt the call again. none Look Ahead Routing is not enabled for the preference.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Security-Related System Parameters 875 Identification Valid entries Usage attd extension tac Enter an abbreviation to identify the dialed number when a second digit is dialed. See the first digit table information, in ‘‘Dial Plan Record’’ on page 593, for an explanation of these entries.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Security-Related System Parameters 877 Referral Destination The referral destination receives the referral call when a security violation occurs. The referral destination telephone must have a display, unless the you assign an Announcement Extension.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Security-Related System Parameters 878 Announcement Extension If you enter a value in this field, the switch calls the referral destination, then plays this announcement upon answer. Valid entries Usage Valid extension The announcement extension where SVN violation announcement resides.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Security-Related System Parameters 880 Access Security Gateway Parameters These eight fields appear only if the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Security-Related System Parameters 881 The following fields display only for the G3si and G3csi versions: MGR1 The direct connect system administration and maintenance access interface located on the processor circuit pack. For more information on the circuit pack, refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description. Valid entries Usage y/n Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge response.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Site Data 882 card. Following expiration of this interval, the ability to execute system administration commands that modify translation data is denied for all logins, except for init. Valid entries Usage 1-90 Enter a number to indicate the number of days the system allows access to system administration commands.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Station 884 add station 1014 Page 3 of X STATION SITE DATA Room: Jack: Cable: Floor: Building: _______ ___ ___ _______ _______ ABBREVIATED DIALING List1: ________ Headset? Speaker? Mounting: Cord Length: Set Color: List2: _________ BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS 1: call-appr 2: call-appr 3: call-appr 4: ________ 5: 6: 7: 8: n n d 0_ _____ List3: _________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Screen 186.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 885 Active Station Ringing Defines how call rings to the phone when it is off-hook. This field does not affect how calls ring at this phone when the phone is on-hook. Valid entries Usage continuous Enter continuous to cause all calls to this phone to ring continuously. single Enter single to cause calls to this phone to receive one ring cycle and then ring silently.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 886 Att. Call Waiting Indication Attendant call waiting allows attendant-originated or attendant-extended calls to a busy single-line phone to wait and sends distinctive call-waiting tone to the single-line user. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to assign Attendant Call Waiting to the phone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 887 Valid entries Usage all Enter all to allow all calls (ACD and non-ACD) terminated to an idle station to be cut through immediately. acd Enter acd to allow only ACD split /skill calls and direct agent calls to auto answer. If this field is acd, Non-ACD calls terminated to a station ring audibly.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 888 Button Assignments Enter the abbreviated software name to assign a feature button. For a list of feature buttons, refer to ‘‘Telephone feature buttons’’ on page 58. NOTE: If you want to use Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI), you must assign a call appearance (call-appr) to the first button position. TTI needs the button on the first call appearance to get dial tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 889 CDR Privacy This option allows digits in the called number field of an outgoing call record to be blanked, on a per-station basis. You administer the number of blocked digits system-wide in the Privacy - Digits to Hide field on the CDR System Parameters screen. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to enable Call Privacy for each station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 890 Coverage After Forwarding This field governs whether an unanswered forwarded call is provided coverage treatment. Valid entries Usage y Coverage treatment is provided after forwarding regardless of the value of the Coverage After Forwarding field on the System Parameters - Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 891 CRV Length Only for ASAI stations. Enter 1 or 2 to indicate the length of CRV for each interface. Data Extension Enter the extension assigned to the data module. Data Module Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to indicate that you want to administer a data module with this phone. Entering y displays the Data Module screen.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Station 892 Display Cartridge For 7404 D phones only. Enter y to indicate there is a display cartridge associated with the station. This displays an additional page to allow you to assign display buttons for the display cartridge. Display Client Redirection Only administrable if Hospitality is enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 893 Distinctive Audible Alert Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y so the phone can receive the 3 different types of ringing patterns which identify the type of incoming calls. Distinctive ringing may not work properly for off-premises telephones. Endpt ID Appears only if Endpt Init is y. Enter a unique 2-digit number (00–62) for this endpoint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 894 Event Minimization Allows you to minimize events sent on a link. This field appears only if you set Type to asai. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y when an application or library does not want to receive identical event reports over different associations. When minimization is enabled, the switch sends a single event report on only one association and discards any remaining reports.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 895 Floor Enter a valid floor location. See ‘‘Translation-ID Number Mismatch Interval (days)’’ on page 881 for valid entries. H.320 Conversion Allows H.320 compliant calls made to this phone to be converted to voice-only. Because the system can only handle a limited number of conversion calls, you may need to limit the number of telephones with H.320 conversion.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 896 Hunt-to Station Enter the extension the system should hunt to for this phone when the phone is busy. This field allows you to create a station hunting chain (by assigning a hunt-to station to a series of phones). Idle Appearance Preference Indicate which call appearance is selected when the user lifts the handset and there is an incoming call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 897 ITC (Information Transfer Capability) Indicates the type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originated from this endpoint. The field does not display for voice-only or BRI stations. Valid entries Usage restricted If you set to restricted, either restricted or unrestricted transmission facilities are used to complete the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 898 LWC Log External Calls Appears only where the LWC Reception field is available. When an external call is not answered, the switch keeps a record of up to 15 calls (provided information on the caller identification is available) and the phone’s message lamp lights. The phone set displays the names and numbers of unsuccessful callers.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 899 Message Lamp Ext Enter the extension of the station you want to track with the message waiting lamp. This field appears only when Type is 7101A, 7103A, 8110, or VRU. Message Server Name Specifies which Message Server is associated with the station. Valid entries Usage Names Must contain a user-defined adjunct name that was previously administered in administered in the Node-Names screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 900 Multimedia Early Answer Allows you to establish multimedia early answer on a station-by-station basis. Valid entries Usage y/n If this station will receive coverage calls for multimedia complexes, but is not multimedia-capable, enter y to ensure that calls are converted and talk path is established before ringing at this station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 901 PCOL/TEG Call Alerting Appears only for 510 telephones. Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to alert the station for Personal CO Line/Terminating Extension Group calls.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Station 902 Valid entries Usage 6 HLL 7 HLH 8 LHL Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number Valid entries Usage y All outgoing calls from the station will deliver the Calling Party Number (CPN) information as “Presentation Allowed.” n No CPN information is sent for the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 903 — One of the users on the port has B-channel voice and B-channel data capability. — One of the users on the port has no SPID assigned, which includes telephones that have no SPID initialization capability. — This field is display-only for H.323 set types. The system assigns an "X" when the station is first administered.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 904 Restrict Last Appearance Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to restrict the last idle call appearance for incoming priority calls and outgoing call originations only. Valid entries Usage Up to 10 characters To identify the phone location.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 905 Service Link Mode The service link is the combined hardware and software multimedia connection between an Enhanced mode complex’s H.320 DVC system and the DEFINITY ECS which terminates the H.320 protocol. When the user receives or makes a call during a multimedia or IP Softphone session, a “service link” is established.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 906 Speakerphone This field controls the behavior of speakerphones for the 6400-series and 8400-series phones. Valid entries Usage 1-way Enter 1-way to indicate that you want the speakerphone to be listen-only. 2-way Enter 2-way to indicate that you want the speakerphone to be both talk and listen. grp-listen Group Listen works with only 6400-series phones.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Station 907 The SPID is a numeric string, which means that the value of 00 is different from 000. The SPID must be different for all terminals on the BRI and from the Service SPID. The SPID should always be assigned. If the SPID is not assigned for the first BRI on a port, any other BRI assignment to that port are blocked.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Station 908 Table 12 lists the telephones and personal computers that you can administer on the DEFINITY ECS. To administer telephones that are not in the table, use the Alias Station screen. Table 12.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Station 909 Table 12.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Station 910 Table 12. telephones — Continued Telephone type Model Administer as 8405D 8405D 8405D+ 8405D+ 8410B 8410B 8410D 8410D 8411B 8411B 8411D 8411D 8434D 8434D CALLMASTER I 602A1 CALLMASTER II, III, IV 603A1, 603D1, 603E1, 603F1 CALLMASTER VI 606A1 IDT1 7403D IDT2 7406D Road-warrior application H.323 Native H.323 H.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding 911 Table 12. telephones — Continued Telephone type Model Administer as Key phone system interface — K2500 ASAI ASAI ISDN-BRI data module 7500 7500 Continued on next page XID Appears only for an ISDN-BRI data module or an ASAI link. Used to identify Layer 2 XID testing capability.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding 912 Local Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings) This field specifies: ■ the number of rings applied at a local coverage point before a call redirects to the next coverage point ■ the number of rings applied at the principal before a call forwards when Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer is activated.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding 913 Threshold for Blocking Off-Net Redirection of Incoming Trunk Calls This field applies for those occasions when an incoming call to a station redirects off-net. At that time, the Call Forward timer activates to block any further incoming calls to that station from being redirected off-net until the timer expires.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding ■ 914 The Value-Added Lucent (VALU) field on the System Parameters Customer Options, Page 6, screen is y. This field pertains only to CCRON and QSIG VALU coverage calls redirected over end-to-end ISDN facilities.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding 915 QSIG VALU Coverage Overrides QSIG Diversion with Rerouting This field specifies whether, with both QSIG Diversion with Rerouting and QSIG VALU turned on, the Coverage After Forwarding option on the Station screen will work for a user for calls that go to remote coverage.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding 916 Coverage After Forwarding This field governs whether an unanswered forwarded call is provided coverage treatment. Valid entries Usage y Coverage treatment is provided to unanswered forwarded calls. n No coverage treatment is provided to unanswered forwarded calls. The call remains at the forwarded-to destination.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding 917 When the system redirects a call off-net at the final coverage point in a coverage path, the system can apply no further coverage treatment even if the call is unanswered.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Country-Options 918 Disable call classifier for CCRON over ISDN trunks When a CCRON call routes offnet over ISDN end-to-end facilities, no call classifier is attached to the call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Country-Options 920 Companding Mode Identifies the companding algorithm to be used by system hardware. Valid entries Usage A-law Generally used outside the US Mu-law Generally used in the US Base Tone Generation Set The country code identifies the base tone generation set to be used. This field is meaningful only if the system tone detector is a TN780, vintage 4 or a TN2182.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Country-Options 921 Analog Ringing Cadence The country code identifies the ringing cadence to be used by analog phones in the system. Valid entries Usage 1 to 25 Refer to the Country code table at the beginning of this screen description. For more information on, see Audible Ringing Patterns in DEFINITY ECS System Description.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Country-Options 922 Disconnect on No Answer by Call Type Drops outgoing trunk calls (except DCS and AAR) that users leave unanswered too long. Valid entries Usage y/n Enables the system to disconnect calls that are not answered. Tone Detection Mode The country code specifies the type of tone detection used on a TN420B (or later) tone-detection circuit pack.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Country-Options 925 End-to-End total loss (dB) in a n-party conference Provides total loss for a conference call with the designated number of parties. Valid entries Usage 0 - 99 The higher the number listed for a call with a fixed display number of parties, the more loss the switch adds into a conference call with that number of parties; therefore, the conference call is quieter.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Country-Options 926 Tone Name Each entry uses one of the keywords below to indicate which of the individually administrable tones this screen modifies. This field (with its associated Tone (Frequency/Level), Duration, and Step fields) is meaningful only if the system tone detector is a TN780, vintage 4 or greater, or a TN2182.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Country-Options 927 Tone (Frequency/Level) Valid entries Usage silence An entry of silence means no tone. A final step of silence with an infinite duration will be added internally to any tone sequence that does not end in a goto. goto An entry of goto means to repeat all or part of the sequence, beginning at the specified cadence step. 350/-17.25 350+425/-4.0 350+440/-13.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 928 Duration (msec) There is one dynamic Duration field associated with each of the 15 Tone (Frequency/Level) fields on each screen page. Initially, when Tone is blank, this field does not appear.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 929 G3 Version Identifies the version of DEFINITY ECS being used. Maximum Ports Number of ports active, per contract. Location Indicates the location of this switch. 1 indicates Canada or the United States. 2 indicates any other location, and allows the use of International Consolidation circuit packs and telephones.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 930 Maximum IP SoftPhones Appears when the IP Stations field is y. Specifies the maximum number of IP SoftPhone stations that may be administered. Valid entries Usage 0 - 1000 (G3r) Shows the maximum number of IP SoftPhone stations. The combined total of H.323 stations, IP SoftPhones, and H.323 trunks cannot exceed 1000 for G3r or 300 for G3si/csi.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 931 A/D Grp/Sys List Dialing Start at 01 Allows you to number Abbreviated Dialing group or system lists starting with 01, rather than simply 1. This allows DEFINITY ECS Abbreviated Dialing to operate like it does with the DEFINITY G2 system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 932 Asynch. Transfer Mode (ATM) PNC With this configuration, the processor port network (PPN) is to be connected to expansion port networks (EPNs) via an ATM switch. Valid entries Usage y Set this field to y to enable port network connectivity (PNC).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 933 locations (main and branch). Each branch location switches all of its incoming calls to the centralized attendant positions over release link trunks (RLTs). The calls are then extended back to the requested extension at the branch switch over the same RLT. When the call is answered, the trunks to the main switch are dropped and can be used for another call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 934 Digital Loss Plan Modification Allows you to customize the digital loss and digital tone plans. Valid entries Usage y Allows you to make specific changes. n Uses the default country code for the loss plan, tone plan, and conference loss plan. No modifications to the loss plan are permitted.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 935 Forced Entry of Account Codes Allows system administration to force account users to enter account codes based on user or trunk class of restriction, or by an option on the Toll Analysis table. FEAC provides an easy method of allocating the costs of specific calls to the correct project, department, etc.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 936 Hospitality (G3V3 Enhancements) Software required for Property Management System and Automatic Wakeup. Property Management System Interface activates Forward PMS Messages to INTUITY Lodging and PMS Protocol Mode (transmit in ASCII mode). Usage Note: standard hospitality features are included in basic system software. H.323 Trunks Controls permission to administer H.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 937 Mode Code Interface Allows you to use the Mode Code Voice Mail System Interface to connect the switch over a DTMF interface to INTUITY AUDIX or other vendors’ voice mail systems. Multifrequency Signaling Provides for a screen of number signaling used between the switch and the central office. Multimedia Appl.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 938 Private Networking Upgrades PNA or ETN software RTU purchased with earlier systems. Restrict Call Forward Off Net The system can monitor the disposition of an off-call and, if it detects busy, bring the call back for further processing, including call coverage. Secondary Data Module Provides ability to use any data module as a secondary data module.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 939 Wideband Switching Provides wideband data software for switching video or high-speed data. You can aggregate DSO channels up to the capacity of the span. Wideband supports H0, H11, and H12 standards, where applicable, as well as customer-defined data rates. Wireless Provides right to use for wireless applications in certain Network Systems sales.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 940 BCMS/VuStats LoginIDs Allows you to administer valid agent login IDs to monitor call activity by agent. This feature can be used when EAS is not optioned, or in addition to EAS login IDs. When this field is y, both BCMS and CMS use the same login ID for an agent.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 941 Lookahead Interflow (LAI) Provides Look-Ahead Interflow to balance the load of ACD calls across multiple locations. Multiple Call Handling (On Request) Allows agents to request additional calls when active on a call. Multiple Call Handling (Forced) Forces an agent to be interrupted with an additional ACD call while active on an ACD call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 942 Vectoring (Prompting) Allows flexible handling of incoming calls based on information collected from the calling party or from an ISDN-PRI message.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 943 Field descriptions for page 5 Page 5 of 6 CALL CENTER OPTIONAL FEATURES VDN of Origin Announcement? n VuStats? n Logged-In ACD Agents: 500 VDN Return Destination? n VuStats (G3V4 Enhanced)? n Logged-In CentreVu Advocate Agents: 500 Screen 196.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 944 The limit applies to ACD agents on ACD and EAS calls. Auto-Available Split (AAS) agent ports are counted when they are assigned. AAS split or skill members are also counted. If the port for an AAS split/skill member is logged out, (for example, when a ringing call is redirected) the logged-in agent count is not updated.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 945 ■ Support of Notification Information Elements for interworking between QSIG and non-QSIG tandemed connections ■ Call Forwarding (Diversion) by forward switching. No reroute capabilities are provided ■ Call Transfer by join. No path replacement capabilities are provided.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 946 Value Added Lucent Provides additional QSIG functionality, including the ability to send and display calling party information during call alerting. See DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference System Parameters Customer-Options 947 Request Feature Allows the associated adjunct to request features such as change work modes, login, logout, sac, and fwd. Set Value Allows the adjunct to request status changes for Message Waiting lamps (that is, control of the on/off state of the lamps) and billing changes for 900-type call within Flexible Billing.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters OCM Call Classification 948 Selective Listening Consists of two capabilities, Third Party Listen Disconnect and Third Party Listen Reconnect. Listen Disconnect allows the adjunct to disconnect selected listening paths on an active call. Listen Reconnect allows the adjunct to reconnect disconnected listening paths.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters OCM Call Classification 949 Global Classifier Adjustment (dB) Enter a number to specify the dB loss adjustment. Valid entries Usage 0 to 15 0 is the least and 15 the most adjustment. USA Default Algorithm Valid entries Usage y/n To use the default United States tone detection, set this field to y. If you enter n, the US Special Information Tones (SIT) Algorithm field appears.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference System Parameters OCM Call Classification 950 Tone Name Valid entries Usage busy information intercept reorder ringback Enter the name of the tone that you are adding or modifying. This field is required for tone definition outside of the U.S. and Canada. Instance Enter the instance number of the tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Telecommuting Access 951 Duration Maximum Specifies the upper limit in milliseconds of the tone duration. NOTE: On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, set the Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval field to its maximum value. Valid entries Usage 75 – 6375 Enter in increments of 25 msec.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Tenant 952 See ‘‘Tenant Partitioning’’ on page 1536 for more information. Field descriptions for page 1 change tenant 18 Tenant 18 Tenant Description: ________________________________________ Attendant Group: 1 Ext Alert Port (TAAS): _______ Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension: ____ Night Destination: _____ Music Source: 1 Screen 201. Tenant Tenant This is a display only field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Tenant 953 Ext Alert Port (TAAS) Valid entries Usage A valid port address or X Enter 7 character port number. Enter Trunk Answer Any Station (TAAS) alert port information, if any. The port type and the object type must be consistent, and the port can be assigned to only one tenant. Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension This field appears only if you entered an X in Ext Alert Port (TAAS).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Terminal Parameters 957 Display Mode Determines how the #) and ~ characters appear on the 603 phone’s display.This field only appears if Customize Parameters is y. Valid entries Usage 1 If this field is set to 1, the # and ~ do not change. 2 If this field is set to 2, the 603 phone displays a # as a British pound sterling symbol and a ~ as a straight overbar.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Terminal Parameters 958 Voice Sidetone (dB) Determines the volume of voice fed back from the handset voice microphone to the user’s ear. Touch Tone Sidetone (dB) Determines the touchtone volume fed back from the telephone when a users presses a button. Touch Tone Transmit (dB) — Determines the touchtone volume fed outbound from the telephone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Terminating Extension Group 959 Terminating Extension Group This screen defines a Terminating Extension Group (TEG). Any phone can be assigned as a TEG member; however, only a multi-appearance phone can be assigned a TEG button with associated status lamp. The TEG button allows the phone user to select a TEG call appearance for answering or for bridging onto an existing call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Terminating Extension Group 960 Group Extension Enter the extension of the terminating extension group. Valid entries Usage 1 to 5 digits Unused extension number (may not be a VDN extension) blank Do not leave blank Group Name Enter the name used to identify the terminating extension group. Coverage Path Enter a number for the call coverage path for this group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Terminating Extension Group 961 ISDN Caller Disp This field is required if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y. Valid entries Usage grp-name Specify whether the TEG group name or member name (member of TEG where call terminated) will be sent to the originating user.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Time of Day Coverage Table 962 Messaging Server Name Name of the server as it appears in the Node Names screen. Only appears for G3r configurations. Valid entries Usage Unique identifiers for messaging server equipment. Group Member Assignments — Ext Enter the extension number (may not be a VDN extension) assigned to a station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Time of Day Routing Plan 963 Time of Day Coverage Table A display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration command. Specifies the Time of Day Coverage Table number. Up to 999 can be administered. Act Time Specify the activation time of the coverage path administered in the next CVG PATH field. Enter the information in 24-hour time format.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Toll Analysis 964 System-Parameters Customer-Options screen before you can use Time of Day Routing.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Toll Analysis 965 To maximize System security, it is recommended that toll calling areas be restricted as much as possible through the use of the RCL (Restricted Call List) and Toll List fields on this screen.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Toll Analysis 966 Min Valid entries Usage 1 to Max Enter the minimum number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to this dialed string. Valid entries Usage Min to 24 Enter the maximum number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to this dialed string. Max RCL Enter x to assign the Dialed String to the Restricted Call List (RCL).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 967 Dialed String Min Max Toll List 51 10 10 x 60 10 10 x 61 10 10 x 70 10 10 x 71 10 10 x 80 10 10 x 81 10 10 x 90 10 10 x 91 10 10 x CDR FEAC Valid entries Usage x Enter x to require an account code from a call whose facility COR requires a Forced Entry of Account Code.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 968 Field descriptions for page 1 The figure below shows a common configuration for page 1 of the Trunk Group screen when the Group Type field is tie. This screen is only an example, and the fields shown below may change or disappear according to specific field settings.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 969 Group Type Enter the type of trunk group. Valid entries Usage Access Use access trunks to connect satellite switches to the main switch in Electronic Tandem Networks (ETN). Access trunks do not carry traveling class marks (TCM) and thus allow satellite callers unrestricted access to out-dial trunks on the main switch. Allows Inband ANI.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 970 Valid entries Usage ISDN Use ISDN trunks when you need digital trunks that can integrate voice, data, and video signals and provide the bandwidth needed for applications such as high-speed data transfer and video conferencing. ISDN trunks can also efficiently combine multiple services on one trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 971 CDR Reports Valid entries Usage y All outgoing calls on this trunk group will generate call detail records. If the Record Outgoing Calls Only field on the CDR System Parameters screen is n, then incoming calls on this trunk group will also generate call detail records. n Calls over this trunk group will not generate call detail records.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 972 Tip: Remember that facility restriction levels (FRL) are assigned to classes of restriction. Even if 2 trunk groups have classes of restriction that allow a connection, different facility restriction levels may prevent operations such as off-net call forwarding or outgoing calls by remote access users.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 973 Protocol Type This field specifies the type of line signaling protocol used for DID and DIOD trunk groups. This field appears when the Country field is 15 and is used only by trunk group members administered on a TN2199 or TN464D vintage 3 or later circuit pack. Valid entries Usage inloc (Incoming local) Enter the protocol the central office is using for this trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 974 Trunk Signaling Type This field controls the signaling used by members in private network trunk groups, mainly in Italy, Brazil, and Hungary. This field appears if the Group Type is access, aplt, diod, rlt, tandem, or tie. Entries in this field affect which timers appear on the Administrable Timers page.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 975 Valid entries Usage This field also controls the signaling used by members in public network digital trunk groups. This field displays if the Group Type field is access, aplt, rlt, tandem, or tie. Entries in this field affect which timers appear on the Administrable Timers page. DIOD trunks support pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 976 Busy Threshold Use this field if you want attendants to control access to outgoing and two-way trunk groups during periods of high use.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 977 placed the original call. The caller will hear 3 short, quick rings. The caller doesn’t need to do anything but pick up the handset and wait: the switch remembers the number the caller dialed and automatically completes the call. This field appears when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 978 Valid entries Usage 15 If the Country field is 15, DEFINITY ECS is administered for Public Network Call Priority (Intrusion and Rering). Also, the Protocol Type field appears for Group Type DID or DIOD. 18 If the Country field is 18, DEFINITY ECS can be administered for Public Network Call Priority (Mode of Release Control, Forced Disconnect, and Rering).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 979 Incoming Destination Use this field to set the destination for all incoming calls on trunk groups such as CO, FX, and WATS that must terminate at a single destination. The destination you enter here is also the default night service destination unless you enter a different destination in the Night Service field. Appears when the Direction field is incoming or two-way.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group Valid entries avd 980 Usage Enter avd for applications that mix voice and Digital Communication Protocol data, such as video conferencing applications. The receiving switch discriminates voice calls from data calls and directs each to an appropriate endpoint. Neither originating nor terminating switches insert a modem poll for any calls when Comm Type is avd.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 981 Digit Absorption List This field assigns a digit absorption list, when used, to a trunk group that terminates at a step-by-step central office. Valid entries Usage 0 to 4 Enter the number of the digit absorption list this trunk group should use. Prefix-1 Use this field for outgoing and two-way trunk groups handling long distance service.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 982 ISDN calls. DEFINITY ECS compares the entry in the BCC field to the value of the Bearer Capability information element for the incoming call and routes the call over appropriate facilities. For example, a call with BCC 4 will only be connected through facilities that support 64 kbps data transmission.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 983 Trunk Type Use this field to control the seizure and start-dial signaling used on this trunk group. Entries in this field vary according to the function of the trunk group and must match the corresponding setting on the far-end switch. This field appears for CO, DID, FX, and WATS trunk groups. Refer to ‘‘Transmission and supervisory signaling’’ on page 1569 for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 984 Trunk Type (in/out) Use this field to control the seizure and start-dial signaling used on this trunk group. The setting of the Trunk Signaling Type field can affect the entries allowed in this field. In addition, settings may differ for incoming and outgoing trunks.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 985 Tip: When incoming trunks use the setting immed/immed, the far-end switch seizes the trunk and sends digits without waiting for acknowledgment from the receiving switch. When traffic is heavy, the receiving switch may not immediately attach a Touch Tone Receiver to a call and therefore lose digits.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 986 DIOD trunks support pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Application Notes for Type Approval for more information. Valid entries Usage tone Enter tone to use Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) addressing, also known as “touch tone” in the U.S.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 987 ! SECURITY ALERT: Entering y in this field will reduce your ability to prevent toll fraud. Valid entries Usage y Enter y to allow users to get dial tone directly from the central office. Outgoing calls over this trunk group will bypass AAR/ARS (if you’re using it) and any of your administered restrictions (such as COR or FRL). n Enter n and the user will receive switch dial tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 988 Valid entries Usage tone Enter tone to use Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) addressing, also known as “touch tone” in the U.S. Entering tone actually allows the trunk group to support both DTMF and rotary signals. Also, if you’re using the Inband ANI feature, enter tone. For pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and for discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary, use tone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 989 .
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 990 End-to-End Signaling Auxiliary equipment such as paging equipment and music sources may be connected to DEFINITY ECS by auxiliary trunks. The switch may send DTMF signals (touch tones) to these devices. This field, which appears for CPE (customer-provided equipment) trunk groups, sets the duration of these tones.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 991 NOTE: In a DCS network, DCS features that use the remote-tgs button (on phones at a remote switch) do not work when the incoming trunk group at your switch deletes or inserts digits on incoming calls. The remote-tgs button on a remote switch, for example, tries to dial a TAC on your switch. If your switch adds or deletes digits, it defeats this operation.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 992 Auto Guard This field controls ports only on TN438B, TN465B, and TN2147 circuit packs. TN438B ports have hardware support for detecting a defective trunk. TN465B and TN2147 ports consider a trunk defective if no dial tone is detected on an outgoing call, and the Outpulse Without Tone field is n on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 993 the default, you may need to invert one or both bits — to change “1” to “0” and vice-versa in the A-bit, for example. Valid entries Usage A For the TN464B and later circuit packs, indicate which bits, if any, should be inverted. B A&B none A and none For the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, indicate which bits, if any, should be inverted.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 994 Line Length This field appears only when the Group Type field is tie and the Trunk Signaling Type field is tge, tgi, or tgu. Valid entries Usage short long NOTE: Unless one or more trunk members are administered, the administered value is not saved when you submit the screen (press ENTER).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 995 Extended Loop Range This field appears only for a DID trunk group and is used only with the TN459A circuit pack. Enter y or n depending on the distance between the central office and the switch. If greater than the required distance, then the field should be y. Valid entries Usage y/n Trunk Gain This field specifies the amplification applied to the trunks in this group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 996 Bit Rate This field specifies the baud rate to be used by pooled modems. This field appears when the Comm Type field is avd or rbavd. It also appears if the Comm Type field is data, but only if the ISDN-PRI field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Valid entries Usage 300 Enter the speed of the fastest modem that will use this trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 997 NOTE: Even if the trunk group supports full-duplex transmission, other equipment in a circuit may not. Valid entries Usage full Enter full in most cases: this allows simultaneous two-way transmission, which is most efficient. half Enter half to support only one transmission direction at a time.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 998 Disconnect Supervision-Out This field indicates whether the switch receives disconnect supervision for outgoing calls over this trunk group. It appears when the Direction field is either outgoing or two-way. (If the Direction field is incoming, the switch internally sets this field to n.) The entry in this field is crucial if you allow trunk-to-trunk transfers.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 999 Cyclical Hunt When a call is offered to a trunk group, the switch searches for an available trunk. This field, which appears when the Direction field is two-way and the Trunk Type field is loop-start, controls the starting point of the search. You can change this field from n to y at any time. To change from y to n, however, all the trunks in the group must be idle or busied out.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1000 ceases after the far-end sends answer supervision. If the timer expires, the switch acts as if it had received answer supervision. On senderized operation, the timer begins after the last digit collected is sent by the switch.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1002 Customer-Options screen. If the ATM field is set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen, this field accepts only internal or none. If this field contains a value other than internal or none when ATM is y, none appears. Valid entries Usage internal Enter internal if the data can be sent to the Basic Call Management System (BCMS), the VuStats data display, or both.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1003 Data Restriction Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to prevent features from generating tones on a data call that would cause erroneous data transmission. Short Holding Threshold This field appears when the ACA Assignment field is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1004 Used for DCS Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y if this trunk group will send and receive messages on a DCS signaling link. NOTE: This field cannot be activated if the trunk group number is greater than 255 or if the Trunk Access code is more than 3-digits long. If this field is y, you can administer ISDN-BRI trunk groups unless the DCS Signaling field is d-chan.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1005 For DIOD trunks using TN464F (or later release) or TN2464, displays only when the Group Type field is diod and the Trunk Signaling Type field is pulsed, cont, or dis. Valid entries Usage near-end Enter near-end if this switch generates an outgoing seizure when a trunk is maintenance busied but the far-end switch does not.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1006 Charge Conversion DEFINITY ECS multiplies the number of charge units by the value of this field and displays it as a currency amount. If there is no value in this field, DEFINITY ECS displays the number of charge units without converting it to currency. This field appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1007 Currency Symbol This field appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way. For ISDN trunk groups, it appears when the Charge Advice field is not none. Valid entries Usage 1–3 characters Enter the symbol you want to appear on phone displays before (leading and the charge amount.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1008 Receive Analog Incoming Call ID Your switch stores and displays 15 characters of name and number information associated with an incoming call on analog trunks (ICLID, or incoming call line identification information).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1009 Per Call CPN Unblocking Code For access, APLT, CO, DIOD, FX, tandem, tie, and WATS trunk groups only.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1010 Field descriptions for page 3 The figure below shows a common configuration for page 3 of the Trunk Group screen when the Group Type field is co. This screen is only an example, and the fields shown below may change or disappear according to specific field settings.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1011 Incoming Disconnect (msec) The field appears only for an incoming or two-way trunk group when the Trunk Signaling Type field is either blank or cont. Valid entries Usage 50 to 2550 in increments of 10 Enter the minimum valid duration of a disconnect signal for an incoming call. The switch will not recognize shorter disconnect signals. This field cannot be blank.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1012 Outgoing Dial Guard (msec) Valid entries Usage 100 to 25500 in Enter the minimum interval between seizure acknowledgment increments of of a trunk and the outpulsing of digits. This field cannot be 100 blank. For trunks that do not provide seizure acknowledgment, the timer specifies the minimum time between seizure and the outpulsing of digits.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1013 Ringing Monitor (msec) This timer is sent to TN464C (or later), TN767, TN438 (all), TN447, TN465 (all), TN2138, TN2147, TN2184, and TN2199 CO circuit packs. Valid entries Usage 200 to 51000 in Enter the minimum time the switch requires to determine if a increments of trunk disconnects. The field cannot be blank.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1014 Outgoing Rotary Dial Interdigit (msec) This field only appears when the Outgoing Dial Type field is rotary. Valid entries Usage 150 to 2550 in increments of 10 Enter the minimum acceptable interval between outgoing rotary digits. The field cannot be blank. Outgoing End of Dial (sec) This field controls firmware answer supervision timers on circuit packs that have them.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1015 Outgoing Seizure Response (sec) This timer is sent to the TN438B, TN439, TN447, TN458, TN464B (or later), TN465B (or later), TN767, TN2140, TN2147, TN2184, TN2199, and TN2242 circuit packs. Valid entries Usage 1 to 255 in Enter the maximum interval that the switch should wait after increments of 1 sending a seizure signal to receive seizure acknowledgment from the far-end.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1016 Outgoing Seizure (msec) Appears when the Country field is 15, the Direction field is outgoing or two-way, and the Trunk Type field is 2-wire-ac, 2-wire-dc, or 3-wire. This timer is sent only to the TN2199 circuit pack. Valid entries Usage 20 to 2550 in Enter the duration of the outgoing seizure signal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1017 Normal Outgoing Seize Send (msec) This field appears only if the Trunk Signaling Type field is dis and the trunk group Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer. Valid entries Usage 10 to 990 in increments of 10 Enter the duration of the signal your switch sends for an outgoing seizure.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1018 Outgoing Disconnect Send (msec) This field is administrable only if the Trunk Signaling Type field is dis and the trunk group Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer. Valid entries Usage 100 to 9900 in Enter the duration of the forward release signal your switch sends at the end of outgoing calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1019 Pause (msec) THis field is administrable only if the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank. All CO, DIOD, and tie circuit packs that accept administrable timers accept this timer. However, this timer is sent only to the following circuit packs: TN464B (or later), TN767, TN436B, TN459B, TN2146, TN2199, and TN2242, and TN429 and TN2184 ports in a DID trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1020 Break (msec) Valid entries Usage Enter the duration of the break interval (the pulse duration) while the system is outpulsing digits using dial pulse signaling. The field cannot be blank. 20 to 80 in If PPS field is 10, the sum of the Make (msec) and Break increments of 5 (msec) fields must equal 100.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1021 Valid entries Usage 50 The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and 16kHz PPM. Therefore, if 50 is administered, the circuit pack will be set to detect 16kHz. 50/12k The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and 16kHz PPM. Therefore, if 50/12k is administered, the circuit pack will be set to detect 12kHz.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1022 TTL Type Specifies the type of terminating test line (TTL) selected for testing trunks. The TTL type determines what ATMS tests can be completed and thus which threshold values need to be administered.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1024 Trunk Vendor Valid entries Usage 0 to 22 alphanumeric characters Enter the name of the vendor providing service over this trunk group (the company to notify in the event of problems with the trunks in this trunk group).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1025 Unacceptable Threshold - Min - 1004 Hz Loss Valid entries Usage -2 to 21 Enter the minimum signal loss allowed for a 1004 Hz test tone (in dB) before a trunk is reported as unacceptable. A larger dB value is more restrictive. Unacceptable Threshold - Max - 1004 Hz Loss Valid entries Usage 0 to 21.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1026 Unacceptable Threshold - +Dev - 404 Hz Valid entries Usage 0 to 9 Enter the maximum positive deviation of measured loss at 404 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB) allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Smaller dB values are more restrictive.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1027 Marginal Threshold - Maximum C Message Noise Valid entries Usage 15 to 55 Enter the maximum C-message noise phone as measured within the voice band frequency range (500 to 2500 Hz) allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Smaller values are more restrictive.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1028 Unacceptable Threshold - Minimum SRL-HI Valid entries Usage 0 to 40 Enter the minimum high-frequency signaling return loss in dB allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Larger values are more restrictive.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1029 Allow ATMS Busyout, Error Logging and Alarming Valid entries Usage y/n Enter y to allow ATMS error logging and alarming (subject to filtering depending on the service organization used to deal with alarms).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1030 Administered Members (min/max) This display-only field shows the minimum and maximum member numbers that have been administered for this trunk group. Total Administered Members This display-only field shows the total number of members administered in the trunk group. Port If this trunk is registered as an endpoint in an IP application, this field will display T00000.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1031 Name Your vendor, as well as Lucent technical staff, sometimes need to identify specific trunks to work with your system. Therefore, the name you give to a trunk should identify the trunk unambiguously.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Trunk Group 1032 Type This field specifies the signaling type to be used with TN760B (or later release), TN722 (with any suffix), TN767, TN2140 (when the Trunk Signaling Type field is cont), TN437, TN439, TN464 with any suffix, or TN458 circuit packs. The Type column appears when the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank or cont.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Vector Directory Number ■ 1033 It ignores momentary off-hook signals resulting from connections made off-network through certain No. 5 Crossbar CCSA switches as the connection is being established. Therefore, calls aren’t dropped inappropriately. Related topics Refer to ‘‘Managing trunks’’ on page 337 for instructions on adding and managing trunk groups.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Vector Directory Number 1034 Field descriptions for page 1 change vdn 5000 Page 1 of 1 VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER Extension: Name: Vector Number: Attendant Vectoring: Allow VDN Override? COR: TN: Measured: Acceptable Service Level (sec): VDN of Origin Annc. Extension: 1st Skill: 2nd Skill: 3rd Skill: 5000 234 n n 59 1 none 301 Screen 215.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Vector Directory Number 1035 Vector Number Identification number that specifies a particular call vector that is accessed through the VDN. Valid entries Usage 1 to 256 Enter a 1- to 3-digit vector number. This field cannot be blank. Attendant Vectoring This field appears only if Attendant Vectoring is enabled on the Customer Options screen.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Vector Directory Number 1036 COR Specifies the class of restriction (COR) of the VDN. Valid entries Usage 0 to 95 Enter a 1- or 2-digit number. This field cannot be blank. TN Specifies the Tenant Partition number for this VDN. Valid entries Usage 1 to 20 Measured Used to collect measurement data for this VDN. Data may be collected for reporting by BCMS or CMS.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Vector Directory Number 1037 VDN of Origin Annc. Extension Data for this field appears only when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the VDN of Origin Announcement field is y. Valid entries Usage VDN extension Enter the extension number of the VDN of Origin announcement.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 17 Screen reference Vector Directory Number 1038 BSR Application To use multi-site Best Service Routing with this VDN, specify an application plan for the VDN. This field only appears if, on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Lookahead Interflow (LAI) and Vectoring (Best Service Routing) fields are y. Valid entries Usage Enter a 1- to 3-digit number.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 17 Screen reference Vector Directory Number 1039 Field descriptions for page 2 change vdn 5000 Page VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER AUDIX Name: Messaging Server Name: Return Destination: VDN Timed ACW Interval: BSR Application: BSR Available Agent Strategy: 1st-found Screen 216.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 18 Command reference 1041 Command reference 18 Use the commands in the tables below to access each administration screen. Brackets [ ] indicate the qualifier is optional. Single quotes (‘ ’) indicate the text inside the quote must be entered exactly as shown or an abbreviated form of the word may be entered. MAX is the maximum number available in your system configuration.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 18 Command reference 1044 Access Endpoint Action Object Qualifier add access-endpoint xxxx (ext. or ‘next’) change access-endpoint xxxx (ext. or ‘next’) display access-endpoint xxxx (ext. or ‘next’) [’print’ or ’schedule’] duplicate access-endpoint xxxx (ext. or ‘next’) remove access-endpoint xxxx (ext.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 1065 Phone reference 19 This reference section describes many of the telephones and adjuncts that you can connect to the DEFINITY ECS.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 500 telephones 1067 500 telephones The 500 telephones are single appearance analog rotary-dial telephones which provides cost-effective service wherever it is located. It provides limited access to features because the rotary dial has no * or # positions. 2500-series telephones The 2500-series telephones consist of single appearance analog telephones with conventional touch-tone dialing.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 6200-series telephones 1068 6 1 7 6210 8 2 9 ABC 3 4 Flash 1 2 GHI 4 JKL 5 7 PQRS Redial TUV DEF 3 MNO 6 WXYZ 8 9 0 # * 5 Hold 10 11 Figure Notes 1. Handset 7. Ringer volume control 2. Handset cord jack 8. Message light 3. Flash button 9. Handset volume control 4. Redial button 10. Dial pad 5. Hold button 11. LINE jack (on bottom of phone) 6. DATA jack Figure 16.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 6200-series telephones 1069 1 10 2 11 12 6220 3 Program 13 Pause Tel.# 4 14 5 Mute Spkr 15 6 ABC 7 Flash 8 Redial 9 Hold DEF 1 2 3 GHI 4 JKL MNO 5 6 7 TUV WXYZ 8 9 0 # PQRS * 16 17 Figure Notes 1. Handset parking tab 9. Personalized ring 2. Handset 10. Ringer volume control 3. Program button 11. 10 programmable dialing buttons 4. Handset cord jack 12.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 6200-series telephones 1070 1 10 2 11 12 6220 3 Program 13 Pause Tel.# 4 14 5 Mute Spkr 15 6 ABC 7 Flash 8 Redial 9 Hold DEF 1 2 3 GHI 4 JKL MNO 5 6 7 TUV WXYZ 8 9 0 # PQRS * 16 17 Figure Notes 1. DATA jack 9. Hold button 2. Handset 10. Personalized ring 3. Program button 11. Ringer volume control 4. Mute button 12. 10 programmable dialing buttons 5.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 6400-series telephones 1071 6400-series telephones The 6400-series telephones are DCP 2-wire telephones that work with the DEFINITY ECS. The last two digits of the 6400-series model number identify the number of call appearances (2-lamp buttons) for that model. For example, the 6424D has 24 call appearances.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 6400-series telephones 1072 6408 telephones The 6408 is a multi-appearance digital telephone with eight call appearance/feature buttons.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 6400-series telephones 1073 NOTE: You can connect an XM24 expansion module to a 6424D+ phone to expand the number of buttons you can assign. However, when the expansion module is connected, you must connect an auxiliary power supply to the telephone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 6400-series telephones 1074 1 2 14 Menu Exit 13 12 Tel # Spkr Mute Hold Redial Trnsfr Test Conf Ring 11 10 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ * O # 1 4 9 7 8 Prev 2 5 8 Next 3 4 3 6 5 9 Volume 6 7 Figure Notes 1. Display 8. Volume control button 2. Softkeys 9. Dial pad 3. Display control buttons 10. Conf/Ring button 4. Hold 11. Redial button 5.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7100-series telephones 1075 7100-series telephones 7101A telephone The 7101A telephone is a single-line analog model that is equipped with a Message Waiting light and a handy Recall button for activating the system’s special features. It cannot be physically bridged to the same analog line port due to the message waiting and loop current circuitry.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7300-series telephones 1076 Administer 7303H telephones (10-Button) as a 7305S model. You can administer only the first 12 feature function buttons. Of these 12 buttons, 8 have two lamps and 4 have no lamps. However, the system treats the 8 double-lamp buttons as though they have a single (green) lamp. Administer the 4 buttons (with no lamps) with features that do not require status indications.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7300-series telephones 1077 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad Figure 21. 7303S telephone 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 731x-series hybrid telephones 1078 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 22.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 731x-series hybrid telephones 1079 ■ The following fixed feature buttons do not operate on Hybrid telephones: STOP, PAUSE, RECALL, MESSAGE, HFAI, and HFAI/MIC. If you want users to have Hands Free Automatic Answer on Intercom (HFAI), assign Internal Automatic Answer (IAA) to a lamp button. ■ These telephones support Leave Word Calling (LWC), but users cannot retrieve messages with the display.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 731x-series hybrid telephones 1080 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 12 feature buttons Figure 24.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 731x-series hybrid telephones 1081 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 12 feature buttons Figure 25.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 731x-series hybrid telephones 1082 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 26.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1083 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 27. 7317H telephone (BIS 34D) 7400-series telephones 7401D telephone The 7401D (7401D01A) and the 7401+ (7401D02A) are both single appearance digital phones which have no call appearance buttons or lights, but have two virtual call appearances.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1084 7403D telephone The 7403D is a multi-appearance digital telephone which has 10 buttons available for line appearances, one-touch feature access, or Speed Dialing. In addition, the 7403D telephone may be equipped with a Digital Terminal Data Module (DTDM) which attaches to the right side and allows the connection of a EIA RS-232C data terminal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1086 speakerphone, a connection for an adjunct speakerphone or headset, a speakerphone with spokesman, and Mute option, and a 2-line by 40-character display. 7410D and 7410+ telephones The 7410D (7410D01A) and 7410+ (7410D02A) are both multi-appearance digital telephones with 10 line appearances, four standard fixed feature buttons and a Select Ring button.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1087 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad Figure 28. 7401D telephone 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1088 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad Figure 29. 7404D telephone 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1089 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 30.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1090 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons 5. Function key module with 24 feature module buttons Figure 31.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1091 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. Digital display module with 7 display buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons Figure 32.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1092 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad 3. Call coverage module with 20 coverage module buttons and status lamps 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons Figure 33.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1093 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons 5. Digital terminal data module Figure 34.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1094 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 5 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 18 feature buttons (feature buttons F2, F4, and F12 to F18 are enabled with the Shift key) Figure 35.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1095 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 5 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 18 feature buttons (feature buttons F12 to F18 are enabled with the Shift key) Figure 36.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1096 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 7 display buttons 5. 24 feature buttons Figure 37.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1097 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34) Figure 38.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1098 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad 3. Call coverage module with 20 coverage module buttons and status lamps 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34) Figure 39.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 7400-series telephones 1099 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. Digital display module with 7 display buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 10 programmable buttons 5. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34) Figure 40.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) 1100 ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) phones include both the 7500-series and the 8500-series telephones. Each of these phones uses the ISDN communications through a 4-wire “T”-interface. 7505D ISDN-BRI telephone The 7505D telephone serves as a telephone if it is equipped with a Voice Only Module (VOM).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) 1102 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad Figure 41. 8503D telephone 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) 1103 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad Figure 42. 8510T telephone 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s) 1104 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 10 programmable buttons (11 to 20) Figure 43. 8520T telephone NOTE: The 8520T telephone supports 20 call appearances. The system maximum of 10 call appearance buttons still applies. You can administer the buttons that are not used as call appearance buttons as bridged appearances.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 8110 telephones 1105 8110 telephones The basic 8110 (8110A01A, 8110A01B, and 811A01C) and the modified 8110M (8110A01D) telephones are single-line analog telephones. These telephones are exactly the same in appearance: each contains 12 programmable dialing buttons with PROGRAM and PAUSE buttons, automatic redial, a flashing red Message light, and a Hold button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 8400-series telephones 1106 8410B telephone The 8410 telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 10 call appearance/feature buttons, four standard fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), a MUTE button, a SPEAKER button which can access either a 2-way speakerphone or a 1-way, listen-only speaker, a TEST button, and a Volume control button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference 8400-series telephones 1107 SPEAKER button which accesses either a 2-way speakerphone or a 1-way listen-only speaker, a TEST button, a SHIFT button (some 8434DX telephones will have a RING button instead), a red Message light, personalized ringing, a built-in speakerphone with a reset option, and a built-in 2-line by 40-character VFD display.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 8400-series telephones 1108 Figure Notes 1. Handset 2. Dial pad Figure 44. 8403B telephone 3.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 8400-series telephones 1109 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 45. 8410B telephone NOTE: The 8405B and 8405B+ look like the 8410B with the exception that the 8405 series do not have the second column of line appearances.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 8400-series telephones 1110 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad Figure 46. 8410D telephone NOTE: The 8405D and 8405D+ look like the 8410D with the exception that the 8405 series do not have the second column of line appearances.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference 8400-series telephones 1111 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 10 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 4. 24 feature buttons Figure 47.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference CALLMASTER telephones 1112 CALLMASTER telephones There are several types of CALLMASTER telephones: ■ 602A and 602D CALLMASTER The 602 CALLMASTER models have a display, a Message light, a Mute button, and four fixed feature buttons: Conference, Drop, Hold, and Transfer. You can administer its 10 call appearance/feature (2-lamp) buttons and its 17 feature-only (1-lamp) buttons.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference CALLMASTER telephones ■ 1113 607A (CALLMASTER V) The CALLMASTER V model has a display, softkeys, and the display control buttons (Menu, Exit, Previous, and Next). This model does not have a standard handset, but you can connect a handset to one of its headset jacks. The CALLMASTER V has six fixed feature buttons: Speaker, Mute, Hold, Redial, Conference, and Transfer.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference CALLMASTER telephones 1114 CALLMASTER IV 1 Select Conference Ring Volume Drop Test ABC 1 2 3 JKL MNO 5 6 PRQS TUV WXYZ 7 8 9 2 Log In (3) (4) (5) (6) (F1) (F7) (F13) (F2) (F8) (F14) (F3) (F9) (F15) (F4) (F10) (F16) (F5) (F11) (F17) 3 2 Hold 0 Mute (2) DEF GHI 4 (1) Transfer Release phdfclms EWS 030999 Figure Notes 1. Handset 3. 6 programmable buttons 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference CALLMASTER telephones 1115 2 3 Menu Exit Prev Next Tel # Speaker Mute Hold Redial Transfer Conf Test 1 DEF 1 2 3 GHI JKL MNO 4 5 PQRS 7 CALLMASTER V Ring ABC * 6 TUV WXYZ 8 9 O # 4 Volume Figure Notes 1. Dial pad 3. 4 softkey buttons 2. Display 4. 16 call appearance/feature buttons Figure 50.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference Cordless telephones 1116 Cordless telephones MDC9000 cordless telephone The MDC 9000 Cordless Telephone has two basic parts, the handset and the charging base.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference Cordless telephones 1117 Figure Notes 1. 6 programmable buttons 1. 6 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 2. Dial pad Figure 51.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 19 Phone reference Cordless telephones 1118 Figure Notes 1. 6 programmable buttons 1. 6 programmable buttons 2. Dial pad 2. Dial pad Figure 52.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference DEFINITY Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones 1119 DEFINITY Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones DEFINITY IP Softphones extend the level of DEFINITY services. They turn a PC or a laptop into an advanced telephone. DEFINITY IP Softphones allow you to send voice and fax from the DEFINITY ECS through an Internet Protocol (IP) network to other DEFINITY systems that have this feature.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference DEFINITY Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones 1120 Figure 54. CentreVu IP Agent interface Road-warrior application The road-warrior application enables travelers to use DEFINITY ECS features from temporary remote locations, such as a hotel room. The road-warrior configuration uses two separate software applications running on a user’s PC that is connected to a DEFINITY system over an IP network.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 19 Phone reference DEFINITY Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones 1121 not use the IP Softphone interface, this configuration is capable of operating only as a single-line telephone without any additional assigned features. You can provide stand-alone H.323 users only features that can they can activate with dial access codes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference AAR and ARS partitioning Features and technical reference 1123 20 AAR and ARS partitioning You can use Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection (ARS) partitioning to change the call routing plan for up to 8 different user groups within a single DEFINITY ECS.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference AAR and ARS partitioning 1124 You can assign a route pattern to just one partitioned user group or you can assign a route pattern to all your partitioned user groups. You assign the PGN on the Class of Restriction (COR) screen, and then assign the COR on each station screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference AAR/ARS shortcut dialing 1125 AAR/ARS shortcut dialing (Not available with Offer B) Use AAR/ARS shortcut dialing to modify your dial plan and expand the capabilities of automatic routing. With shortcut dialing, users can make AAR and ARS calls without dialing the Feature Access Code (FAC), usually 8 for AAR and 9 for ARS in the US.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference AAR/ARS shortcut dialing 1126 ■ QSIG networks — Providing a 6- to 7-digit private-network dialing plan makes it easier to convert a large DCS network to QSIG. You can implement QSIG networks with all the QSIG Supplementary Services installed in your network. It also makes it easier to integrate DEFINITY ECS into existing networks composed of non-Lucent systems.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference AAR/ARS shortcut dialing ■ 1127 AUDIX ■ AUDIX mailboxes allow a maximum of 5 digits when AUDIX is connected to a switch that is not administered as a central office. If an internal extension is 6 or more digits, the corresponding voice mailbox must be set up and accessed with 5 or less digits. AUDIX cannot associate a subscriber’s name with 6- or more digit number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference AAR/ARS shortcut dialing 1128 When a caller dials a CDR account code before the shortcut dialing number, the CDR account code is recorded in CDR. ■ Call Management Systems (CMS) Because the AAR or ARS access code is not used in shortcut dialing, there is no feature access code on CMS records to indicate outgoing trunk calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Abbreviated Dialing 1129 Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing (AD) provides easy access to selected numbers by reducing the number of digits users have to dial to place a call. Instead of dialing the entire number, the user dials a short code to access the number. The system then dials the stored number automatically.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Abbreviated Dialing 1130 lists and each user may have access to up to 3 group lists. You can program the list or you can designate a user in each group to program the list. You specify this designated user on the Abbreviated Dialing Group List screen. System lists You can define one system list for the entire organization.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Access security gateway 1131 If the previously-called number was in an AD privileged list, and if the user is not normally allowed to dial the number because of his or her class of restriction, they cannot redial the number using Last Number Dialed. To redial the number, the user must again access the AD privileged list.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Access security gateway 1132 The BCS Products Security Handbook contains information about: ■ toll fraud and what you can do to prevent it. ■ methods people use to gain access to your system, how to detect toll fraud, and what to do if you suspect that your system has been compromised.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Administered Connections 1133 Related topics Refer to ‘‘Using access security gateway’’ on page 319 for instructions. Administered Connections An Administered Connection (AC) is a connection between 2 access or data endpoints. DEFINITY ECS automatically establishes the connection based on the attributes you administer.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Administered Connections 1134 Access endpoints Access endpoints are non-signaling trunk ports. They neither generate signaling to the far-end of the trunk nor respond to signaling from the far-end. Designate an access endpoint as the originating endpoint or destination endpoint in an AC.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Administered Connections 1135 AC attempts can fail for the following reasons: ■ Resources are unavailable to route to the destination. ■ A required conversion resource is not available. ■ Access is denied by Class of Restriction (COR), Facilities Restriction Level (FRL), or Bearer Capability Class (BCC).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Administered Connections ■ 1136 An interruption (for example, facility failure) occurs between the endpoints. If an AC drops because it was disabled/removed or is no longer due to be active, no action is taken. If an AC drops because of changed AC attributes, an immediate attempt is made to establish the connection with the changed attributes if it is still due to be active.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Administered Connections ■ 1137 Busy Verification of Stations and Trunks This feature does not apply to access endpoints because they are used only for data. ■ Call Detail Recording For an AC that uses a trunk when CDR is active, the origination extension is the originator of the call. CDR is not available for access endpoints.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Administrable Language Displays ■ 1138 Set Time Command When you change the system time via the set time command, all scheduled AC are examined. If the time change causes an active AC to be outside its scheduled period, the AC drops. If the time change causes an inactive AC to be within its scheduled period, the switch attempts to establish the AC.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Alternate facility restriction levels 1140 Alternate facility restriction levels Alternate Facility Restriction Levels (AFRL) allows a second set of facility restriction levels within a route pattern or for lines or trunks. Attendants and system administrators can activate the alternate FRLs and change users’ access to lines and trunks.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Answer detection 1142 ■ Some calls that are answered may be incorrectly classified as fast busy signals. ■ Call classifier circuit packs also don’t recognize Special Information Tones (SIT) as answers. Of course, the system generates a call record for any call that is classified as answered whether the classification is correct or not.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features ■ 1143 Call Prompting Call classification competes with Call Prompting for ports on the call classifier circuit pack. ■ CallVisor ASAI Call classification competes with CallVisor ASAI switch-classified calls for ports on the call classifier circuit pack. Answer Detection triggers reporting of a connect event to ASAI.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features 1144 Attendant Call Waiting Attendant Call Waiting allows an attendant-originated or attendant-extended call to a busy single-line telephone to wait at the called telephone so that the attendant can handle other calls. If you want the attendant to be able to send calls to busy single-line phones, set the Att.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features ■ 1145 Data Privacy, Data Restriction Activating Data Privacy or Data Restriction at the called telephone denies Attendant Call Waiting. ■ DDC and UCD Calls to a DDC or UCD group do not wait. However, they can enter the group queue, if provided. ■ Loudspeaker Paging Access Activating Loudspeaker Paging Access at the called telephone denies Attendant Call Waiting.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features ■ 1146 Cont (control) lamp Lights when the attendant activates Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access for the associated trunk group. Assign act-tr-grp and deact-tr-g buttons on the Attendant Console screen to allow the attendant to activate and deactivate control of the trunk group access.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features 1147 Enhanced DXS Tracking Enhanced DXS Tracking can help you if you have more than 100 telephones, but you use a console that does not have Hundreds Select buttons administered. It can also help if you have more telephones than you do Hundreds Select buttons (and thus have hundreds groups that are administered with Hundreds Select buttons).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features 1148 ■ If a call is already call waiting for the intruded party, the source (split from attendant) party cannot wait for the intruded party using Call Waiting. ■ The attendant display shows the character ‘1 wait’ or ‘1 busy’ if an intrusion is possible. Otherwise, the display shows ‘wait’ or ‘busy’.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features 1149 Attendant Vectoring Attendant Vectoring allows you to establish an attendant vector directory number (VDN) and send attendant group calls through vector processing. This is useful when you want more flexibility with how calls are routed when the system is in Night Service mode. For more information, see DEFINITY ECS Call Vectoring/EAS Guide.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features 1150 ■ Unanswered DID Call Timer — Specifies how long a DID call can go unanswered before it routes to the administered DID/TIE/ISDN Intercept Treatment. ■ Attendant Return Call Timer — For unanswered calls that were extended by the attendant, they are returned to the same attendant who released them if the attendant is available.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Attendant Features 1151 Interactions ■ Call Coverage If a telephone user transfers a call to an on-premises telephone and the call remains unanswered at the expiration of the Timed Reminder Interval, the call redirects to an attendant. Redirection occurs even if the call redirects via Call Coverage or Call Forwarding from the transferred-to telephone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Audible Message Waiting ■ 1152 Direct Trunk Group Selection Status button: voices the status of an attendant-monitored trunk group. Some changes on the attendant console are automatically voiced (for example, alarms reported, night service activated, and call thresholds reached).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Authorization codes 1153 NOTE: To maintain system security, Lucent recommends you use authorization codes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Authorization codes 1154 does not dial an authorization code or dials an incorrect authorization code, the call routes to the attendant, or routes to intercept tone, depending on system administration. Normally, Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks should not require authorization codes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Authorization codes 1155 Extreme care should be taken when administering authorization codes, so that a user does not have to dial the authorization code more than once. For example, if a user makes an AAR or ARS call and the user’s FRL is not high enough to access any of the trunks in the routing pattern, the system prompts the user for an authorization code.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Authorization codes 1156 ■ Incoming trunk calls that require authorization codes do not change user privileges. ■ AAR/ARS Partitioning Interactions Partitioned group numbers are assigned by COR and Authorization Codes can change Classes of Restriction. Therefore, Partitioned Group Numbers can be changed on incoming remote access calls by authorization codes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automated Attendant 1157 Refer to ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 865 for information concerning the sequence of trunk groups in which an attempt is made to route a call. Refer to ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 857 to permit authorized callers from remote locations to access your system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automated Attendant ■ 1158 CallVisor ASAI ASAI-provided digits can be collected by the Call Vectoring feature via the collect vector command as dial-ahead digits. CINFO is passed to CallVisor ASAI. ■ Hold If a call is put on hold during the processing of a collect command, the command restarts, beginning with the announcement prompt, when the call is taken off hold.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic Callback 1159 Refer to ‘‘Station’’ on page 882 for information on button assignments. Refer to ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 484 for information on button assignments. Automatic Callback Automatic Callback allows internal users who placed a call to a busy or unanswered internal telephone to be called back automatically when the called telephone becomes available.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic Callback 1160 Automatic callback for busy trunks You can administer your system to call users back if they try to place an outgoing call over a trunk group where all trunks are busy. This is sometimes called Ringback Queueing.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic Callback 1161 NOTE: If the automatic callback originator has all line appearances occupied when the automatic callback call comes in, the user will hear priority ringing once, and the automatic callback lamp will blink. However, if the user presses the automatic callback button to answer the automatic callback call, one of the other calls will drop.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic circuit assurance ■ 1162 DCS Automatic callback operates over a DCS network as if it were on a local switch. ■ Expert Agent Selection Users can’t activate Automatic Callback to an EAS agent’s Login ID. They can activate Automatic CallBack to the phone where the agent is logged in.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic circuit assurance 1163 The system records holding time from when a trunk is accessed to when it is released. You set short-holding-time and long-holding-time limits for each trunk group. The system then compares the recorded holding times against these limits. You enable ACA for the entire system, and administer thresholds for individual trunk groups.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic circuit assurance ■ Trunk group number, trunk access code, and trunk group member ■ The type of referral (short or long holding time) ■ Administrable Language Displays 1164 Interactions You cannot administer languages for ACA messages. ■ AUDIX Do not set the referral-call extension to a telephone that covers to AUDIX.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic Number Identification 1165 If your switch contains a voice-synthesis board, ACA referral calls are accompanied by an audible message identifying the type of ACA infraction encountered. The message is “Automatic circuit assurance or holding time threshold has been exceeded for trunk group <#> member number <#>.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic Number Identification 1166 Outgoing Automatic Number Identification Outgoing automatic number identification (ANI) applies to outgoing Russian multi-frequency (MF) ANI, R2-MFC ANI , and Spain Multi Frequency Espana (MFE) ANI trunks only. Use Outgoing ANI to specify the type of ANI to send on outgoing calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic routing — general ■ 1167 Hunt Groups and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Splits The phone’s extension and COR is used to determine ANI for a hunt group or ACD split. ■ Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) For call origination, multimedia complexes use the COR assigned to their phones.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Automatic routing — general 1168 Figure Notes 1. Input from phone, public network trunk, or private network trunk 2. Analyze digits to determine address type (First Digit Table) 3. Direct to AAR/ARS 4. Direct to Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) 5. Analyze digits using UDP to determine route 6. Delete and insert digits (AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Tables) Figure 55. Automatic Routing 7.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Automatic routing — general 1169 AAR AAR routes calls over private networks. When a user dials the AAR feature access code (normally 8 in North America) and phone number, AAR selects the least expensive route for the call in the private network and performs any digit conversion. If the first-choice route is not available, another route is chosen automatically.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Automatic routing — general 1170 NOTE: For service outside of North America, these defaults should be deleted. You can delete the defaults by entering change ARS analysis 0. Then use spaces to blank out all of the Dialed String entries. Table 13. ARS Digit Analysis Default Translations Total Digits Dialed String Min. Max.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Automatic routing — general 1171 Table 13. ARS Digit Analysis Default Translations — Continued Total Digits Dialed String Min. Max.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Barrier codes 1172 Interactions ■ Abbreviated Dialing The switch does not check the FRL on an AAR or ARS call that uses a privileged Abbreviated Dialing Group List.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Barrier codes 1173 Brief description Each barrier code must have a Class of Restriction (COR) and Class of Service (COS) assigned. Remote Access has inherent risks; it can lead to large-scale unauthorized long-distance use. To increase your system’s security use a 7-digit barrier code with Remote Access Barrier Code Aging.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1174 Bridged Call Appearance Bridged Call Appearance allows single-line and multiappearance telephone users to have an appearance of another user’s primary extension number. The bridged call appearance can be used to originate, answer, and bridge onto calls to or from the other user’s primary extension number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1175 ■ You can administer the call forwarding all calls and call forwarding busy/don’t answer buttons to activate Call Forwarding for any extension that is on the telephone, even if this extension is a bridged appearance. In addition, you can administer the lamp associated with the call forwarding button to track the call forwarding status of any extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1176 ■ If a call terminates at a telephone on an extension number other than the primary extension number (for example, terminating extension group (TEG), uniform call distribution (UCD) group, call coverage answer group, or direct department calling (DDC) group extension number), a bridged call appearance is not maintained.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1177 Interactions ■ Abbreviated Dialing A user, accessing Abbreviated Dialing while on a bridged call appearance, accesses their own Abbreviated Dialing lists. The user does not access the Abbreviated Dialing lists of the primary extension associated with the bridged call appearance. A user cannot use an abbreviated dialing FAC after using a priority calling FAC.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance ■ 1178 Call Coverage — Single-line telephones When an analog telephone is administered as a bridged call appearance, the telephone user cannot invoke Send All Calls for the extension of their telephone. The user does not have a send all calls button, and the call appearance is associated with another extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1179 with the appearance is recorded as the calling party. A conference or transfer by a bridged call appearance on a zero primary call appearances telephone also appears as though it were performed by the extension associated with the appearance.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1180 — Multiappearance telephones If a telephone receives ringing on a bridged call appearance, the incoming call can be picked up by members of that telephone’s call pickup group. This causes all bridged call appearances to be dropped. Calls ringing at a primary telephone can be picked up by members of the telephone’s call pickup group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1181 If a bridging user is active on a bridged call and the primary analog telephone user attempts a conference, the attempt is ignored. The same is true if an analog bridging user attempts a conference when the primary telephone user and another bridging user is active on a call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1182 You can administer the system to automatically select the first idle appearance if there is no idle appearance with an extension matching the extension that is conferencing the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance ■ 1183 Coverage Answer Group — Single-line telephones The primary (analog) telephone is not a member of a call coverage answer group, because calls to the primary telephone as a member of the group are not bridged. If the primary telephone is made a member of a coverage group, coverage criteria is based entirely on the criteria of the primary telephone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance 1184 bridging users until it is taken off hold by the primary telephone user. After the call is put on hard hold, any new call to the primary telephone is tracked by the bridged appearances. A bridging user can place an active call on hold (if the primary telephone or any other bridges are not active on the call) by using normal multiappearance hold procedures.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance ■ 1185 Internal Automatic Answer Calls terminating to a bridged appearance of an IAA-eligible telephone are not eligible for IAA. ■ Last Number Dialed Activation of the LND feature causes the last number dialed from the activating telephone to be redialed, regardless of the extension number used (primary or bridged call appearance).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance ■ 1186 Privacy-Manual Exclusion Exclusion prevents any other user from bridging onto the call. Activation of exclusion by any user (primary or bridged appearance) before placing a call, prevents any other user from bridging onto the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Bridged Call Appearance ■ 1187 Terminating Extension Group TEG calls to the primary extension do not ring at the associated bridged appearances. TEG calls cannot be answered or bridged onto from a bridged appearance of the TEG member’s primary extension. The primary telephone should not be assigned to a TEG.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Busy Indicator ■ 1188 Videophone 2500 (single-line telephones) A user may not use an analog bridge to a Videophone 2500 principal that is on a video call. ■ Voice Message Retrieval A voice message to the primary extension can be retrieved on a bridged appearance by the bridged appearance user.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Busy Verification 1189 Busy Verification Busy Verification (Verify button) allows attendants and specified multiappearance telephone users to make test calls to trunks, telephones, and hunt direct department calling (DDC) and uniform call distribution (UCD) groups.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Busy Verification 1190 Table 14.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Busy Verification 1191 Table 15. Verification of an ACD Split, UCD Group, or DDC Group r Split or Group Member Status Available for an incoming call System Response ■ Generates priority ringing at the member’s telephone ■ Processes the call as a normal attendant-originated call All activated Make Busy ■ Not available for incoming calls Result ■ Verification is complete.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Busy Verification 1192 Table 16. Verification of a Trunk Trunk Status System Response The trunk is idle and incoming. ■ The trunk is idle and outgoing. ■ The trunk is busy with an active call. The trunk is out of service. Result The system generates confirmation tone. ■ Verification is complete. ■ Anyone can use the trunk. The system generates dial tone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Busy Verification 1193 Interactions ■ Automatic Callback Once the called party in an Automatic Callback call hangs up, neither extension can be busy-verified until both the calling and called parties are connected or the callback attempt is canceled (by the activating party or by time-out of the callback interval).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Busy Verification ■ 1194 Loudspeaker Paging Access The system denies busy verification if the telephone or trunk to be verified is connected to paging equipment. ■ Transfer Once the originator of busy verification has bridged onto a call, any attempt to transfer the call is denied until the originator drops from the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Charge Information 1195 Call Charge Information DEFINITY ECS provides two ways to know the approximate charge for calls made on outgoing trunks: ■ Advice of Charge — for ISDN trunks Advice of Charge (AOC) collects charge information from the public network for each outgoing call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Charge Information ■ PCOL ■ WATS 1196 CDR Output The ISDN Call Charge or PPM field contains the last cumulative charge received from the network. If Call Splitting or Attendant Call Recording is enabled, and a call has been transferred for the first time, the ISDN Call Charge field contains the cumulative charge most recently received from the network.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Charge Information ■ Int-ISDN (International ISDN expanded) ■ Int-process ■ Unformatted (Enhanced 24-word standard ASCII) ■ If you want call charges to restart at 0 for calls that are forwarded or transferred, administer Outg Trk Call Splitting. 1197 Attendant consoles Automatic Charge Display Mode does not apply to attendant consoles.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Charge Information 1198 Interactions ■ Attendant Features Attendant consoles cannot have automatic charge display. If you want the attendant to see call charges, you must assign a disp-chrg button to the attendant console. If the attendant moves to transfer an outgoing call, the display returns to normal mode.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Charge Information 1199 two or more outgoing trunks are connected together via trunk-to-trunk transfer, the DEFINITY ECS may receive AOC information from the network for each outgoing trunk involved in the call. ■ CDR Adjuncts DEFINITY ECS does not tandem AOC information through a private network to other switches.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1200 Hold If a user places a call on hold, the display returns to normal mode. The user must press disp-chrg again to view call charges, or if automatic charge display is enabled, must wait for the display to refresh. ■ Last Number Dialed Users can view the dialed number while active on a call by pressing the stored-numb button, then the last-numb button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1201 For countries using the USA tone plan, a Call Classifier - Detector or Tone Clock/Call Classifier - Detector circuit pack is sufficient to provide call classification. For countries not using the USA tone plan, the Call Classifier - Detector and Tone Clock with Call Classifier - Tone Detector circuit packs must be configured appropriately to provide call classification.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1202 Call Classification Classifying a call means determining the state of the call at its final destination. That means whether the call was answered, received busy, reorder, intercept, special information tone (SIT), or other treatment.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1203 DEFINITY ECS allows for multiple coverage paths. However, for any particular call only one coverage path is used. The “lead” coverage path is the first coverage path in a chain that is considered when a call redirects to coverage. The chain is defined in the Next Path Name field on the Coverage Path screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1204 Call redirection criteria Redirection criteria determine the conditions under which a call redirects from the principal (called) extension to the first position in the coverage path. The criteria and conditions that apply are as follows: ■ Active Redirects calls to coverage immediately when the principal is active on at least one call appearance.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1205 Send All Calls/Go to Cover Allows users to activate Send All Calls or Go to Cover as an overriding coverage criteria. This redirection criteria must be assigned before a user can activate Send All Calls or Go to Cover (discussed later). ■ No Coverage Occurs when none of the above criteria are assigned.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1206 Go to Cover Go to Cover allows users, when calling to another internal extension, to send the call directly to coverage. This is optionally assigned to a button on a phone and is activated by the internal calling party. Use of Go to Cover is discussed later.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1207 Conditions that override Call Coverage Call Coverage provides redirection of calls from the called principal or group to alternate answering positions when certain criteria are met. Certain provisions allow calls to direct to and/or be answered by the principal even though the redirection or overriding criteria are met.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1208 An internal calling party is informed that a call is redirecting to coverage by a single, short burst of ringing, called a Call Coverage tone. This tone is followed by an optional period of silence, called a Caller Response Interval (administered on the System-Parameters Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1209 calls for the other group. A second call directed to a Coverage Answer Group lights a Coverage Incoming Call Identification (ICI) lamp, if administered. ■ Coverage Incoming Call Identification A Coverage ICI button can be assigned to multiappearance phone users without a display in a Coverage Answer Group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1211 DEFINITY ECS provides the means of performing call classification on an off-net coverage call to determine its disposition. If the off-net call is carried completely over ISDN facilities to its final destination, then ISDN trunk signaling is used to monitor the call. Otherwise, the system uses a call classifier port.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1212 DEFINITY ECS has no control over any redirection of the call that may take place at an off-net destination. However, further coverage treatment will be provided if the Off-Net Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval field expires before the call is answered off-net.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1213 Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls The Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls feature (also called telecommuting access) allows system users to change their lead-coverage path (or time of day table) or their call-forwarding designated destination from any on-site or off-site location.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1214 If the secretary is unavailable to answer the coverage call for the principal, the call redirects to a backup answering position. Personalized answering should also be provided at the backup position. ■ Middle Manager Coverage Provides a group of principals with call redirection to one or more covering users (such as a secretary).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage 1215 of time. Consult is needed to enable private consultation with the executive during an established call. Coverage ICI is needed to identify the call as a call to the executive rather than a personal call to the secretary. 5.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1216 Call Detail Recording When the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is y, a CDR record is generated only after the call has actually been answered off-net. The dialed number in the record is the off-net number to which the call covers. The calling number is the station that is covered to the off-net location.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1217 Class of Restriction and Controlled Restrictions Users who normally may be restricted from receiving calls still can receive calls directed to them via Call Coverage. ■ Conference The switch blocks users from conferencing another party onto a call which has routed off-net while that call is undergoing call classification.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1218 Hold If a covering user puts a call on hold, and the principal picks up on the call, the coverage appearance may or may not be dropped, depending on administration. If any party is on hold when a coverage call routes off-net, that call does not undergo call classification, even when the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is y.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Coverage ■ 1219 Simulated Bridged Appearance Calls redirected to coverage maintain an appearance on the called phone if a call appearance is available to handle the call. The called party can bridge onto the call at any time.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1221 Refer to ‘‘Setting up basic call coverage’’ on page 117 for instructions on administering basic call coverage. Refer to ‘‘Setting up advanced call coverage’’ on page 121 for instructions on administering advanced call coverage. Call Detail Recording CDR tracks call information on a per-trunk-group or station-to-station basis.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1222 Forced Entry of Account Codes You can force your users to enter account codes on a system-wide, per-trunk or per-user basis, or on the basis of the digit string the user dials. If you have this feature in place, the system rejects any call that requires an account code where one is not supplied.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1223 Call Splitting Call splitting keeps track of calls where more than two parties are involved. These can be calls that are transferred, conferenced, or where an attendant becomes involved. If you have call splitting activated and any of these situations arise, CDR produces a separate record for each new party on the call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1224 A, C and D continue to talk for another 5 minutes. All remaining parties drop, producing two more records; A–C and A–D. Note that each record shows the incoming trunk ID as the calling number. Table 17.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1225 OTCS examples In the next example, switch party A (57890) calls B(7771234), talks for 5 minutes, then conferences in C (7775678). They all talk for another 5 minutes, at which point all parties drop. Table 20.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1226 The attendant (Attd) dials switch party A (59999), then transfers the call to public-network party B (4445678). Table 23.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1227 Privacy CDR Privacy allows you to administer the system to blank a given number of dialed digits from a CDR report. This is useful when it is necessary to know details of a person’s calls for accounting purposes, but it is not necessary or desirable to know the exact number called. You can administer the number of digits to hide, up to 7.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1228 The following information applies to the port used for the secondary CDR output device: ■ Data going to the secondary port should be the same as that going to the primary port. You can use the following record types for secondary output: LSU, Int-Direct, Int-Process, and Unformatted.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1229 Table 24. Date Record Format to LSU, LSU-Expand, Unformatted, and Customized Position Data Field Description 6 Blank 7–8 Month (Leading Zero Added if Needed) 9 Slash (/) 10–11 Day (leading 0 added if needed) 12 Carriage return 13 Line feed 14–16 Null Table 25.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1230 Call Detail Record formats Customized format You can use the customized record format to make up your own call record. You can determine the data elements you want and their positions in the record. This method may be necessary if you want to include certain data elements that are not available on the standard formats.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1231 Table 27. CDR Data format — TELESEER Position Data Field Description 77 Carriage return 78 Line feed 79–81 Null Table 28.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1232 Table 29.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1233 Table 30.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1234 Table 31.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1235 Table 31. CDR Data Format — Printer — Continued Position Data Field Description 78–80 Outgoing circuit ID 81 Space 82 Feature flag 83 Carriage return 84 Line feed Continued on next page Table 32.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1236 Table 32. CDR Data Format — ISDN Printer — Continued Position Data Field Description 66 Space 67–68 INS (hundreds, tens) 69 Space 70 INS (units) 71 Space 72 FRL 73 Space 74–76 Incoming circuit ID 77 Space 78–80 Outgoing circuit ID 81 Space 82 Feature flag 83 Carriage return 84 Line feed Table 33.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1237 Table 33.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1238 Table 34.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1239 Table 34. CDR Data Format — LSU-Expand — Continued Position Data Field Description 67–68 Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units) 69 Space 70 Outgoing circuit ID (hundreds) 71 Space 72 Incoming circuit ID (hundreds) 73 IXC 74 Carriage return 75 Line feed 76–78 Null Table 35.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1240 Table 35. CDR Data Format — LSU — Continued Position Data Field Description 49 Feature flag 50–52 Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units, hundreds) 53 Incoming circuit ID (hundreds) 54 IXC 55 Carriage return 56 Line feed 57–59 Null Continued on next page Table 36.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1241 Table 36. CDR Data Format — ISDN LSU — Continued Position Data Field Description 53 Incoming circuit ID (hundreds) 54 FRL 55 Carriage return 56 Line feed 57–59 Null Continued on next page Table 37.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1242 Table 37. CDR Data Format — Enhanced LSU — Continued Position Data Field Description 54 FRL 55 Carriage return 56 Line feed 57–59 Null Continued on next page Table 38.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording Table 38.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording Table 38. 1244 CDR Data Format — Expanded — Continued Position Data Field Description 121–129 Reserved 130 Space 131 Carriage return 132 Line feed 133–135 Null Continued on next page Table 39.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1245 Table 39.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1246 Table 39.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1247 Table 40.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1248 Table 41.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1249 Table 41. CDR Data Format — Enhanced Unformatted — Continued Position Data Field Description 98–99 Bandwidth 100–105 ISDN CC (digits 1–6) 106–110 ISDN CC (digits 7–11)/PPM count (1–5) 111–114 Reserved for future use 115 Carriage return 116 Line feed 117–119 Null Continued on next page Table 42.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1250 Table 42.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1251 Table 43.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1252 Table 44.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1253 Table 44.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1254 Table 44. CDR Data Format — Int-ISDN — Continued Position Data Field Description 132 Carriage return 133 Line feed 134–136 Null Continued on next page Call detail record field descriptions The following list describes the CDR data collected for each call and the number of digits in each field.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1255 Authorization Code (auth-code) — 4–13 digits This field contains the authorization code used to make the call. For all formats except the custom format, codes longer than 7 digits are truncated, keeping only the first 7 digits. For non-ISDN and ISDN LSU formats, the authorization code is fewer than 6 digits in length. It is 5 for Enhanced LSU.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1256 Calling Number/Incoming TAC (clg-num/in-tac) You can use this field on a customized record to display the calling number if it is available. If calling party number is not available, this field contains the Incoming TAC. For outgoing calls, this field contains the calling extension.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1257 Table 45. Condition Codes — Continued Condition Codes 6 (E) Description Identifies calls that are not recorded because of resource exhaustion. A record with this condition code is generated for calls that are routed to the attendant or calls that require CDR to overwrite records.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1258 Table 45. Condition Codes — Continued Condition Codes Description H Indicates that a ringing call has been abandoned. I Indicates a call terminated to a busy station. J Indicates an incoming trunk call that is a new connection using ANF-PR (Additional Network Feature–Path Replacement, see QSIG) or DCS with Rerouting.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1259 Table 46.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1260 Date You can include the date in customized records only. The format is based on the value of the CDR Date Format field on the CDR System Parameters form. ■ Dialed Number (dialed-num) — up to 23 digits This field contains the number dialed. If it is an outgoing call, the field contains the number dialed by a system user.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1261 Feature Flag (feat-flag) — 1 digit The feature flag indicates whether a call received network answer supervision, and if the call was interworked in the network. The call duration starts at the point of receiving the network answer.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1262 — If the call is an outgoing call and an authorization code is used to make the call, this field contains the FRL associated with the dialed authorization code. — If the call is an incoming or tandem call, this field contains the FRL assigned to the incoming trunk group.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1263 INS (3 digits) This field specifies the ISDN Network Service requested for a call. This field applies only to ISDN calls. Each Network Specific Facility has a corresponding INS value, shown in Table 47. This field also appears as ISDN NSV (Network Service Value). Table 47.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1264 Users must dial an IXC access number to access a specific common carrier for a call. In the US, this number is in the form 10XXX, 950 — 1XXX, or any 8–11 digit number. The IXC access numbers applicable at a given location are associated with an IXC code on the Inter-Exchange Carrier Codes form.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1265 The format of this field varies from record to record. For printer, Teleseer and 59-character formats, and the ISDN and enhanced forms of those records, the numbers appear inverted on the record. For example, the circuit ID 123 appears as 231 (tens, units, hundreds).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1266 Table 48. Encoding for TSC Flag Encoding Meaning 0 Circuit-switched call without TSC requests 1–3 Reserved 4 Call Associated TSC requested and accepted in response to SETUP, no congestion control (applicable to originating node). Call Associated TSC received and accepted via SETUP, no congestion control (applicable to terminating node).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1267 Time This fields contains the time that the call ended, or the time that a user dropped from a multi-party call, if Call Splitting is active. ■ VDN (vdn) — 5 digits This field is only available on customized records. The call record contains the VDN extension number. If VDN Return Destination is active, this field contains the first VDN the caller accessed.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1268 If the attendant allows through dialing, the primary extension of the user who dialed the number is recorded as the calling party. Condition Code 1 indicates that a trunk access code was extended by the attendant. Condition Code 7 indicates that a feature access code was extended by the attendant.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1269 Authorization Codes Authorization codes are recorded on CDR records provided account codes do not exceed 5 digits for non-ISDN and ISDN LSU formats, or 4 digits for Enhanced LSU formats. On the 59-character CDR International Processing and International Direct records, the authorization code is never recorded.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1270 Automatic Callback When the Automatic Callback feature is used for an intraswitch call, no CDR record is generated for the first call attempt or the ringback. However, if the caller or extension being called is optioned for intraswitch CDR, a record of the actual call is output provided the call is answered and completed.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1271 Call Forwarding All Calls When a call is forwarded to another extension, the extension number dialed by the calling party is recorded as the dialed number. If a call is forwarded to an off-net location, the dialed number is the number of the off-net location, the calling number is the number of the station that is forwarded to the remote location.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1272 — If the call terminates to a trunk, CDR generates the following two records: ■ An incoming record with the incoming TAC as the dialed number. ■ An outgoing record with the incoming TAC as the calling number and the digits dialed through the vector step as the dialed number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording 1273 For a conference call, a separate CDR record is produced for each outgoing/incoming trunk serving the conference call. If ITCS or OTCS is enabled, CDR produces a separate record for each internal party on the call as well.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1274 Expert Agent Selection A logical extension can be assigned to an agent who can log into a phone using that extension number. On the CDR System Parameters screen, you can chose to record the agent’s logical extension as the called number rather than the hunt-group extension or hunt-group-member extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1275 Manual Originating Line Service If an attendant establishes an outgoing call for a user, designated as a Manual Originating Line, the CDR record for the call is the same as for any attendant-assisted outgoing call. The calling extension is recorded as the calling number, and Condition Code 1 applies.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1276 Remote Access Remote Access calls are recorded if Remote Access is provided on a per trunk group basis (incoming destination is the remote access number), and those trunks are administered for CDR. The call record gives no indication that this is a remote access call, other than the trunk group access code.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Detail Recording ■ 1277 Transfer If a user originates a call on an outgoing trunk and then transfers the call to another extension, the originating extension is recorded as the calling party. If a user receives a call on an incoming trunk and then transfers the call to another extension, the extension that originally received the call is recorded as the dialed number.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding 1278 transferred until both parties drop. The incoming call record shows the duration from the time the station receives the incoming trunk call until both parties drop.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding 1279 ■ Call Forwarding Off Net— Allows a user to forward calls to an off-net destination. ■ When the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is activated, calls can be monitored for call progress tones, and if a call is not answered, it returns to the DEFINITY ECS for call coverage processing in some circumstances.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding 1280 If the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen and the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field on the System Parameters - Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen are both set to y, the system allows calls forwarded off-net to be monitored for busy or no-answer conditions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding 1281 Warning users if their calls are redirected You can warn analog phone users if they have features active that may redirect calls. For example, if the user has activated call forwarding, you can administer a setting to play a special dial tone when the user goes off-hook. See ‘‘Special Dial Tone’’ on page 656 for more information.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding 1282 Attendant Calls to attendants cannot be forwarded. However, calls can be forwarded to the attendant group. The attendant cannot have a Call Forwarding button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding 1283 Interactions ■ Answer Detection This feature shares call-classifier resources with the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net feature. ■ Attendant Override of Diversion Features If an attendant uses redirection override to call a user who has Call Forwarding active, the call does not forward and remains at the user’s phone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding ■ 1284 Call Detail Recording When a call is forwarded to an off-net number, the call is recorded in CDR records as a call from the forwarding station. When the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is y, a CDR record is generated only after the call has actually been answered off net.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding ■ 1285 Expert Agent Selection Agents logged in with EAS enabled cannot activate or deactivate Call Forwarding. The physical extension where the EAS agent is logged in can be forwarded, but the EAS agent must first log out. Then, the phone can be forwarded.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Forwarding ■ 1286 Send All Calls If an extension has both Send All Calls and Call Forwarding All Calls activated, calls to that extension that can immediately be redirected to coverage are redirected. However, other calls, such as Priority Calls, are forwarded to the designated extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Park 1287 Call Park Call Park allows users to put a call on hold and then retrieve the call from any other telephone within the system. You can set a system-wide expiration interval for parked calls. If a call is not answered within the interval, the parked call redirects to an attendant or to the user who activated Call Park (the parking user).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Park 1288 ■ If all appearances on a parked telephone are busy and no attendant or night-service extensions are configured when the call park timeout expires: — A parked call is dropped if no coverage path is assigned — A parked call is not dropped if a coverage path is assigned.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Pickup 1289 ■ Drop If a digital-telephone user parks a call and then pushes the drop button, the call is unparked. If the parked call is from an internal digital-telephone user, pushing the drop button does not drop the call. The parking user must hang up to drop the call. ■ Loudspeaker Paging Access Calls to paging zones cannot be parked.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Pickup 1290 If a user’s telephone has a Call Pickup button and status lamp, then: ■ The status lamp lights steadily when Call Pickup is used. ■ If Call Pickup Alerting is activated, members’ status lamps flash when a call comes in to any extension in the call pickup group. Group members other than the called party, can answer using Call Pickup.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Pickup 1291 Considerations ■ A telephone can be a member of only one call pickup group. ■ When a call pickup group member is away from his or her telephone and receives a call, other call pickup group members’ telephones do not ring.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Pickup 1292 ■ Call Coverage You can use Directed Call Pickup to answer a redirected call alerting at a covering user’s telephone if there is a call-coverage temporary bridged appearance. ■ Call Detail Recording The extension number dialed by the caller is recorded as the dialed number in CDR.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Pickup 1293 ■ Hold If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is not enabled and a user puts a call answered with Directed Call Pickup on hold, the called party cannot answer the call because a temporary bridged appearance is maintained.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call Waiting Termination ■ 1294 Privacy — Manual Exclusion In the following case, the called party is not dropped when Privacy — Manual Exclusion is activated. A call is made to Station A and Station B picks it up using Call Pickup. Station A bridges onto the call by going off-hook on its call appearance. Station B activates Privacy — Manual Exclusion.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call-by-Call Service Selection 1295 Considerations ■ An analog telephone user must place the active call on soft hold and dial the Answer Hold-Unhold feature access code to answer the waiting call. ■ If an analog single-line telephone has Call Waiting enabled and has initiated a conference call, Call Waiting is denied.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call-by-Call Service Selection 1296 Brief description Call-by-Call Service Selection uses the same route patterns and route preferences that are used by Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR), Automatic Route Selection (ARS), and Generalize Route Selection (GRS).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call-by-Call Service Selection 1297 r773197 CJL 060396 Figure Notes 1. DEFINITY ECS 2. Megacom trunk group 3. Megacom 800 trunk group 4. SDN trunk group 5. OUTWATS trunk group 6. Call-by-Call Service Selection trunk group 7. Public-switched network 8. Without Call-by-Call Service Selection 9.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call-by-Call Service Selection 1298 NOTE: When the DEFINITY ECS is connected to 5ESS, all of the services supported under the Lucent Technologies and NI-2 country options are available. Screens used to administer Call-by-Call Service Selection You administer Call-by-Call Service Selection on a per trunk group basis.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call-by-Call Service Selection 1299 ISDN messages and information elements for usage allocation Understanding the technical details of ISDN messages and information elements may help you implement ISDN. Call-by-Call Service Selection allows the system to specify one of the preceding service types on a call-by-call basis.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Call-by-Call Service Selection 1300 A UAP allows the customer to set the following options: ■ Maximum number of trunks that each service can use at any given time.The sum for all services may exceed the total number of trunk-group members.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Call-by-Call Service Selection 1301 following 4 columns. If an incoming call matches more than one set of specifications, the most restrictive case applies. The following table lists the possible cases from most restrictive to least restrictive.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Calling Party/Billing Number 1302 Interactions ■ Multiquest Flexible Billing Do not use a Service/Facility with the Facility Type field set to 2 or 3. NSF processing is not performed for Facility Type 2. An NSF is not included in the outgoing SETUP message for Facility Type 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Calling Party Number Restriction 1303 Related topics Refer to ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1394 for an overview of ISDN capabilities. Refer to the DEFINITY ECS Guide to ACD Call Centers for information on using Calling Party Number and Billing Number with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Inbound Call Management. Complete all screens required to administer ACD.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Class of Restriction 1304 Class of Restriction You use Class of Restriction (COR) to define the types of calls your users can place and receive. Your system may have only a single COR, a COR with no restrictions, or as many CORs as necessary to effect the desired restrictions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Class of Restriction 1305 Inward restrictions You can use inward restrictions to permit users to receive only internal calls. Inward restrictions prohibit users at assigned telephones from receiving public-network, attendant-originated, and attendant-extended calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Class of Restriction 1306 Termination restrictions You can use termination restrictions to prohibit users from receiving any calls. These users can still originate calls. DID or Advanced Private-Line Termination calls route to a recorded announcement or the attendant. Fully restricted service Fully restricted service prevents specific users from making or receiving public-network calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Class of Restriction 1307 Interactions ■ AAR/ARS Originating FRLs are assigned via a COR. Termination and Miscellaneous Restrictions do not apply to ARS/AAR calls. ■ AAR/ARS Partitioning Partition Group Numbers are assigned via a COR.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Class of Restriction ■ 1308 Tie-Trunk Access Incoming dial-repeating tie-trunk calls can be completed directly to an inward-restricted or public-restricted extension but cannot be extended by an attendant to an inward-restricted telephone. ■ Transfer Incoming trunk calls cannot be transferred to an inward-restricted extension when a 3-way COR check is made.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Conference 1310 ■ If an analog single-line set has Call Wait active and creates a conference call, Call Wait is rendered inactive as long as the single-line set is on the call. For example, caller A on an analog set talks to caller B, flashes to talk to caller C, and flashes to conference B and C. Then, if caller D calls caller A, Call Wait is denied.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Restriction — Controlled ■ 1311 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer When a multifunction telephone (BRI/Digital/Hybrid) dials sufficient digits to route a call, but could route differently if additional digits were dialed, the telephone does not recognize the Conference or Transfer buttons.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Restriction — Controlled 1312 ■ Termination — The telephone cannot receive any calls. Incoming calls are routed to the attendant, are redirected via Call Coverage, or receive intercept treatment. ■ Station-to-Station — The telephone cannot place or receive station-to-station calls. ■ Toll — The telephone cannot place toll calls but can place free local calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Crisis Alert 1313 ■ Uniform Call Distribution Calls dialed through the UDP are not restricted by Outward Restriction. Crisis Alert Crisis Alert notifies designated extensions when an emergency call is made, and indicates the origin of the emergency call. This information allows the attendant or other user to direct emergency-service response to the caller.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Crisis Alert 1314 NOTE: The crisis alert call uses 2-4 trunks; 1 trunk for the actual call and 1-3 trunks to notify the pager(s) depending on the number of administered pagers. Information about the alert can be viewed on the history report printed at the journal printer and the emergency log. Considerations ■ Only one crss-alert button is allowed per attendant console or digital station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Dial Plan 1315 Dial Plan This is the system’s guide to digit translation. When the system receives dialed digits, it must know what to expect next based on the digits received so far. For example, if a user dials 4, the system must know how many more digits to expect before the call is processed.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Dial Plan 1316 ■ Although extensions with the same first digit can have different lengths, data-channel extensions must have the maximum number of digits to avoid timeout problems for data calls that the switch automatically sets up, for example, the Call Detail Recording (CDR) link.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Distinctive Ringing 1317 Distinctive Ringing Distinctive Ringing provides several ringing cycles to help telephone users and attendants distinguish between incoming call types. Administer Distinctive Audible Alerting on Feature-Related System Parameters for internal, external, priority, and attendant originated calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference DS1 Trunk Service 1318 protocols. T1 trunk service multiplexes 24 channels into a single 1.544-Mbps data stream. E1 trunk service multiplexes 32 channels into a single 2.048-Mbps stream. Both T1 and E1 provide a digital interface for trunk groups. For information about how to administer DS1 with enhanced administration, refer to ‘‘Signaling modes’’ on page 1320.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference DS1 Trunk Service 1319 DS1 operational and signaling parameters The table below provides the recommended combination of parameters for each DS1 interface. DS1 Circuit Packs # Trunk Members Bit Rate Mbps Companding Signaling Mode TN722 1-23 1.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference DS1 Trunk Service DS1 Circuit Packs TN464C, D, E, F3, and TN2464 TN2242 # Trunk Members 1320 Bit Rate Mbps Companding 1-24 1-23 (24th is D-chan) 1.5444 1-31 (16th is D-chan) 2.048 1-24 1.5444 1-31 2.048 1-30 alaw/mulaw Signaling Mode Trunk Type1 robbed-bit CO/DID/Tie isdn-pri4 ISDN ISDN alaw/mulaw isdn-ext4 ISDN 2.048 alaw/mulaw CAS CO/DID/Tie 1-30 2.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference DS1 Trunk Service 1321 Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is similar to common-channel signaling and is used only when the Bit Rate is 2.048 Mbps (the trunk is used with an E1 interface). Signaling is carried on the 16th channel. Common-channel signaling and channel associated signaling provide a maximum transmission rate of 64 Kbps for bearer channels.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Emergency Access to the Attendant 1323 Emergency Access to the Attendant Emergency Access to the Attendant alerts an attendant if a telephone remains off-hook for more than the administered period of time. It also enables a user to place an emergency call to an attendant. Detailed description Emergency calls can be placed automatically by the system or dialed by system users.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Emergency Access to the Attendant ■ Time of the call ■ The following known call results: 1324 — Call Completed — Call answered at attendant or listed directory number (LDN) night extension. — Queue Full — Emergency-access queue is full; tries to redirect the call to an emergency-access redirection extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Emergency Access to the Attendant 1325 Interactions ■ Centralized Attendant Service For a branch with CAS in effect, an emergency call reroutes to the branch attendant group. If the branch does not have an attendant or if the branch is not in CAS Backup Service, the call is denied.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls 1327 Emergency Transfer panels are available in multiples of five telephones, which may be pulse-dialing or touch-tone phones. You must use pulse dialing if the CO accepts dial pulses only. Each telephone can be connected to a separate CO. When your system is not in Emergency Transfer mode, transfer phones can be used as regular telephone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls 1328 If you are operating in a Distributed Communications System (DCS) environment, you need to assign a different telecommuting-access extension to each switch and tell your users which extension they should use.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls 1329 How to use from an off-site location To use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from off-site, you must first access the telecommuting-access extension. If you make the request via Direct Inward Dialing (DID), you must precede the extension with the correct public-network prefix.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls ■ 1330 Call Coverage Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls interacts with this feature only in that system users can change their lead-coverage path. An attempt to activate Send All Calls is denied if the currently active coverage path does not allow Send All Calls in its coverage criteria.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling 1331 Refer to ‘‘Telecommuting Access’’ on page 951 for information about and field descriptions on the telecommuting screen. Refer to ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 857 for information about and field descriptions on the Remote Access screen. Refer to ‘‘Setting up remote access’’ on page 297 for information about configuring remote access.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling 1332 Brief Description D-Channel Backup with NFAS When NFAS is used, a backup D-channel can be administered to improve reliability. The system switches to the backup D-channel if a signaling link failure occurs on the primary D-channel span.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling 1333 Together, this pair of D-channels signals for all 70 (23+24+23) B-channels in the 3 Primary Rate Interfaces. Since the D-channels are signaling for more than one ISDN-PRI facility, D-Channel Backup requires the use of NFAS.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling 1334 Guidelines for administering FAS and NFAS Coordinate the following when implementing FAS and NFAS: ■ Decide which T1/E1 facilities will use FAS. ■ Decide which of the remaining T1/E1 facilities carries D-channel signaling information on the 16th (E1) or 24th (T1) channel.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling 1335 The Interface Link and associated forms may be administered at any time after the DS1 screens have been administered, with the following restrictions: ■ A D-channel cannot be assigned on a Signaling Group screen unless the associated link is disabled.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks 1338 Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks Facility Restriction Levels (FRL) and Travelling Class Marks (TCM) allow certain calls to specific users, and deny the same calls to other users.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks 1339 Access assigned, the individual attendant’s COR FRL is used. Data terminals use the FRL of the COR assigned to the associated data module. A remote access call uses the FRL of the COR assigned to the dialed barrier code.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Generalized route selection 1341 Detailed description GRS recognizes one or more Bearer Capability Class (BCC) for each trunk group preference in the route pattern. BCC defines the type of information being sent as voice or data. The switch checks the BCC for all trunk groups to see if the route selected and type of call are compatible.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Generalized route selection 1342 Example Assume a route pattern is set up with BCC 0 and BCC 2 set to yes in preference 1, and BCC 1, BCC 3, and BCC 4 set to yes in preference 2. A voice or Mode 2 data call accessing this pattern uses preference 1. A Mode 1, Mode 3, or Mode 0 data call uses preference 2, regardless of what trunks are available in the first preference.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Group paging 1343 Legend BCC Type DCP/DM I Mode 0 Voice-Grade Data and Voice None 1 56 kbps Data (Mode 1) 1 2 64 kbps Data (Mode 2) 2 3 64 kbps Data (Mode 3) 3 4 64 kbps Data (Mode 0) 0 Related topics Refer to ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 865 for information on how to set up route patterns.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Group paging 1344 Controlling access to paging groups Each paging group is assigned a class of restriction, so you can provide or deny access to different classes of users by setting calling permissions appropriately. Note that you can administer classes of restriction so remote callers can make speakerphone pages.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Group paging ■ 1345 Call Forwarding Group pages cannot be forwarded. ■ Conference Neither group members receiving a page nor the originator of the page can conference the page to other extensions. ■ Distributed Communications System (DCS) Page groups cannot be administered across DCS switches. DCS is not supported.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1346 NOTE: If a vector has a collect digits step and a route-to digits step, a person who uses the vector can enter a page group extension. Ensure that the COR of the vector restricts the vector from calling the page group if this action is not desired. Related topics Refer to ‘‘Paging over speakerphones’’ on page 381 to administer group paging.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1347 When the attendant activates check-in/check-out mode, the DXS lamps light for every occupied room. Maid Status You can allow the attendant to review the maid status by assigning a maid-stat button on the Attendant Console screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1348 Interactions ■ Coverage XDID ports perform hunt-to before coverage. After hunting, coverage criteria for these calls is based upon the Direct Inward Dialing (DID), but the coverage points are based upon the hunted-to phone (room). ■ Coverage Do not assign a COS with Client Room enabled for the XDID station types.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1349 If a wakeup-call attempt is not answered or if the extension is busy, the system tries two more times at 5-minute intervals. If the call does not complete after 3 attempts, the switch leaves a LWC message for a designated extension (usually assigned to a button on the attendant console or backup phone).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1350 The attendant presses the automatic wakeup entry button to activate the feature. If the attendant is on an active call with a system user, the user’s extension displays as the default extension after pressing the pound sign (#). If the displayed extension is not the extension of the user requesting the wakeup call, the attendant can change it.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1351 If a wakeup call is incomplete because of a busy, no answer, ringing blockage, or system reset, the system attempts to place the call 2 more times at 5-minute intervals. If the call is not completed after 3 attempts, the system leaves an LWC message to account for the failed attempt.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1352 — Swap — A room swap occurs and at least one of the rooms has a wakeup request. Wakeup calls swap when a room swap is performed. A journal entry is made for each room. If the room receives a wakeup call as the result of the swap, the time of the call is provided in the entry.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1353 You can administer a multiple announcement to repeat. To enable repeating announcements, enter announcement type integ-rep command on the Recorded Announcement screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1354 If the Wakeup Activation via Tone is enabled, the auto wakeup interface from the Speech Synthesizer circuit pack is disabled. The Do Not Disturb interface still operates.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1355 The lamp associated with the Do Not Disturb button lights until the feature is deactivated with the button. An automatic-deactivate time is not provided. Activation by Attendant The attendant can activate the feature for a user or a group of users. (The assigned class of restriction (COR) determines which users are in the group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features ■ The number of available speech-synthesis ports is the only limit on the number of users receiving voice prompting. ■ Automatic Callback 1356 Interactions Do Not Disturb does not block an Automatic Callback call. Return calls terminate at a phone in the normal way.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1357 Names Registration Names Registration automatically sends a guest’s name and room extension from the PMS to the switch at check-in, and automatically removes this information at checkout.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1358 Guest Information Input/Change Use Guest Information Input/Change to change the guest name associated with an extension, input a guest name after check-in, or change a call-coverage path. For example, hotel may check in airline personnel before their arrival to guarantee their reservation.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1359 Interactions ■ Call Coverage Call-coverage arrangements are not limited to automatic update during check-in messages sent from PMS. Hotel personnel require coverage points other than those designated for guests. Call-coverage paths can be manually administered at the switch via the management terminal.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1360 Detailed description Table 52 summarizes how the hospitality features are activated when you use only the switch and when you use the PMS. Table 52.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1361 Table 52.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1362 When the PMS link is down, the switch automatically activates Check-In/Check-Out for the attendant console and front-desk terminal with display capability, and continues to support PMS features activated from guest/patient-room phones.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features ■ Guest’s name ■ Call Coverage path 1363 Message Waiting Notification Message Waiting Notification requests originate from attendant consoles, front-desk terminals, or PMS terminals. When a request is entered, PMS sends a message to the switch to change the state of the Message Waiting lamp.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1364 Housekeeping Status Your housekeeping staff enters status information from phones in guest/patient rooms or from designated terminals.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1365 Room Change/Room Swap Room Change/Room Swap is provided only through PMS and activated from a PMS terminal. With Room Change, data pertaining to the old room — including a pending wakeup request, the guest’s name (transparent/ASCII mode), and the guest’s call-coverage path (transparent/ASCII mode) — moves to the new room.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features 1366 Considerations ■ You can use Leave Word Calling (LWC) or Integrated Message Center Service for the hospital or hotel/motel staff and Message Waiting Notification for guests/patients. However, if you do not use Message Waiting Notification, Integrated Message Center Service is used for both. ■ Do not remove an extension while the PMS link is active.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hospitality features ■ 1367 Leave Word Calling (LWC) Message lamps activated by this feature cannot deactivate with Manual Message Waiting feature buttons. If Room Change is active, LWC messages for the old room do not move to the new room. If Room Swap is active, LWC messages for the two rooms do not swap. Therefore, do not encourage use of LWC in guest rooms.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups ■ 1368 Dial By Name Since the secondary phones that are checked-in insert a "*" before the name, they do not appear when Dial By Name is used. However, the name (with the "*" in front of it) appears when the phone dials the attendant or another display set.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups 1369 Detailed description The following sections describe how a hunt group works. Hunting methods The system uses one of two types of hunting method to distribute calls: Direct department calling The system hunts for an available extension in the hunt group, always starting with the first extension in the group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups 1370 If all hunt-group members are unavailable or the queue is full, the system treats the call as follows: ■ If the call is internal or is carried on a Direct Inward Dialing (DID), DS1, or tie trunk, the caller hears busy tone. ■ If the call is on a central office trunk, the caller hears ringing, but gets no answer.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups 1371 If Call Coverage is provided, the Don’t Answer interval (one to 99 ringing cycles) may also begin when the call enters the queue. After these intervals begin, one of the following occurs: ■ If the Don’t Answer interval expires before the delay announcement interval expires, the call redirects to coverage.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups 1372 member becomes available, the first call in queue connects to that group member. The queue warning-level lamp turns off because the number of calls in queue fell to four. How hunt group extensions become unavailable An extension in a hunt group becomes unavailable to receive calls if the hunt group member is already handling a call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups 1373 NOTE: If an extension is an ACD split agent as well as a hunt-group member, the split agent normally has an AUX-WORK button that also activates/deactivates Hunt Group Busy. If an agent is the last available member and they push AUX-WORK, the button’s light flashes until the queue is empty. This means the agent is still available.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups 1374 When you change an ACD split to a non-ACD hunt group, each split agent must enter the Hunt Group Busy deactivation code in order to receive calls in that hunt group. If the agent has an AUX-WORK button, the button lamp lights when you make the change. The agent can then press the button to become available for hunt-group calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Hunt Groups 1375 Interactions ■ Attendant Call Waiting Attendant Call Waiting does not work for calls that the attendant sends to a hunt group. It does work for calls to individual hunt-group members. ■ Attendant Return Call Attendant Return Call does not work for calls that the attendant sends to a hunt group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Incoming Call Line Identification ■ 1376 Queuing Queuing does not work with circular station hunting. ■ Terminating Extension Group A Terminating Extension Group cannot be a member of a hunt group. ■ Vectoring Call vectoring does not work with circular station hunting.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Intercom 1377 Interactions ■ Distributed Communications System (DCS) If the DEFINITY ECS has both DCS and ISDN displays, the ICLID information displays in DCS formats. Intercom If you have users who call each other frequently, you can help them communicate more quickly.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Intercom 1378 Phones ■ You can assign any type of phone to an intercom group. However, only multiappearance phones can make and receive intercom calls. Single-line phones can only receive intercom calls. Multiappearance phones must have at least one open or available call appearance to receive intercom calls. ■ Phones receiving an intercom call make a unique alerting sound.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Internal Automatic Answer 1379 Internal Automatic Answer Internal Automatic Answer (IAA) provides convenient hands-free answering of internal calls to users on multifunction stations with a speakerphone or a headphone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Internal Automatic Answer 1380 IAA Feature Operations With IAA, you can assign a single programmable feature button (IAA) to telephones. When the user presses the IAA feature button, the button lamp lights and the system activates IAA. Pressing the same button again deactivates IAA and turns off the status lamp.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Internal Automatic Answer ■ 1381 Bridged Call Appearance — Multiappearance Telephone Calls terminating on a bridged call appearance are not eligible for IAA at the bridged station, even if the bridged station has IAA active. (IAA can be used by the principal station to answer the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Internal Automatic Answer ■ 1382 Conference Internal conference calls can be answered automatically via IAA. If more than one party has joined a conference call through automatic answer, the parties remain connected until they disconnect or the controlling party drops the call. ■ Data Call Setup Data calls are not eligible for IAA.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1383 IP trunk service DEFINITY ECS allows you to route voice and real time fax calls over Internet Protocol (IP) networks such as private intranets, reducing long-distance charges and giving you added flexibility in routing traffic between sites.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1384 Destination IP trunk application Receives a connection indication and the digits sent by the origin IP trunk application. Performs any local digit translations and delivers the call to the destination switch. Destination switch Detects the incoming call and receives digits. Rings the phone associated with that number. Called party Answers the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1385 Possible sites for originating a call to Terminating Site-1 are labeled O1 (for Originating Site-1), O2, and so on. A call can terminate on a telephone connected to the switch at T1, or it can be routed “off-premise” to terminating sites T2, T3, or T4.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1386 Now consider an example where off-premise dialing is configured. When O1 calls T2 over the IP network (via the T1 switch), the user at O1 dials the exchange of T2, not T1. Therefore, O1 has to be administered to route the call through T1, and T1 has to change the digit string to route the call to T2. Similarly, let’s say O3 calls T4 via the T1 switch.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1387 This is where your AAR or ARS route pattern comes into play. Typically, a route pattern for an IP trunk group uses the IP trunk group as its primary route and assigns one or more conventional trunk groups as alternate routes. Whenever the IP trunk group is blocked, DEFINITY ECS automatically routes its traffic over one of the alternate trunk groups you’ve administered.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1388 PSTN Example For example, say you create trunk group 10 and assign its members to the first 12 potts on the IP trunk circuit pack. Then you create a route pattern (for example, 5) with trunk group 10 for the first route preference and the trunk group for PSTN access for the second route preference.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1389 PSTN Fallback is used with multiple remote sites 1. Create a separate trunk group for the channels of each line pool. 2. Create a separate route pattern for each trunk group. Each route pattern should contain the IP trunk group as the primary route and a PSTN trunk group as the secondary route. 3.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1390 NOTE: Once you start the IP trunk CDR function in Configuration Manager, you can’t turn it off except by editing the c:\its\bin\its.ini. To turn IP trunk CDR logging off, change the entry “CdrSwitch=” to 0 in the its.ini file. The DEFINITY ECS application logs call detail records and error messages.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1391 Field Number Position Name Explanation 1 1–4 Start Time Start time of a call. 4 digits: HHMM (Hours.Minutes) (24-hour time format) 2 6 – 10 Duration The duration of the call in seconds. 3 12 Condition Code 1, call from PSTN 2, call from INET 3, call with error 4 14 – 45 Dialed Number The dialed number (right-justified).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1392 automatic PSTN fallback mechanism. A file may be empty if there have been no blocks or unblocks of any line pools, and if monitoring for any of the line pools was never started. A new log file is created every time the service is started.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference IP trunk service 1393 2. Click Performance Monitor. The three QoS parameters will be available for charting or logging under the object QOSMon. 3. Click Close. Making phone calls with computers H.323 is a set of standards for transmitting voice calls over an IP network. A number of Windows-based applications allow telephone calls to be made from one H.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1394 ISDN ■ ISDN features such as 10-digit number display, QSIG , and path replacement do not work over IP trunk. Related topics Refer to the DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network Connectivity for more information on managing IP trunks, including complete administration instructions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1395 ■ Electronic Tandem Networks (ETN) ■ Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) and Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) (Only ISDN-PRI supports this.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1396 Refer to the DEFINTY services documentation for information about the following screens: ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments, Network Facilities (supports usage allocation used in Call-by-Call Service Selection), and Signaling Group (used to define a group of B-channels for which a given D-channel or D-channel pair carries signaling information).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1397 As an example of how ISDN is used in private- and public-network configurations , see the following figures. For example, ISDN can be used to connect a switch to a public-switched network, to other switches, and to computers: Figure Notes 1. DEFINITY ECS 3. Public switched network 2. ISDN trunk 4.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1398 access to several features. For a description of the services accessible via ISDN (either via dedicated or call-by-call trunk groups), refer to ‘‘Call-by-Call Service Selection’’ on page 1295. Call Identification Display ISDN Call Identification Display provides a transparent name and number display for all display-equipped telephones within an ISDN network.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1399 r781861 CJL 060996 Figure Notes 1. ISDN trunk 6. Existing interface 2. SID/ANI 7. Host computer 3. DEFINITY ECS 8. Telephone 4. BX.25 9. ACD agent position 5. ISDN Gateway 10.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1400 Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection (ARS) are used with ISDN and DS1 trunking facilities to access ETN facilities. AAR and ARS are used to collect the dialing information for the call that is originated from the main switch. DCS services ISDN-PRI facilities can be used in a DCS arrangement whenever tie trunks are used to connect the DCS nodes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1401 National ISDN-2 Services DEFINITY ECS supports National ISDN-2 (NI-2), which offers many of the same services as the AT&T Switched Network protocol. The NI-2 protocol is used when the DS1 circuit pack is administered for Country Code 1, Protocol Version b.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1402 ISDN interworking ISDN interworking allows calls to use a combination of both ISDN and non-ISDN trunking and station facilities. A non-ISDN trunking facility is any trunk facility supported by the system that does not use the ITU-T recommended Q.931 message set for signaling.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1403 Call Identification Display Two types of identification numbers are provided with ISDN and may be used in the various types of displays used with ISDN. The two types of identification numbers are as follows: ■ Calling Party Number (CPN): A 0–15 digit DDD number associated with a specific station.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1404 calls incoming to a DEFINITY ECS. The 0–15 digit number of the party who answers the call is provided to the ISDN network only if the incoming ISDN trunk group is administered to send connected number to the network and ISDN public-unknown numbering or ISDN private numbering forms are administered to create a CPN.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1405 — Connected Party Display The connected party is the party who answers the redirected call. a= CALLING ID to CALLED ID R The R indicates the reason for redirection. The CALLING ID and the CALLED ID may be the name or the number, depending on the information received from the far end.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1406 Malicious Call Trace (MCT) ISDN calling number identification is sent when MCT notification is activated on an ISDN trunk. Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) - Limited The ISDN standard MSN feature lets you assign multiple extensions to a single BRI endpoint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference ISDN service 1407 can override the DCS called name and number if the Display Connected Name/Number for ISDN DCS Calls field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. BRI trunks support DCS if using a BX.25 link to transport the DCS messages. DCS+, also known as DCS Over ISDN D-Channel, according to the AT&T protocol, is not supported on BRI trunks.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Leave Word Calling ■ 1408 Wideband Switching (NxDS0) DEFINITY ECS does not support wideband switching on BRI connections. Related topics Refer to Administered Connections ‘‘Administered Connections’’ on page 1133 for detailed information on this feature. Refer to ‘‘Call-by-Call Service Selection’’ on page 1295 for detailed information on this feature.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Leave Word Calling 1409 The system can indicate that one telephone received a LWC message on a second telephone. The system lights a remote Automatic Message Waiting lamp at the remote telephone and the Automatic Message Waiting lamp lights at the called telephone. The Remote Automatic Message Waiting lamp is a status lamp associated with a button assigned for this purpose.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Line Lockout ■ 1410 Call Coverage You can use LWC with or without Call Coverage. However, the two features complement each other. The Coverage Callback option of Call Coverage is provided by LWC. Also, a caller can activate LWC for the called party even if the call has been answered by a covering user. ■ Centralized Attendant Service LWC Message Retrieval does not work with CAS.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Listed Directory Numbers 1411 Line Lockout occurs when: ■ A user does not hang up after the other party on a call is disconnected. The user receives the dial tone for 10 seconds and then receives the intercept tone for the length of time administered in Line Intercept Tone Timer on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Listed Directory Numbers 1412 How the system routes incoming DID trunk calls to the attendant group Incoming DID calls route only to an extension. The LDN feature allows you to assign one or more extensions to an attendant group. The system uses the LDN extension, or extensions, to route calls to an attendant group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Look-Ahead routing 1413 Look-Ahead routing Look-Ahead Routing (LAR) allows the switch to reroute an outgoing ISDN call that is not completing. The switch attempts to complete the call along a different routing preference, or it tries the current routing preference a second time. If the current preference fails twice, the next routing preference is tried.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Look-Ahead routing 1414 Cause Value Cause Description 41 temporary failure 42 switching equipment congestion 43 access information discarded 44 requested circuit or channel not available 47 resources unavailable NOTE: When country code 13, protocol version a, is administered on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen, only the cause values #10 and #89 activate LAR.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Loss Plans 1415 Ringback Queuing ■ When a call originates and queues at the trunk group queue, the call can be placed in queue multiple times if LAR is active. The call originator can be called back each time the call is continued automatically. Satellite Hop Limit ■ Satellite Hop Limit always takes precedence over LAR.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Loudspeaker paging 1416 on the Station and Trunk Group screens. This allows you to use different loss plans for different types of phones or different trunk groups.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Loudspeaker paging 1417 Users with multi-appearance phones The following description only applies to systems with deluxe paging. To page and park an active call simultaneously, users with a multi-appearance phone press Transfer, dial the trunk access code + an extension number where the call will be parked, make the announcement, and press Transfer again.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Loudspeaker paging 1418 systems can support many zones from 1 port. They can also provide additional capabilities such as two-way communication through the loudspeaker system (the person paged can speak directly to the pager over the loudspeaker). For more information, contact your Lucent Technologies representative.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Loudspeaker paging ■ 1419 Call Park If a call is parked by deluxe paging and the time-out interval expires, the call normally returns to the paging user. However, with remote access and tie trunk access, the call returns to the attendant. If unanswered, the call follows the coverage path of the paging user.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Loudspeaker paging 1420 Chime paging ■ Abbreviated Dialing Don’t use special characters in abbreviated dialing lists used with chime paging. ■ Conference — Attendant A call cannot be conference while the attendant is accessing paging equipment. The attendant can, however, release the call after paging the called party.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Malicious Call Trace 1421 Malicious Call Trace Malicious Call Trace (MCT) allows you to trace malicious calls. MCT allows you to define a group of telephone users who can notify others in the group when they receive a malicious call. These users then can retrieve information related to the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Malicious Call Trace 1422 Once MCT is activated, information on the call is collected and alerts users in the group. The alert is not a call, so it is not affected by queues at the user’s terminal. If an MCT Voice Recorder is connected, it begins recording the conversation.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Malicious Call Trace 1423 Administering MCT for ISDN notification The following describes how to administer the ISDN MCT notification for an ISDN trunk group (public-ntwrk, tandem, tie, or access). Display the System-Parameter Customer-Options form and ensure that ISDN is enabled.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Malicious Call Trace 1424 — You may lose continuity on the trace because the person activating MCT on the second switch may not be the MCT controller.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Malicious Call Trace ■ 1425 DCS If a telephone in a DCS network is involved in a malicious call, the extension is recorded and displayed with the MCT information. MCT notification passes over ISDN-PRI DCS trunks but MCT-Activate, MCT-Control, and MCT-Deactivate must be performed by telephones within the same DCS node.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Messaging Server Interface 1426 A user transfers a malicious caller to hold. The user initiates a Transfer, receives the second dial tone, enters the MCT-Activate FAC, then halts the remainder of the Transfer operation and returns to the malicious caller’s appearance. ■ Trunk Access Code To activate MCT for a Trunk Access Code (TAC), a user must have an MCT-Control button administered.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Messaging Server Interface ■ Automatic Message Waiting lamp — When users manipulate message waiting lamps on stations. ■ Clock Synchronization — Used to make sure that the MS clock is synchronized with the DEFINITY ECS clock. 1427 Detailed description Figure 56 shows an MS interface to the system.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Misoperation Handling 1429 Refer to ‘‘Voice Message Retrieval’’ on page 1573 for information about retrieving messages. Refer to ‘‘Voice Messaging Systems’’ on page 1576 for more information about voice messaging systems. Refer to ‘‘Packet Gateway Board’’ on page 846 for information about and field descriptions on the Packet Gateway Board screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Misoperation Handling 1430 You can alter standard Misoperation Handling to ensure that callers are not left on hold indefinitely with no way to reach someone for assistance or that callers are not dropped by the system. See Misoperation Alerting and Intercept Treatment on Failed Trunk Transfers on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Misoperation Handling 1431 Enhanced operation Once you enable Misoperation Alerting, calls are handled depending upon the type of call placed on hold and the type of telephone (digital multiappearance, analog single-line, or attendant console) in use when the misoperation occurs. The following list describes the 3 call types that determine misoperation handling.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Misoperation Handling 1432 Digital terminal misoperation The following scenario describes a typical misoperation on a digital terminal. 1. While connected to an incoming external call (Type 1), a digital-terminal user places the call on hold to transfer the call to another terminal. 2. The user hears dial tone, dials an invalid extension, and hangs up. 3. A misoperation occurs.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Modem Pooling 1433 Modem Pooling (Not available with Offer B) Modem Pooling allows switched connections between digital-data endpoints (data modules) and analog-data endpoints via pods of acoustic-coupled modems. The analog-data endpoint is either a trunk or a line circuit.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Modem Pooling 1434 ■ Send space disconnect ■ Receive space disconnect ■ CF-CB common ■ Speed, duplex, and synch (administered) Combined-conversion modems support the following: ■ IBM bisynchronous protocols typically used in 3270 and 2780/3780 applications. Both require 2400 or 4800 bps, half-duplex, synchronous transmission.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Modem Pooling 1435 ■ Tandem switches do not insert a pooled modem. The originating switch inserts a pooled modem. ■ Call Detail Recording Interactions Data call CDR records the use of modem pools on trunk calls. ■ Data Call Setup Data calls to or from a TDM cannot use Modem Pooling.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Multiappearance Preselection and Preference 1436 Multiappearance Preselection and Preference Multiappearance Preselection and Preference selects the call appearances you use to connect to when you lift the handset. Multiappearance Preselection and Preference provides multiappearance telephone users with the following options for placing or answering calls on selected call appearances.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Multiappearance Preselection and Preference 1437 Preference dictates whether a user connects to the ringing call appearance or to an idle call appearance. If there is no call, users automatically connect to an idle call appearance when they lift the handset, regardless of which Preference option is assigned. Considerations ■ Multiappearance telephones can have from 2 to 10 call appearances.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Multifrequency Signaling 1438 Multifrequency Signaling Multifrequency (MF) signaling is a form of address signaling used between switches and the central office (CO). It is similar to dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) signaling in that tones convey the dialed number. With MF signaling, the signal is typically a combination of two frequencies from a group of 5 or 6 frequencies (2/5 or 2/6).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Multifrequency Signaling 1439 MFE MFE, for Country code 11 (Spain), uses R1 frequency and compelled signaling. It is available on CO and DID trunk groups. There are four kinds of MFE signaling: ■ Public 2/5 ■ Public 2/6 ■ Ibercom 2/5 ■ Ibercom 2/6 MF Shuttle MF shuttle signaling, for country code 15 (Russia), uses R1 frequency and noncompelled signaling.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Multifrequency Signaling ■ 1440 If DEFINITY ECS makes an outgoing call to the CO that uses an open numbering plan, the CO should send the signal A.1 to DEFINITY ECS after sending the last address digit to the CO. Then, the CO should timeout and send a pulsed signal A.3 to DEFINITY ECS requesting the Group II signal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Multifrequency Signaling 1441 Second, you assign the correlation between signal codes and their meanings. 1. Assign a code to every message. The code consists of a group category, like group II or A, and a number. ■ For example, you might assign code A.1 to the message “next-digit.” 2. Assign a signal to each identifying code.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Multifrequency Signaling ■ 1442 Authorization Codes The COR of the authorization code as administered on the authorization-code form is not used for ANI prefix determination, even if the originating endpoint enters an authorization code before call processing for an outgoing call seizes an outgoing trunk. If the originating endpoint is an extension, the extension’s ANI is used.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Multifrequency Signaling ■ 1443 Hunt Groups and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Splits For ANI, a physical terminal’s extension number and COR overrides the extension number and COR of the hunt group or ACD split that the terminal is a member of or logged into. ANI prefix and ANI truncation apply to terminals that are members of hunt groups or logged into ACD splits.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service 1444 For India Only. If ANI digits are padded with “zero,” then zeroes also are displayed along with ANI digits. ■ Tandem / Offnet Calls If ANI digits are received on incoming MFC calls, the ANI digits are sent to outgoing tandem/off-net calls. For Russia Only. The ANI is requested on incoming trunks only when all the address digits have been collected.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service 1445 Hunt Group Night Service Hunt Group Night Service allows an attendant or a split supervisor to assign a hunt group or split to Night Service mode. All calls for the hunt group then are redirected to the hunt group’s designated Night Service extension (NSE). When a user activates Hunt Group Night Service, the associated button lamp lights.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service 1446 Trunk Answer from Any Station Trunk Answer from Any Station (TAAS) allows phone users to answer all incoming calls to the attendant when the attendant is not on duty and when other phones have not been designated to answer the calls. The incoming call activates a gong, bell, or chime and a phone user dials an access code to answer the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service 1447 Considerations Considerations for Hunt Group Night Service ■ Both Hunt Group Night Service and Trunk Group Night Service can be active at the same time. An incoming trunk call is redirected to the trunk group’s designated NSE. If this NSE is a hunt group or split that is in Hunt Group Night Service mode, the call is redirected to the Hunt Group NSE.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service ■ 1448 If a trunk without disconnect supervision goes to Night Service, the system drops the trunk after a period of time to avoid locking up the trunk. The call is not routed to the DID-LDN night extension. Considerations for TAAS ■ If Night Service is active and a power failure occurs, the system, when brought back up, automatically returns to Night Service mode.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service 1449 example, a phone with a trunk-ns button may be unplugged when the system is rebooted. If the phone is plugged back in later, the trunk status is shown on the trunk-ns button within 10 seconds.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service 1450 Interactions for Night Station Service ■ Call Coverage Calls routed to the night extension via Night Station Service follow the coverage path of the night extension under all coverage criteria except Send All Calls. If a night extension has a coverage path in which Cover All Calls is administered, all attendant-seeking calls redirect to coverage.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service 1451 Interactions for TAAS ■ Call Coverage If Night Station Service is active, calls that are redirected to the attendant via Call Coverage can be answered via TAAS. ■ Call Forwarding All Calls If Night Station Service is active, calls that are redirected to the attendant via Call Forwarding All Calls can be answered via TAAS.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Night Service ■ 1452 Listed Directory Number In System Night Service mode, all incoming LDN calls (except those using DID trunks) which have activated night service are redirected to their corresponding trunk group’s NSE.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Off-Premises Station 1453 Refer to ‘‘Setting up night station service’’ on page 137 for instructions. For Trunk Group Night Service Refer to ‘‘Listed Directory Numbers’’ on page 800 for night service destination. Refer to ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 484 for administering feature button assignments on an attendant console.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference PC Interface 1454 Detailed description Off-Premises Station requires cross-connecting capabilities and one port on a Analog Line or DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack for each interface to be provided. Not all analog lines can support an off-premises station. For information about analog lines, refer to the DEFINITY ECS System Description.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference PC Interface 1455 The group 1 configurations consist of DCP configurations that use a PC/PBX Interface card (formerly DCP expansion card) in the PC to link to the switch. Group 1 (shown in Figure 57) uses the following connections: ■ The PC Interface card plugs into an expansion slot on the PC. The card has 2 standard 8-pin modular jacks (line and phone).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference PC Interface 1456 cards each provide 2 standard 8-pin modular-jack connections for both line connections (to the switch) and phone connections. A standard 4-pin modular jack is also available for use with a handset or headset. Figure Notes Figure 58. 1. ISDN phone 7. DEFINITY ECS 2. PC with application 8. PRI trunks 3. Handset or Headset 9. BRI stations 4. BRI Interface card 10.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference PC Interface 1457 specific features depends on the COS of the extension and the COS for the switch. Modem Pooling is provided to ensure general availability of off-net data-calling services. Security There are two areas where unauthorized use may occur with this feature: unauthorized local use and remote access.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Personal Station Access 1458 ■ Do not use phones with data modules with the PC Interface. (You can still use 3270 Data Modules if you also use 3270 emulation). If you attach a DCP data module or ISDN data module to a phone that is connected to a PC Interface card, the data module is bypassed (not used).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Personal Station Access 1459 Calls an employee originates from the station are recognized and displayed as the employee’s calls, and calls routed to the employee’s extension route to the voice terminal “associated” with that extension. A telecommuting or hoteling employee can also use PSA when working at home.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Personal Station Access 1460 Dissociated telephones When a user requests to associate a telephone with PSA, any other telephone using that extension is automatically dissociated. It is possible to place emergency calls from a dissociated telephone, provided a COR has been assigned to dissociated phones on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Personal Station Access ■ 1461 Coverage PSA does not change coverage path operations. If a station is dissociated, its calls still go to coverage unless they are forwarded. ■ Property Management System A station assigned to a room, rather than to a person who needs to work in multiple locations, should not use PSA. Such a station should not have PSA in its COS.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Priority Calling 1462 Refer to ‘‘Station’’ on page 882 for information about and field descriptions on the Station screen. Priority Calling Priority Calling provides a special type of call alerting between internal telephone users, including the attendant. The called party receives a distinctive ring when the calling party uses Priority Calling.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Pull Transfer ■ 1463 Call Forwarding All Calls Priority Calling calls (except callback calls) are forwarded, and the forwarded call remains a priority call. ■ Call Vectoring The system generates intercept tone when someone attempts to activate Priority Calling toward a Vector Directory Number (VDN).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Recorded Announcements 1464 When attendants control calls, called parties cannot use Pull Transfer. Attendants who are called parties cannot use Pull Transfer. When attendants have parties on hold they are transferred with the standard transfer process.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Recorded Announcements 1465 Your system can store multiple announcements on each circuit pack up to the system capacity. Refer to DEFINITY ECS System Description for capacity information. Any announcement stored on a circuit pack can play through any port on the circuit pack. Any announcement (not administered for “barge-in”) can play simultaneously through multiple ports.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Recorded Telephone Dictation Access 1466 Refer to ‘‘Announcement Type’’ on page 691 for information on setting up announcements for hotel guests. Recorded Telephone Dictation Access Recorded Telephone Dictation Access permits phone users, including Remote Access and incoming tie-trunk users, to access dictation equipment. Users start by dialing an access code or extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Remote Access 1467 system does not have access to the calling (outside) number, Ringback Queuing and Automatic Callback cannot be used on a Remote Access call. Also, any feature requiring recall dial tone (for example, Hold and Transfer) cannot be accessed remotely. Read the information in ‘‘Security’’ on page 1468 before administering this feature.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Remote Access 1468 Barrier codes provide your system security and define calling privileges through the administered class of restriction (COR). You can administer up to 10 barrier codes, each with a different COR and class of service (COS). Barrier codes can be from 4 to 7 digits, but all codes must be the same length.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Remote Access 1469 ■ Whether the code is active or expired ■ Date and reason a code expired For a detailed description of the status remote-access command and display, refer to BCS Products Security Handbook. Barrier Codes Remote Access has inherent risks; it can lead to large-scale unauthorized long-distance use.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Remote Access 1470 Authorization Codes You can also administer authorization codes to manage access to your system. You can then use CDR to track this code use. Use these guidelines to manage your system’s authorization codes. ■ Assigning codes — Create random codes; do not allow them to follow a predictable pattern.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Remote Access 1471 Interactions ■ Authorization Codes When a Remote Access caller dials the assigned Remote Access extension and connects to the system, the system may request the caller to dial an authorization code in addition to a barrier code. Dial Tone between the barrier code and authorization code is optional.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Remote Access ■ 1472 The destination is on the same switch as the originator, or is connected via an ISDN trunk to the originating switch When the caller hears reset shift dial tone, they can press a single digit that replaces the last digit of the originally-dialed destination and the call transfers to the new destination.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Remote Access ■ 1473 Intercom ■ Dial If a user lifts the handset, presses the DIAL INTERCOM button, dials the 1-digit or 2-digit intercom code assigned to another set, and reaches a busy set, the switch plays busy tone, not reset shift dial tone.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Ringer Cutoff 1474 Ringer Cutoff Ringer Cutoff allows multiappearance telephone users to turn audible ringing signals on and off. This feature does not affect visual alerting. When this feature is enabled, only Priority ring (by default 3-burst), Redirect Notification, Intercom ring, and manual signaling ring at the telephone. Internal and external calls do not ring.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed ■ 1475 Bridging A bridging user is not affected by a primary extension’s activation of Ringer Cutoff. Nor is the primary extension affected by the bridging user’s activation of Ringer Cutoff.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed 1477 Considerations ■ You cannot assign Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed to an attendant console. ■ You can assign Abbreviated and Delayed Ringing to analog stations. However, because analog stations cannot visually alert, a user may unexpectedly answer an incoming call while intending to originate a call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed ■ 1478 ISDN — World Class Basic Rate Interface Several of the protocol variations supported by the World Class BRI feature do not permit the messaging required for control of the station’s ringer by Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed. In this case, ring type is forced to a value of ring.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Security violations notification 1479 Security violations notification When a security violation occurs, security violations notification (SVN) notifies a designated referral point. This can be an attendant console, a display-equipped phone, or a phone without display for SVN referral calls with announcements.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Security violations notification 1480 Invalid attempts accumulate at different rates in the various security arenas (login, authorization code, remote access, and station security code), depending on feature usage and the number of users on a server. For this reason, you administer thresholds separately for each type of violation.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Security violations notification 1481 SVN- halt buttons You can administer buttons for the notification extension to stop notification calls. However, this may pose a security risk. Do not use these buttons if you do not really need them. To find out what svn-halt buttons exist in the system, type display svn-button-location and press RETURN. The SVN Button Locations screen appears.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Security violations notification 1482 Considerations ■ You may only administer one referral destination per system for each type of violation. ■ Exercise caution when administering bridged appearances for stations that are used as SVN referral destinations.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Service observing 1483 Service observing Designated users, normally supervisors, can listen to other users’ calls. This capability is often used to train agents and monitor service quality in call centers and other environments where employees serve customers over the phone. On DEFINITY, this is called “service observing” and the user observing calls is the “observer.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Service observing 1484 How to observe calls Observers press the service observing button on their phone or dial a feature access code, and then dial the extension they want to observe. When using a service observing button, observers start in listen-only mode and can toggle between listen-only and listen/talk mode by pressing the button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Service observing 1485 Trunk calls If a user makes a trunk-call, observation starts after the user finishes dialing. On central office (CO) trunks, dialing is considered complete when answer supervision is returned or when answer supervision timeout occurs. Service observing cannot be activated over trunks without disconnect supervision. Any attempt is denied.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Service observing ■ 1486 Conference Observers cannot initiate a conference while observing. If an observed user starts a conference or enters a conference with fewer than 6 parties, the observer is placed in wait state until the call is connected. Then the observer observes the conference and is counted as one party in the conference.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering ■ 1487 Transfer Observers cannot initiate a transfer while observing. If a user transfers a call, the observer is placed in wait state. The observer is bridged onto the call when the transfer is complete. Related topics Refer to ‘‘Observing calls’’ on page 387 to administer service observing.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering 1488 Examples Table 53.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering 1489 ■ Local calling via ARS DAC 9 ■ 2-digit feature-access codes (FACs) [* or # plus another digit] Table 54.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering 1490 When using prefixed extension numbers, it is not necessary to include an entry for the "real" extension number in the dial plan. The server is able to complete a call using the prefixed extension number. When dialing 7345 (where 7 is the prefix), the communications server will ring extension 345.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Station Hunting 1491 Interactions ■ Attendant Display and Telephone Display Prefixed extensions display without the prefix. The return call button causes the prefix to dial, even though it does not display. ■ Property Management System (PMS) Remove prefixes before messages containing the extension are sent to the PMS.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Station Hunting 1492 Calls route through the chain as follows. Table 55.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Station Hunting 1493 In this example (Table 57), extension 2 is the called extension. Because extension 2 is busy, the system follows the station-hunting chain to find an idle extension. The call is answered at extension 1. Table 57.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Station Hunting 1494 coverage. If the hunt-to station is also busy, the switch continues hunting down the hunt-to chain. If all stations in the hunt-to chain are busy, the call goes to the dialed station’s coverage. Administration commands When you remove a station, the system attempts to maintain a station-hunting chain.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Station Hunting ■ 1495 Busy Verification The system does not attempt Station Hunting for busy-verify calls. ■ Call Coverage Call Coverage has precedence over Station Hunting. Station Hunting is applied to the final coverage point following the final coverage point’s hunt-to chain when the following conditions occur: — The Call Coverage screen’s Hunt After Coverage field is y.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Station Hunting ■ 1496 Call Vectoring You cannot assign a Vector Directory Number as a hunt-to station. If a route-to command’s with cov y directs a call to a busy station, the call follows the station’s hunt-to chain and not its coverage path. Refer to DEFINITY ECS Call Vectoring/EAS Guide or DEFINITY BCS and Guestworks Call Vectoring Guide for more information.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Station Hunting ■ 1497 Night Service The system denies Station Hunting when a night service call is made to a busy night-console extension. ■ Outgoing Trunk Queueing The system does not attempt Station Hunting for an OTQ callback-return call. ■ Personal Central Office Line The system does not attempt Station Hunting for a PCOL call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Station Security Codes 1498 Related topics Refer to ‘‘Station’’ on page 882 for information to administer a Hunt-to-Station button. Refer to ‘‘Coverage Path’’ on page 551 for information about station hunting after coverage. Station Security Codes Station Security Codes (SSC) provide security to you by preventing other users from accessing functions associated with your station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1499 Refer to ‘‘Security-Related System Parameters’’ on page 875 for information about and field descriptions on the Security-Related System Parameters screen. Refer to ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 619 for information about and field descriptions on the Feature Access Code screen.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1500 Button Mode Displays Normal Call-related information for the active call appearance, including the call appearance, calling- or called-party name and number, depending on the type of call. Elapsed Time can be invoked anytime the display is in normal mode. It displays elapsed time in hours, minutes, and seconds. Timing starts and stops when the button is pressed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1501 Button Mode Displays Integrated Directory Turns off the touch-tone signals and allows the user to use the touch-tone buttons to enter the name of a system user. After a name is entered, the display shows the name and extension.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1502 Information on the display DEFINITY ECS provides the following call-related information: ■ Call Appearance Identification The call appearance buttons are designated on the display by a lowercase letter. The display shows a= for a call incoming on the first button, b= for a call incoming on the second button, and so on.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays ■ 1503 Called Party Identification On calls to a system user, the digits appear on the display as they are dialed. After dialing is complete, the called party’s name and extension appears. If no name is accessed, the dialed digits remain on the display. On outgoing calls, the digits appear on the display as they are dialed.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1504 Display Meaning ICOM The call is an Intercom call. p — (Pickup) The user answered a Call Pickup group member’s call. park The user parked a call. priority The call has priority status. s — (Send All Calls) The called user is temporarily sending all calls to coverage and the call has been redirected to this phone.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays ■ 1505 Roman contains two character sets: — US English contains the Roman alphabet, numerals, and special characters found on the standard US English keyboard. US English characters appear in capital and lowercase letters. — European contains characters for many European languages. All European characters appear in capital letters.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays ■ 1506 DCS All switches in a DCS network must have must have the same software load installed on each server, must have the enhanced characters enabled, and must have phones with the same firmware type. ■ ECMA and QSIG Networking Information must be sent between DEFINITY ECS systems. ■ Leave Word Calling - Adjunct Not supported.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1507 This section shows the English, French, Italian, and Spanish message for each feature. When time is displayed, the English language uses AM and PM. All other languages use 24-hour time. Table 59. Automatic Wakeup English French Italian Spanish AUTO WAKEUP - Ext: xxxxx Time: --:-- xM REVEIL AUTO.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1508 Table 59. Automatic Wakeup English French Italian Spanish WAKEUP REQUEST CANCELED DEMANDE DE REVEIL EST ANNULEE RICHIESTA SVEGLIA CANENTRYATA SOLICITUD DE DESPERTA DOR CANCELAD A WAKEUP REQUEST CONFIRMED DEMANDE DE REVEIL EST CONFIRMEE RICHIESTA SVEGLIA CONFERMATA SOLICITUD DE DESPERTA DOR CONFIRMA DA Wakeup Call APPEL DE REVEIL Serv.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1509 Table 61. Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks English French Italian Spanish RESTRICTED RESTREINT RISTRETTO RESTRINGIDO TERMINATED TERMINE TERMINATO TERMINADO TRUNK SEIZED CIRCUIT SAISI GIUNZIONE IMP. ENLACE OCUPADO VERIFIED VERIFIE VERIFICATO VERIFICADO Table 62.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1510 Table 64.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1512 Table 68.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1513 Table 69.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1514 Table 70. Field Separator English French Italian Spanish "to" "a" "a" "a" Table 71.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1516 Table 73. Leave Word Calling Messages English French Italian Spanish CANNOT BE DELETED CALL MESSAGE CENTER NE PEUT ETRE SUPP./APPELE R RECEP. MESS. NON CANENTRYATO.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1517 Table 73. Leave Word Calling Messages — Continued English French Italian Spanish Message Center (AUDIX) CALL APPEL DE LA RECEPTION DE MESS. (AUDIX) Chiamata dal Centro Messaggi (AUDIX) LLAMADA DEL CENTRO DE MENSAJES (AUDIX) NO MESSAGES PAS DE MESSAGES NESSUN MESSAGGIO NINGUN MENSAJE WHOSE MESSAGES? (DIAL EXTENSION NUMBER) MESSAGES DE QUEL NO.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1518 Table 74. Malicious Call Trace English French Italian Spanish party: (ISDN PORT ID) demandeur: (REF.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1519 Table 78. Queue Status Indication English French Italian Spanish <15 chrs> Q-time xx:xx calls xx <15 chrs> TEMPS-F xx:xx APPELS xx <15 chrs> T-coda xx:xx chiam xx <15 chrs> HORA-C xx:xx LLAMADAS xx Table 79.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1520 Table 79.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1521 Table 79. Miscellaneous Call Identifier — Continued English French Italian Spanish so (Service Observing) ES (ecoute du service) is (Inclusione Supervisore) SS (Supervision del servicio) na (Unanswered or Incomplete DID Call) SR (Sans reponse) pn (Passante Non Risposta) SR (Sin respuesta) ACB (Automatic Callback) R. AUTO.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1522 Table 79. Miscellaneous Call Identifier — Continued English French Italian Spanish ARS (Automatic Route Selection) SAA (Selection de l’acheminement automatiqe) SAI (Selez. Autom. Instradam.) SAR (Seleccion automatica de rutas) forward (Call Forwarding) RENVOI (Renvoi) deviata (Deviata) REENVIO (Reenvio de llamada) cover (Cover) SUPPL.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1523 Table 79.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1524 Table 81.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1525 Table 81. Property Management System Interface — Continued English French Italian Spanish MESSAGE NOTIFICATION FAILED ECHEC D’AVIS MESSAGES NOTIFICA MESSAGGI ERRATA AVISO DE MENSAJE FALLIDO MESSAGE NOTIFICATION OFF - Ext: xxxxx AVIS DE MESSAGES DESACTIVE POSTE:xxxxx NOTIFICA MESSAGGI DISABIL.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1526 Table 83. Stored Number English French Italian Spanish NO NUMBER STORED AUCUN NUMERO EN MEMOIRE NESSUN NUMERO IN MEMORIA NINGUN NUMERO ALMACENA DO Table 84.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1527 In the following displays, x and y denote the Route Plan Number (RPN 1-8), yyy is a 3-letter abbreviation for the day of the week, and zz:zz is the activation time (24-hour time). Also below is the table that lists the 3-letter abbreviations for the day of the week. Table 87.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1528 To enter the day of the week, the user dials 1 for Sunday, 2 for Monday, and so on. Table 88. Time-of-Day Routing Days of the Week English French Italian Spanish Mon LUN Lun LUN Tue MAR Mar MAR Wed MER Mer MIE Thu JEU Gio JUE Fri VEN Ven VIE Sat SAM Sab SAB Sun DIM Dom DOM Table 89.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1529 US English to Russian characters Table 90. US English to Russian characters Russian US English Russian US English space space ® Q ¹ A ¯ R B À S ¶ C ª T § D ¨ U ¸ E ± V ¥ F » W » G ¼ X µ H ² Y ½ I Ä Z ³ J X { ° K ¿ } © L « : Á M Â “ · N ¦ < ¾ O Ã > ¬ P US English to Japanese characters Table 91.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1530 Table 91. US English to Japanese characters Japanese US English Japanese US English % c = & µ > d ‘ b ? ¹ ( j @ e ) i A ¶ * k B ¸ + m C ½ , l D º - n E » .
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1531 Table 91.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1532 Table 92. US English to European characters European US English European US English Î ‘ ¸ ? Í ( Ó @ Ë ) Ê A * B ´ + Ç C â , à D z - Þ E Ú .
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Telephone Displays 1533 Table 92. US English to European characters European US English European US English [ ¨ s Ÿ \ À t ¶ ] á u ¶ ^ ± v ¹ _ ° w Ñ ‘ µ x É a y Ä b z à d ã { Á e ¤ | Ñ f · } Ð g US English to Ukrainian characters Table 93.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Temporary Bridged Appearance 1534 Table 93. US English to Ukrainian characters Ukrainian US English Ukrainian US English © L « : Á M “ · N ¦ < ¾ O Ã > ¬ P Related Topics Refer to System Parameters Country-Options for more information about and field descriptions on the System Parameters Country-Option screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Temporary Bridged Appearance 1535 The called party can answer the call at any time, even if it is already answered by a covering user. If the called party does not bridge onto the call, the covering user can use the Consult function of Call Coverage to determine if the called party wants to accept the call. The Consult function uses the temporary bridged appearance maintained on the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning ■ 1536 Consult Consult calls use the temporary bridged appearance maintained on the call. At the conclusion of a consult call, the bridged appearance is no longer maintained. If the principal chooses not to talk with the calling party, the principal cannot bridge onto the call later.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning 1537 Because some features are not partitioned, you must take care to administer these features to prevent inter-tenant access. Refer to ‘‘Interactions’’ on page 1542 for a list of these features. You must ensure that: ■ All tenants can call and be called by partition 1. This is the system default. If you change this default some call types fail.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning 1538 Tenant Partitioning provides advantages to both the telecommunications service provider and individual tenants: ■ Shared resources offer enhanced services at lower cost to the tenant, with increased profit for the service provider. ■ The tenant has the appearance of a dedicated DEFINITY ECS without the expense. ■ All tenants can have attendant services.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning 1539 ■ Even if two extensions are blocked from calling each other by Tenant Partitioning restrictions, either extension can still reach the other by dialing the extension’s Direct Inward Dialing (DID) number via the public network.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning 1540 Each tenant may have a designated night-service station. The system directs calls to an attendant group in night service to the night-service station of the appropriate tenant (when a night attendant is not available).
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning 1541 The Automatic Route Selection (ARS) route pattern can be the same for all tenants. In this example, the trunk for tenant partition 18 (the private trunk shared by tenants 3 and 7) is first in the route pattern. Tenant partition 17 is second. Tenants 3 and 7 route first to partition 18 and then as a second choice to partition 17.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning 1542 Detailed description of Multiple Music-on-Hold Tenant Partitioning allows you to assign each tenant a music source, unique to each tenant partition, to be heard when a call is placed on hold. The tenant number assigned to the destination extension usually determines which music source is heard.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning 1543 Administration of the following features requires special care to avoid undesired intertenant access.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning ■ 1544 AUDIX, DEFINITY AUDIX, and AUDIX Voice Power AUDIX voice and data ports are subject to the same tenant-to-tenant restrictions as any other endpoint. AUDIX can restrict one group of subscribers from sending voice mail to another group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning ■ 1545 Call Vectoring/VDN A caller routed to a new destination by a vector step hears the music assigned to the last active VDN. While a call is in vector processing, the tenant number (TN) assigned to the active VDN (as determined by VDN Override) determines the music source heard by callers on hold in most circumstances. Note the following exception, however.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Tenant Partitioning ■ 1546 Malicious Call Trace By default, Malicious Call Trace extensions are assigned to tenant partition 1. Therefore, if Malicious Call Trace is enabled, any telephone with permission to call tenant partition 1 can use it. ■ Multiple Listed Directory Numbers Each Listed Directory Number is assigned to a tenant partition.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Terminal Translation Initialization ■ 1547 Uniform Dial Plan If a Uniform Dial Plan is in place between switches, tenant partition identification is not passed between the switches, and so tenant-partition restrictions are not enforced between the switches without special administration. NOTE: Tenant Partitioning restrictions do not override COR restrictions.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Terminal Translation Initialization 1548 Data modules Data modules have different tones and digit sequences. In the merge and separate control flow, different tones are given to the telephone user to give the current status of the TTI operation.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Terminal Translation Initialization 1549 4. Connect the telephone to its intended port (this port should indicate Equipment Type: TTI Port). 5. Receive dial tone. — If there is dial tone, the merge is complete. — If there is no dial tone, the telephone’s SPID is not an available extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Terminal Translation Initialization ■ 1550 Attendant It is possible to have the attendant in Position Available Mode and still separate. Any calls queued, held, or seen as active for the attendant prevent separation. ■ Attendant Night Service The night service station cannot be separated while in night service.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Terminating Extension Group ■ 1551 Expert Agent Selection Station user records cannot be shared between TTI ports and EAS login ID extensions. This reduces the number of possible TTI ports your system provides, depending on the number of administered EAS login IDs.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Terminating Extension Group 1552 Detailed description You can administer any phone as a TEG member; however, only a multiappearance phone can be assigned a TEG button with merged-status lamp. The TEG button allows the user to select a TEG call appearance for answering or bridging onto an existing call but not for call origination.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Time of Day Routing ■ 1553 Internal Automatic Answer TEG calls are not eligible for Internal Automatic Answer; however, calls placed to an individual extension are eligible. ■ Leave Word Calling Leave Word Calling messages can be stored for a TEG and can be retrieved by a member of the group, a covering user of the group, or a system-wide message retriever.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Transfer 1554 Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) or Automatic Route Selection (ARS) must be administered on your switch before you use Time of Day Routing. Time of Day Routing applies to all AAR or ARS outgoing calls and trunks used for call forwarding to external numbers. Interactions ■ DCS Be careful when you make Time of Day Routing assignments in a DCS environment.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Transfer 1555 ■ Single-line telephone users momentarily flash the switchhook or press the RECALL button, dial the desired extension, and hang up. Multi-appearance telephone users press the TRANSFER button, dial the desired extension, and press the TRANSFER button again.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Transfer 1556 Interactions ■ Attendant Conference This may not operate properly if the CO does not provide answer supervision. In that case, the Answer Supervision Timeout and Outgoing End of Dial fields (on the CO Trunk Group screen) must be set to the same non-zero number. The Receive Answer Supervision field must be set to n.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk 1558 DCS networks provide a similar but more restrictive version of this feature, called DCS Trunk Turnaround, which permits two outgoing trunks to be connected when the switch at the remote end of one of the trunks agrees to turn around the logical direction of the trunk.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk 1559 Interactions ■ DCS Trunk Turnaround OTTOTT increases the set of cases in which DCS Trunk Turnaround may be accepted. However, use of OTTOTT in combination with a DCS network is strongly discouraged. The following algorithm describes the DCS Trunk Turnaround request process. a.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Transfer — Trunk-to-Trunk ■ 1560 Release Link Trunks RLTs are used by Centralized Attendant Service (CAS). An outgoing RLT at a remote branch is used to access an attendant at the main. The attendant at the main can transfer the incoming caller to a station or trunk at the branch.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Transfer — Trunk-to-Trunk 1561 To administer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer system-wide, complete the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. To restrict Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer on a trunk-group basis, assign COR-to-COR calling-party restrictions on the Class of Restriction (COR) screen.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunk Flash 1562 ■ Tenant Partitioning Station control of Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is prohibited between trunks in different tenant partitions if those partitions are restricted. Trunk Flash Trunk Flash allows a feature or function button on a multifunction telephone or attendant console to be assigned as a Flash button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunk Flash 1563 If the trunk group is a DS1 trunk in Italy, the Trunk Flash feature applies only to outgoing calls. If the trunk is not directly connected to the far end or CO providing the customized services, use of the Trunk Flash signal may cause the call to be disconnected by the far end or CO. Calls made after the Flash are not recorded in Call Detail Recording (CDR) records.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups 1564 ■ In a call involving more than one telephone, one of the telephones may press the Flash button, and another telephone may dial the phone number. The telephone that dials the phone number is not required to have a Flash button.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups 1565 CAMA — Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (E911) CAMA trunks route emergency calls to the local community’s Enhanced 911 systems and provide Caller’s Emergency Service Identification (CESID) information to the system. Public Service Answering Points (PSAP) use CAMA trunks to determine the caller’s physical address.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups 1566 without attendant assistance. CO trunks typically connect your switch to the local central office, but they can also connect adjuncts such as external paging systems and data modules. CPE — Customer-Provided Equipment Use CPE trunks to connect adjuncts, such as paging systems and announcement or music sources, to the switch.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups 1567 IP Trunks — Internet Protocol Trunks IP trunks allow DEFINITY ECS to route voice calls and faxes over a local- or wide-area TCP/IP network. Use IP trunks to reduce long-distance charges by routing calls over the Internet or your intranet.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups 1568 receive one of these start dial signals, it can be administered to send digits after an administered interval. (This time-out interval is the amount of time that the originating switch waits before sending digits.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups 1569 Type of trunk Direction Analog or Digital? CO, FX, WATS Incoming Either Any kind of voice or data traffic. No Outgoing Traffic supported Transmits digits? Two-way CPE N.A. Either Any kind of voice or data traffic. No DID Incoming Either Only voice and voice-grade data. Yes DIOD Incoming Either Any kind of voice or data traffic.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups ■ 1570 Start-dial signal — The distant office’s acknowledgment that it is ready to accept dialing from the originating office. Seizure signals Ear & Mouth (E&M) supervision E&M supervision is a symmetric signaling scheme used on private network trunks. DC voltage levels are sent over E&M leads, which are separate from the transmission path.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups ■ 1571 Loop-start (LS) supervision — A supervisory signaling scheme used between a telephone and a switch in which the telephone or far-end office completes the current path formed by the trunk wires. The circuit provides one signaling state when it is open and another when it is closed.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Trunks and Trunk Groups 1572 Types of address transmission In addition to seizure and start dial signals, switches have to transmit the digits and characters for telephone numbers. This is called address transmission.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Message Retrieval 1573 particular calling states, such as on-hook, off-hook, ringing, not ringing, and so on, by using A and B bit-timed signaling.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Message Retrieval 1574 Detailed description Voice Message Retrieval is only used for the retrieval of messages. When a terminal is in Voice Message Retrieval mode, it cannot be used to make calls or access other features. Voice Message Retrieval can be used to retrieve your own messages or messages for another user.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Message Retrieval 1575 If you do not have a TN725B speech-synthesizer board, non-display phone users cannot retrieve LWC messages sent via the LWC button on a phone. ■ Bridged Call Appearance Voice Message Retrieval on a Bridged Call Appearance functions the same as if it were activated by the primary extension associated with the bridged call appearance.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Messaging Systems 1576 Voice Messaging Systems DEFINITY ECS supports several Lucent voice or multimedia messaging systems. These systems allow users to send, retrieve, store, and forward messages, as well as perform many other tasks associated with messages. In addition to supporting multiple AUDIX systems, DEFINITY can have multiple hunt groups associated with a single AUDIX system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Messaging Systems 1577 DEFINITY ECS supports the following systems: INTUITY AUDIX INTUITY AUDIX runs on a separate MAP/5, MAP/40, or MAP/100 PC. The switch communicates with INTUITY AUDIX via analog voice ports and a data link. The switch can also communicate with INTUITY AUDIX without the data link.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Messaging Systems 1578 Centralized Voice Mail You can use a single voice mail system to support multiple DEFINITY systems in a DCS network. In addition, you can use a voice mail system to support multiple DEFINITY systems and Merlin Legend in a network via mode code. For more information, see Appendix B in DEFINITY ECS R8.2 Administration for Network Connectivity.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Messaging Systems 1579 subscribers. If you decide to allow transfers to any extension, administer the COR on the AUDIX ports to prevent calls outside the PBX or immediate Distributed Communications System (DCS) site network. ■ For AUDIX only — Activate Enhanced Call Transfer (ECT) to help prevent having billable calls placed from unauthorized transfers outside of the system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Messaging Systems ■ 1580 Call Forwarding An AUDIX user can forward calls to a remote AUDIX hunt group or to the host AUDIX hunt group. You must correctly administer the AUDIX destination for the remote AUDIX hunt group. ■ Call Monitoring Call Monitoring allows users to pick up the handset after the call goes to AUDIX to listen to the message being left by the caller.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Voice Messaging Systems 1581 For other messaging services, you can have AUDIX report the existence of waiting LWC messages for the principal, but not the message content. The principal can retrieve the message using other retrieval methods, but is still notified of the existence of AUDIX messages.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Whisper paging 1582 Refer to Switch Administration for the DEFINITY AUDIX System for the procedures on how to administer the switch for voice messaging for DEFINITY AUDIX. Refer to Switch Administration for AUDIX Voice Messaging for the procedures on how to administer the switch for voice messaging for AUDIX R1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Whisper paging 1583 For example, let’s say users A and B are on a call. C has an urgent message for A and makes a whisper page. All 3 users hear the tone that signals the page, but only A hears the page itself. The person making the page, C, cannot hear A or B.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Whisper paging 1584 Two features, Do Not Disturb and Privacy — Attendant Lockout, also block incoming whisper pages.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Whisper paging 1585 An attendant may initiate a whisper page while a call is split away using auto-manual splitting. However, they cannot use Release, Hold, or Split after the page is made. ■ Bridged Call Appearances Whisper pages are designed to reach a specific user associated with a specific extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Whisper paging ■ 1586 Data Privacy — Permanent or Temporary Any station that has Data Privacy activated cannot make a whisper page. ■ Expert Agent Selection You can’t make a whisper page by dialing an agent’s Logical Agent ID. Pages must be made to a physical extension.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1587 Wideband Switching (Not available with Offer B) Wideband Switching provides the ability to dedicate 2 or more ISDN-PRI B-channels or DS0 endpoints for applications that require large bandwidth. It provides high-speed end-to-end connectivity between endpoints where dedicated facilities are not economic or appropriate. ISDN-BRI trunks do not support wideband switching.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1588 Channel allocation For standard narrowband communication, ISDN-PRI divides a T1 or E1 trunk as follows: ■ T1 trunks are divided into 23 information channels and 1 signaling channel ■ E1 trunks are divided into 30 information channels, 1 signaling channel, and 1 framing channel Certain applications, like video conferencing, require greater bandwidth.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1589 Typical uses A typical video application uses an ISDN-PRI interface to DS0 1 through 6 of the line-side facility. Refer to the following figure. wdbndex CJL 061996 Figure Notes 1. Video application 8. Network 2. Port 1 9. DS0 24 D-channel 3. Port 2 10. DS0 23 unused 4. ISDN terminal adaptor 11. DS0 1–6 wideband 5. Line-side ISDN-PRI 12.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1590 The terminal adapter also must adhere to the PRI-endpoint boundaries as administered on the DEFINITY ECS switch when handling both incoming (to the endpoint) applications and outgoing calls.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1591 Universal digital signal level 1 board The UDS1 board is the interface for line-side and network facilities carrying wideband calls. Non-signaling endpoint applications Wideband can also support configurations using non-signaling (non-ISDN-PRI) line-side T1 or E1 facilities. The endpoint applications are the same as those defined for configurations with signaling.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1593 Primary data connectivity. Permanent data connections (those always active during business hours), such as interconnections between local area networks (LANs), are well suited for DEFINITY ECS when ISDN-PRI endpoints are used. The ISDN end-to-end monitoring and the endpoint’s ability to react to failures provide for critical data availability needs.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1594 Given this facility list concept, the algorithms have the ability to search for trunks, by facility, in an attempt to satisfy the bandwidth requirements of a given wideband call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1595 If the algorithm cannot find an available facility within the trunk group that meets these constraints, then the call is blocked from using this trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1596 scheme supports four (T1) or five (E1) fixed starting points. The H0 algorithm searches for an available quadrant within a facility based on the direction of trunk or hunt administered. If the algorithm cannot find an available quadrant within any facility allocated to this trunk group, then the call is blocked from using this trunk group.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1597 There are additional factors to note regarding specific values of N and the N x DS0 service: — N = 1 — this is considered a narrowband call and is treated as any other voice or narrowband-data (B-channel) call.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1599 To reduce glare probability, the network needs to be administered so both sides of the interface select channels from opposite ends of facilities. For example, on a 23B+D trunk group, the user side could be administered to select B-channels starting at channel 23 while the network side would be administered to start selecting at channel 1.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference Wideband Switching 1600 Interactions ■ Administered Connections Provides call initiation for WAEs. All Administered Connections that originate from WAEs use the entire bandwidth administered for WAE. The destination of an Administered Connection can be a PRI endpoint.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference World-Class Tone Detection and Generation ■ 1601 Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling FAS and NFAS with or without D-Channel Backup requires administration via signaling groups for trunk-side wideband interfaces. ■ Facility Busy Indication You can administer a busy-indicator button for a wideband-endpoint extension, but the button does not accurately track endpoint status.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 20 Features and technical reference World-Class Tone Detection and Generation 1602 Interactions ■ Data Modules Multiline Data Terminal Dialing is disabled if the Multiple-line Level of Tone Detection field is medium or broadband. It is enabled if the Level of Tone Detection field is precise.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents References 1604 21 This chapter contains a list of user documents for the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server (ECS) Release 8.2. Most of these documents are backward compatible with DEFINITY ECS Release 7 systems.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents 1605 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 — Administration for Network Connectivity, 555-233-504, Issue 1 Describes how to administer connections between DEFINITY ECS switches (csi, si, and r models) for DCS messaging. The main focus is on TCP/IP connectivity introduced with DEFINITY Releases 7 and 8, including voice over IP (VOIP). DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents 1606 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 — Reports, 555-233-505, Issue 1 Provides detailed descriptions of the measurement, status, security, and recent change history reports available in the system and is intended for administrators who validate traffic reports and evaluation system performance. Includes corrective actions for potential problems.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents 1607 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 — Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals, 555-233-116, Issue 1 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of ECS adjunct and peripheral systems and equipment. DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents 1608 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 — Maintenance for R8.2r, 555-233-117, Issue 1 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring, testing, troubleshooting, and maintaining the R8.2r ECS. Included are maintenance architecture, craft commands, step-by-step trouble-clearing procedures, the procedures for using all tests, and explanations of the system’s error codes.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents 1609 DEFINITY ECS Release 7— Basic Call Management System (BCMS) Operations, 555-230-706, Issue 2 Provides detailed instructions on how to generate reports and manage the system. It is intended for telecommunications managers who wish to use Basic Call Management System (BCMS) reports and for system managers responsible for maintaining the system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents 1610 Application-specific documents These documents support specific DEFINITY applications. ACD DEFINITY Communications Systems G3 — Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agent Instructions, 555-230-722, Issue 5 Provides information for use by agents after they have completed ACD training. Includes descriptions of ACD features and the procedures for using them.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 21 References Basic DEFINITY ECS documents Non-U.S. audiences DEFINITY ECS — Application Notes for Type Approval Describes specific hardware and administration required to operate the DEFINITY ECS in countries outside the United States. Available on the DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Library CD only.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Glossary and abbreviations 1612 Glossary and abbreviations GL Numerics 800 service A service in the United States that allows incoming calls from certain areas to an assigned number for a flat-rate charge based on usage. A AA Archangel. See angel. AAC ATM access concentrator AAR See Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR). abandoned call An incoming call in which the caller hangs up before the call is answered.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1613 access endpoint Either a nonsignaling channel on a DS1 interface or a nonsignaling port on an analog tie-trunk circuit pack that is assigned a unique extension. access tie trunk A trunk that connects a main communications system with a tandem communications system in an electronic tandem network (ETN).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1614 adjunct-controlled split An ACD split that is administered to be under adjunct control. Agents logged into such splits must do all telephony work, ACD login/ logout, and changes of work mode through the adjunct (except for auto-available adjunct-controlled splits, whose agents may not log in/out or change work mode).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1615 All trunks busy (ATB) The state in which no trunks are available for call handling. ALM-ACK Alarm acknowledge American Standard Code for Information Interchange See ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). AMW Automatic Message Waiting AN Analog analog The representation of information by continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude, frequency, and phase.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1616 appearance A software process that is associated with an extension and whose purpose is to supervise a call. An extension can have multiple appearances. Also called call appearance, line appearance, and occurrence. See also call appearance. application An adjunct that requests and receives ASAI services or capabilities. One or more applications can reside on a single adjunct.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1617 ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). attendant console The workstation used by an attendant. The attendant console allows the attendant to originate a call, answer an incoming call, transfer a call to another extension or trunk, put a call on hold, and remove a call from hold. Attendants using the console can also manage and monitor some system operations. Also called console.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1618 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) A feature that allows the system to automatically choose the least-cost way to send a toll call. automatic trunk A trunk that does not require addressing information because the destination is predetermined. A request for service on the trunk, called a seizure, is sufficient to route the call.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1619 BCC See Bearer capability class (BCC). BCMS Basic Call Management System BCT See business communications terminal (BCT). Bearer capability class (BCC) Code that identifies the type of a call (for example, voice and different types of data).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1620 BTU British Thermal Unit buffer 1. In hardware, a circuit or component that isolates one electrical circuit from another. Typically, a buffer holds data from one circuit or process until another circuit or process is ready to accept the data. 2. In software, an area of memory that is used for temporary storage.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1621 Call Detail Recording (CDR) A feature that uses software and hardware to record call data (same as CDRU). Call Detail Recording utility (CDRU) Software that collects, stores, optionally filters, and outputs call-detail records. Call Management System (CMS) An application, running on an adjunct processor, that collects information from an ACD unit.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1622 capability group Set of capabilities, determined by switch administration, that can be requested by an application. Capability groups denote association types. For example, Call Control is a type of association that allows certain functions (the ones in the capability group) to be performed over this type of association.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1623 CDRR Call Detail Recording and Reporting CDRU See Call Detail Recording utility (CDRU). CED Caller entered digits CEM Channel-expansion multiplexing center-stage switch (CSS) The central interface between the processor port network and expansion port networks in a CSS-connected system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1624 CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference Class of Restriction (COR) A feature that allows up to 96 classes of call-origination and call-termination restrictions for voice terminals, voice-terminal groups, data modules, and trunk groups. See also Class of Service (COS).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1625 control carrier A carrier in a multi-carrier cabinet that contains the SPE circuit packs and, unlike an G3r control carrier, port circuit packs. Also called control cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet. See also switch-processing element (SPE). controlled station A station that is monitored and controlled via a domain-control association. COR See Class of Restriction (COR).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1626 CSCN Center-stage control network CSD Customer-service document CSM Centralized System Management CSS See center-stage switch (CSS). CSSO Customer Services Support Organization CSU Channel service unit CTS Clear to Send CWC See call work code. D DAC 1. Dial access code or Direct Agent Calling 2. See digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1627 data service unit (DSU) A device that transmits digital data on transmission facilities. data terminal An input/output (I/O) device that has either switched or direct access to a host computer or to a processor interface. data terminal equipment (DTE) Equipment consisting of the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1628 dial-repeating trunks A PBX tie trunk that is capable of handling PBX station-signaling information without attendant assistance. dial-repeating tie trunk A tie trunk that transmits called-party addressing information between two communications systems. DID Direct Inward Dialing digit conversion A process used to convert specific dialed numbers into other dialed numbers.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1629 digital trunk A circuit that carries digital voice and/or digital data in a telecommunications channel. DIOD Direct Inward and Outward Dialing direct agent A feature, accessed only via ASAI, that allows a call to be placed in a split queue but routed only to a specific agent in that split.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1630 domain-controlled split A split for which Third Party Domain Control request has been accepted. A domain-controlled split provides an event report for logout. domain-controlled station A station for which a Third_Party_Domain_Control request has been accepted. A domain-controlled station provides event reports for calls that are alerting, connected, or held at the station.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1631 duplication The use of redundant components to improve availability. When a duplicated subsystem fails, its backup redundant system automatically takes over. duplication option A system option that duplicates the following: control carrier containing the SPE, EI circuit packs in carriers, fiber-optic cabling between port networks, and center-stage switch in a CSS-connected system.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1632 EIA-232 A physical interface specified by the EIA. EIA-232 transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19.2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet. EIA-232 replaces RS-232 protocol in some DEFINITY applications.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1633 ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute expansion archangel (EAA) A network-control microprocessor located on an expansion interface (EI) port circuit pack in an expansion port network. The EA provides an interface between the EPN and its controlling switch-processing element.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1634 facility A telecommunications transmission pathway and associated equipment. facility-associated signaling (FAS) Signaling for which a D-channel carries signaling only for those channels on the same physical interface.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1636 H12 An ISDN information transfer rate for 1920-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards. handshaking logic A format used to initiate a data connection between two data module devices. hertz (Hz) A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1638 INS ISDN Network Service inside call A call placed from one telephone to another within the local communications system. Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) A public or private network that provides end-to-end digital communications for all services to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user-network interfaces defined by the CCITT.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1639 in-use lamp A red light on a multiappearance voice terminal that lights to show which call appearance will be selected when the handset is lifted or which call appearance is active when a user is off-hook. INWATS Inward Wide Area Telephone Service IO Information outlet ISDN See Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1640 kbyte Kilobyte kg Kilogram L LAN Local area network LAP-D Link Access Procedure on the D-channel LAPD Link Access Procedure data LATA Local access and transport area lb Pound LBO Line buildout LDN Listed directory number LDS Long-distance service LEC Local exchange carrier LED See light-emitting diode (LED).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1641 line buildout A selectable output attenuation is generally required of DTE equipment because T1 circuits require the last span to lose 15–22.5 dB. line port Hardware that provides the access point to a communications system for each circuit associated with a telephone or data terminal. link A transmitter-receiver channel that connects two systems.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1642 main-satellite-tributary A private network configuration that can either stand alone or access an ETN. A main switch provides interconnection, via tie trunks, with one or more subtending switches, called satellites; all attendant positions for the main/satellite configuration; and access to and from the public network.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1643 MDR Message detail record MEM Memory memory A device into which information can be copied and held, and from which information can later be obtained. memory shadowing link An operating-system condition that provides a method for memory-resident programs to be more quickly accessed, allowing a system to reboot faster.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1644 MMS Material Management Services MO Maintenance object modem A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone circuits. The analog signals are converted back to the original digital data signals by another modem at the other end of the circuit.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1645 MSS Mass storage system MSSNET Mass storage/network control MT Management terminal MTDM Modular trunk data module MTP Maintenance tape processor MTT Multitasking terminal multiappearance voice terminal A terminal equipped with several call-appearance buttons for the same extension, allowing the user to handle more than one call on that same extension at the same time.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1646 NANP North American Numbering Plan narrowband A circuit-switched call at a data rate up to and including 64 kbps. All nonwideband switch calls are considered narrowband.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1647 Nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS) A method that allows multiple T1 and/or E1 facilities to share a single D-channel to form an ISDN-PRI. If D-channel backup is not used, one facility is configured with a D-channel, and the other facilities that share the D-channel are configured without D-channels.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1648 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act OSI Open Systems Interconnect OSS Operations Support System OSSI Operational Support System Interface OTDR Optical time-domain reflectometer othersplit The work state that indicates that an agent is currently active on another split’s call, or in ACW for another split.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1649 party/extension active on call A party is on the call if he or she is actually connected to the call (in active talk or in held state). An originator of a call is always a party on the call. Alerting parties, busy parties, and tones are not parties on the call. PBX Private branch exchange PC See personal computer (PC). PCM See pulse-code modulation (PCM).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1650 PL Private line PLS Premises Lightwave System PMS Property Management System PN Port network PNA Private network access POE Processor occupancy evaluation POP Point of presence port A data- or voice-transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other devices.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1651 PRI endpoint (PE) The wideband switching capability introduces PRI endpoints on switch line-side interfaces. A PRI endpoint consists of one or more contiguous B-channels on a line-side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility and has an extension. Endpoint applications have call-control capabilities over PRI endpoints. principal A terminal that has its primary extension bridged on one or more other terminals.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1652 public network The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local and long-distance calling. pulse-code modulation (PCM) An extension of pulse-amplitude modulation (PAM) in which carrier-signal pulses modulated by an analog signal, such as speech, are quantized and encoded to a digital, usually binary, format.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1653 Redirection on No Answer An optional feature that redirects an unanswered ringing ACD call after an administered number of rings. The call is then redirected back to the agent. release To release a call is to initiate its disconnection. release signal The signal one switch sends to another to disconnect a call. If the calling switch ends the call, it sends a “forward” release signal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1654 RS-232C A physical interface specified by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). RS-232C transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19.2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet. RS-449 Recommended Standard 449 RSC Regional Support Center S S1 The first logical signalling channel of DCP. The channel is used to provide signaling information for DCP’s I1 channel.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1655 SCSI See small computer system interface (SCSI). SDDN Software-Defined Data Network SDI Switched Digital International SDLC Synchronous data-link control SDN Software-defined network SFRL Single-frequency return loss SID Station-identification number simplex system A system that has no redundant hardware.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1656 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol software A set of computer programs that perform one or more tasks. SPE Switch Processing Element SPID Service Profile Identifier split See ACD work mode. split condition A condition whereby a caller is temporarily separated from a connection with an attendant.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1657 stroke counts A method used by ACD agents to record up to nine customer-defined events per call when CMS is active. SVN Security-violation notification switch Any kind of telephone switching system. See also communications system. switchhook The buttons located under the receiver on a voice terminal.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1658 system manager A person responsible for specifying and administering features and services for a system. system reload A process that allows stored data to be written from a tape into the system memory (normally after a power outage). T T1 A digital transmission standard that in North America carries traffic at the DS1 rate of 1.544 Mbps.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1659 time-division multiplex (TDM) bus A bus that is time-shared regularly by preallocating short time slots to each transmitter. In a PBX, all port circuits are connected to the TDM bus, permitting any port to send a signal to any other port. time-division multiplexing (TDM) Multiplexing that divides a transmission channel into successive time slots. See also multiplexing.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1660 TTR Touch-tone receiver TTT Terminating trunk transmission TTTN See tandem tie-trunk network (TTTN). TTY Teletypewriter U UAP Usage-allocation plan UART Universal asynchronous transmitter UCD Uniform call distribution UCL Unrestricted call list UDP See Uniform Dial Plan (UDP).
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1661 V VAR Value-added reseller VDN See vector directory number (VDN). vector directory number (VDN) An extension that provides access to the Vectoring feature on the switch. Vectoring allows a customer to specify the treatment of incoming calls based on the dialed number. vector-controlled split A hunt group or ACD split administered with the vector field enabled.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary and abbreviations 1662 wideband A circuit-switched call at a data rate greater than 64 kbps. A circuit-switched call on a single T1 or E1 facility with a bandwidth between 128 and 1536 (T1) or 1984 (E1) kbps in multiples of 64 kbps. H0, H11, H12, and N x DS0 calls are wideband. wideband access endpoint Access endpoints, extended with wideband switching to include wideband access endpoints.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Index IN-11 Leave Word Calling (LWC), 1408 leave word calling buttons cancel, 71 lock, 71 message retrieval, 74 store, 71 Line Lockout, 1410 link alarm button, 71 list multimedia endpoints command , 282 list multimedia H.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.2 Administrator’s Guide 555-233-506 Issue 1 April 2000 Index IN-19 X X.25 Adjunct Data Module screen, see Data Module screen X.
DEFINITY ECS Release 8.
